Copyright: Copyright © 1998 GST Technology Ltd.
Citation: Copyright © 1998 GST Technology Ltd.


Getting under way...

Making a start on your document can be a little daunting, especially if you’ve chosen to begin with a blank page. MasterPublisher makes it easy to get the main features onto your page that you can then build the rest of the document around. Once you have these items in place you can fine-tune the document to perfection.

The most common questions asked are:

How do I set up my page format?

How do I draw a frame?

How do I type in text?

How do I import pictures?

If you have this Help Assistant displayed while you are working on your document you will notice that the topic often changes to reflect the action you are performing. If you want to take a look at a topic other than the one displayed, select the topic from the drop-down list at the top of this window.


Documents…

Documents are a combination of text and pictures that together make your MasterPublisher.DTP file. Creating your documents in MasterPublisher is easy. You can choose to create a new document from scratch or base one on a design you already have.

The most common questions asked about documents are:

How do I create a document from a blank page?

How do I set up my page format?

How do I move between pages?

How do I save my document?

Documents need to be carefully thought out and planned to create exactly the effect you want. Once you have set up your page and decided where you want everything to go you will need to create the items on the page and print it out to see how it looks on paper.

Select a topic you want to know more about.

Creating and opening documents…

Setting up your page…

Viewing your document…

Saving your documents…


Creating and opening documents
Creating and opening documents…

MasterPublisher gives you the option of creating a document from scratch or using a document you have created previously as a base that you can overwrite. Using an existing document as a basis for your new document has the advantage of having the page layout and text styles already defined, saving you time and effort.

What do you want to know more about?

Creating a document form a blank page

Creating a document based on and existing one

Editing an existing document

Opening a recently used document


Setting up your page
Setting up your page…

When you decide on the document you want to create you will no doubt have some idea of the size of page you want to use, the orientation of the page, how many column guides you want and what size margins you need. MasterPublisher lets you specify all of these factors to make sure that your document has exactly the right look for you.

What do you want to know more about?

Setting up the page format

Creating a custom page

Setting up the column guides

Adding pages


Viewing your document
Viewing your document…

When you are working on your document you may find that you want to change the size that you are viewing the page at or view different numbers of pages at the same time.

With MasterPublisher you can zoom in to the actual area you are working at, view the whole page you are working on to see how everything looks on the page or view a number of pages to see how they look together.

How you view your document will depend on what you are trying to do. You can even decide whether you want to view the rulers and what unit of measurement you want to use.

What do you want to know more about?

Moving between pages

Changing the view size

Viewing more than one page at a time

Changing the unit of measurement


Saving documents
Saving documents…

You may want to save your MasterPublisher documents so that you can go back and work on them at a later time or give them to a printer bureau so that they can be printed professionally. You can autosave your document at regular intervals while you are working or save it manually at your own convenience.

What do you want to know more about?

Saving your document

Autosaving your document

Creating a backup copy when saving

Compressing files when saving


Frames
Frames…

Frames are containers for every item in your document. A frame can hold your text, a picture, PowerText or any other item you want to include. You can place a frame on the page or pasteboard. Placing a frame on the pasteboard is handy if you want to put the frame and its contents to one side until you need to place it on the page.

The most common questions asked about frames are:

How do I draw a frame?

How do I select a frame?

How do I move a frame?

Once the frame has been drawn it can be manipulated in a number of ways, such as resizing it, moving it or applying a border to it. If you are not happy with your frame and its contents you can delete it or clear it and start again.

Select a topic you want to know more about.

Drawing and selecting frames…

Manipulating frames…

Working with frames…


Drawing and selecting frames
Drawing and selecting frames…

It’s so easy to draw frames on your page ready for the items you want to include. If you want to put anything into a frame or manipulate it in some way you need to select it first. You can select one frame at a time or select more than one if you want to give them the same effect.

What do you want to know more about?

Drawing a frame

Selecting a frame

Selecting more than one frame

Selecting all the frames on the page


Manipulating frames
Manipulating frames…

Once you have drawn a frame you can make changes to it to affect the way it looks and how it affects other items on the page. There are several changes you can make to a frame. You can:

Resize it

Rotate it

Give it a border

Change the shape of it

Give it a background style

And much more...

What do you want to know more about?

Resizing a frame

Rotating a frame

Applying a frame border

Defining the shape of a border

Applying a frame background


Working with frames
Working with frames…

You can work with frames in much the same way as with other objects. They can be cut, copied and pasted to create identical frames in your document and if you don’t like the contents of a frame you can clear it, ready to add something new. If you are unhappy with the position of the frame you can drag it to a new position, along with the contents of the frame. You can also decide whether you want to view the frames or hide them.

What do you want to know more about?

Moving a frame

Cutting, copying and pasting frames

Deleting frames

Clearing frames

Hiding frames


Paragraph styles
Paragraph styles…

Paragraph styles let you style whole blocks of text consistently and accurately. When you apply a paragraph style to a block of text, every word in that text is styled in the same font, size and color. All text styled in the same paragraph style will have the same alignment, spacing and every other property you can apply to your text, making the appearance of your documents completely consistent.

The most common questions asked about paragraph styles are:

How do I create a paragraph style?

How do I apply a paragraph style?

How do I change the font, point size and color of a paragraph style?

You can create paragraph styles for all the common elements of your document such as the headline, body text, captions or numbered text. This not only makes your document look consistent, but is also much easier than manually applying the fonts, spacing and alignments of your text.

Select a topic you want to know more about.

Working with paragraph styles…

Editing paragraph styles…


Working with paragraph styles
Working with paragraph styles…

Creating and using paragraph styles is easy. You can format a piece of text and then convert it to a paragraph style or create a paragraph style in the Paragraph Styles dialog box and then apply it to blocks of text.

What do you want to know more about?

Creating a paragraph style

Editing an existing paragraph style

Applying a paragraph style

Deleting a paragraph style


Editing paragraph styles
Editing paragraph styles…

If you make a change to a paragraph style the change will take effect throughout the document in the paragraphs that have been given that style. This means that you can be certain that the text in your document will be consistently styled. There’s no need to go through and check it all.

What do you want to know more about?

Changing the font, point size and color of a paragraph style

Changing the alignment of a paragraph style

Changing the bullet style of a paragraph style

Changing the default tab spacing of a paragraph style


Text
Text…

It is fair to say that text will play an important role in your MasterPublisher documents, whether it is a poster, a newsletter or a letterhead. The way you style the text and position it on the page will create an image of both you and your document for your intended audience.

The most common questions asked about text are:

How do I type in text?

How do I import text?

How do I select text?

How do I set the font, point size and color of text?

Once you have the text on your page you will need to edit and style it to suit the tone and image you want to create.

Select a topic that you want to know more about.

Adding and exporting text…

Manipulating text…

Reviewing text…

Formatting text…


Adding and exporting text
Adding and exporting text…

How you add text to your MasterPublisher documents will depend on the source of the text.

You can type text directly into your document and even export it again to use it in other programs. If you have created a piece of text in another program you have the choice of:

Saving it in the program and then importing it into MasterPublisher

Copying it from the program and pasting it into MasterPublisher

Dragging and dropping it from the program into MasterPublisher.

What do you want to know more about?

Using the text cursor

Typing in text

Importing text

Exporting text

Pasting text


Manipulating text
Manipulating text…

You can manipulate text to move it around the page and organize it how you want, flow it through different frames and export it to use in other programs.

You have absolute control over where and how your text appears in your document.

What do you want to know more about?

Selecting text

Rotating text

Flowing text through frames

Cutting, copying and pasting text


Reviewing text
Reviewing text…

Once you have completed the text in your document you will need to review it and check that it is how it should be. This could include:

Checking the spelling of your text

Using the thesaurus to change a word

Searching through for a specific word.

What do you want to know more about?

Checking the spelling of text

Replacing a word using the thesaurus

Searching for text

Searching for and replacing text

Hyphenating text


Formatting text
Formatting text…

There are a number of different aspects of your text that you might want to change to suit your document. You can change the font, make it bold or italic, change the case, change the point size or change how the letters, words and lines are spaced from each other.

What do you want to know more about?

Changing the text style

Changing the font, point size and color of text

Applying bullets to text

Changing the alignment of text

Changing the tabs in text


PowerText
PowerText…

PowerText is a quick and easy way to create stylish and eye-catching text effects for your documents. You can create text that is shaped, distorted and manipulated and give it a snazzy background.

It is ideal for creating dynamic headlines, mastheads for newsletters and even logos.

What do you want to know more about?

Creating a new PowerText effect

Opening an existing PowerText effect

Entering text into your PowerText effect

Saving a PowerText effect


Tables
Tables…

Use tables in your documents to organize information in an easily readable and accessible way. The information could be a table of contents, dates or a simple accounts sheet - in fact, any kind of table you might want in your document.

Once you have created your tables you can style them to make them fit in with your document style or edit them to add or remove cells, rows or columns.

What do you want to know more about?

Creating a table

Inserting rows and columns

Changing the table style

Changing the cell height and width


Pictures
Pictures…

Including pictures in your documents can make all the difference. It can turn a dull, ordinary looking document into a powerful attention-grabbing document. MasterPublisher gives you the opportunity to use a number of different types of pictures in your documents.

The most common questions asked about pictures are:

How do I import pictures?

How do I scan a picture?

How do I re-color pictures?

How do I resize pictures?

How do I crop pictures?

Once you have added your picture you can edit it to make it fit in better with your document. You can crop it, resize it, move it or re-color it to suit your needs.

Select a topic that you want to know more about.

Adding and removing pictures...

Editing pictures…


Adding and removing pictures
Adding and removing pictures…

Pictures can be inserted into your documents in a number of ways. You can:

Import the picture

Copy the picture from another program and paste it into MasterPublisher

Drag-and-drop the picture from another program into MasterPublisher

Scan the picture into MasterPublisher.

What do you want to know more about?

Importing pictures

Scanning pictures

Pasting pictures

Removing pictures


Editing pictures
Editing pictures…

Once you have your picture in your document you can make some changes to it that will customize it to suit your document. You can:

Change the overall color of it to make it correspond to a company color or other color scheme

Crop it so that only part of the picture is displayed

Resize it.

What do you want to know more about?

Re-coloring pictures

Resizing pictures

Moving pictures

Rotating pictures

Cropping pictures


Color
Color…

Using color can make an amazing difference to your finished document. You can color everything - text, pictures, frames and borders. You can use color to highlight a particular area in your document or just to add impact.

If the color you want isn’t included in the MasterPublisher palette, you can add it yourself by either creating a new color from scratch or editing an existing color.

What do you want to know more about?

Applying color to your document

Creating a new color

Editing an existing color


Lines
Lines…

You can use MasterPublisher to draw lines in your documents. These could be:

Straight lines

Curved lines

Freehand lines.

Drawing lines directly in MasterPublisher can be especially useful for basic charts and graphs or as design elements.

The most common questions asked about lines are:

How do I change the line style?

How do I move my lines?

How do I draw freehand lines?

If you close up a line you have drawn directly into MasterPublisher, the shape that you create acts in exactly the same way as a shape you have drawn and can be used as a frame to insert objects into.

Select a topic that you want to know more about:

Drawing shapes and lines

Manipulating shapes and lines


Shapes
Shapes...

You can use shapes to add design elements to your page. The shapes available are:

Rectangle

Rounded box

Ellipse

Star

Every shape that you draw also acts like a frame that you can insert objects into, whether it is text, pictures or PowerText. The most common questions asked about shapes are:

How do I draw basic shapes?

How do I change the fill style?

How do I resize shapes?

Once you have drawn your shape you can manipulate it in a number of ways, including ungrouping it and editing the shape, coloring it and rotating it.

Select a topic you want to know more about:

Drawing shapes and lines

Manipulating shapes and lines


Drawing shapes and lines
Drawing shapes and lines…

Drawing shapes and lines couldn’t be easier. Just use a tool from the selection available to draw the shape you want. You can choose from:

Drawing a basic shape

Drawing a straight line

Drawing a curved line

Drawing a freehand line.

What do you want to know more about?

Drawing basic shapes

Drawing a straight line

Drawing a freehand line

Drawing a curved line


Manipulating shapes and lines
Manipulating shapes and lines…

Once you have drawn your shape or line you can edit it to make it exactly what you want. You can change the color and effect of the line style and fill style to make it compatible with the other colors used in your documents. Your shape or line can also be resized, moved or rotated to create whatever effect you need.

What do you want to know more about?

Moving shapes and lines

Rotating shapes and lines

Changing the line style of shapes and lines

Changing the fill style of shapes

Cutting, copying and pasting shapes and lines


Printing
Printing…

Whether you are intending to print your document on a desktop printer or have it printed professionally at a print bureau, you will need to know at least the basics of printing. MasterPublisher offers you advanced printing options for printing color separations, booklet printing and printing labels.

What do you want to know more about?

Displaying the printable page area

Setting up your printer

Printing your document

Printing color separations


Mail merge
Mail merge…

Mail merge combines a mailing list of names and addresses into your documents, such as letters, to give you a customized standard letter for your recipients.

This is especially useful for a customer or client mailing list so that you don’t need to create an individual letter for each one. You could even use it to send letters to your friends, such as an invitation to a party or announcing the birth of your child.

After creating your mailing list with the details of all your intended recipients you can choose which records from the list to include. You can even save the mailing list to use with other documents.

What do you want to know more about?

Creating a new mailing list

Inserting mail merge fields into your document

Editing records in a mailing list

Printing a mail merge document


Drawing shapes
Drawing shapes...

Drawing shapes in MasterPublisher couldn’t be easier.

Once you’ve selected the shape you want from the Toolbox, simply hold down the mouse button and drag the pointer across the page until the shape is the size you want.

To draw the shape from its center, hold down Shift as you drag the mouse pointer.

To draw a shape with equal proportions, hold down Ctrl as you drag the mouse pointer.

Once you have drawn the shape you can use the Frame Properties dialog box to edit it, e.g. by changing the number of sides.

Alternatively, you can ungroup the shape to edit it manually.

What do you want to know more about?

How do I edit a basic shape?

How do I manually edit a shape?

How do I change the line style of a shape?

How do I change the fill style of a shape?


Drawing lines
Drawing lines...

Drawing straight lines is so simple, it’s child’s play. All you need to do is select the Line tool and click where you want the points on the path to be.

When you’ve finished drawing the line do any one of the following:

Press Escape

Press the Spacebar

Double-click the mouse button.

If you make the last point on your line close to the first point, the two points will be joined to make a solid shape.

As with shapes, once the line is finished you can edit it using the Frame Properties dialog box or by ungrouping it and editing it manually.

What do you want to know more about?

How do I manually edit a line?

How do I change the line style of a line?

How do I resize a line?


Drawing curves
Drawing curves...

Use curved lines to create design effects in your documents or to create your own uniquely shaped frames. Simply select the Curve tool and click on the page where you want the curve points to be.

When you’ve finished drawing the line do any one of the following:

Press Escape

Press the Spacebar

Double-click the mouse button.

If you make the last point on your line close to the first point, the two points will be joined to make a solid shape.

As with shapes, once the line is finished you can edit it using the Frame Properties dialog box or by ungrouping it and editing it manually.

What do you want to know more about?

How do I manually edit a line?

How do I change the line style of a line?

How do I resize a line?


Drawing freehand lines
Drawing freehand lines...

Freehand lines give you complete control over the shape you create. It’s just like using a pencil. Just select the Pencil tool and hold down the mouse button as you drag the pointer over the page.

When you release the mouse pointer, the line is finished.

If you make the last point on your line close to the first point, the two points will be joined to make a solid shape.

As with shapes, once the line is finished you can edit it using the Frame Properties dialog box or by ungrouping it and editing it manually.

What do you want to know more about?

How do I manually edit a line?

How do I change the line style of a line?

How do I resize a line?


Using MasterDraw objects
Using MasterDraw objects...

MasterDraw is a dynamic graphics program that lets you create stylish and imaginative graphics. If you have MasterDraw installed on your computer, you can insert and edit MasterDraw objects in your documents without having to actually open MasterDraw.

If you have a MasterDraw object in your document already, you can select it and then click on the MasterDraw tool to edit the object.

If you have a frame selected without a MasterDraw object when you click on the MasterDraw tool, you can create a new MasterDraw object in that frame.

If you do not have a frame selected when you click on the MasterDraw tool, a frame will appear for you to create your MasterDraw object in.

When you click on the MasterDraw tool, the MasterDraw window appears so that you can create your object. When you close MasterDraw, the object appears in the frame. For more information about using the MasterDraw tools, click on Help Topics in the MasterDraw Help menu.

When you have finished working with your MasterDraw object, click anywhere in the work area outside the selected frame to return to return to MasterPublisher.


Design Snippets

Design snippets are a handy new feature of MasterPublisher. If you have a part of a document that you might want to use in any other documents you create, just select the frame(s) and save them as a design snippet. This is especially useful if you have created a company logo and want to use it over and over again without having to recreate it.

What do you want to know more about?

How do I insert a design snippet?

How do I save part of my document as a design snippet?


Startup


About IMSI
Copyright© IMSI 1996-1998. All rights reserved.


Colors dialog box


This box shows all the colors in the current color palette with their names. You can edit or rename any color from the palette. Use the scroll bar to select the color if necessary.

Click on a color to see it in the preview box.

Double-click on a color to select it and display the Edit Color dialog box.


Click on this to sort the colors by name and list them alphabetically.


Click on this to sort the colors according to their shades.


In this text box, type the number of tints of each color that you want to be shown in the color bar.


Click on this button to add a color to the palette. The Add Color dialog box appears, with the currently selected color in the preview box. You can use any color in the current palette as a starting point; this is useful when you want two or more shades of an existing color.

The original color will remain in the palette, regardless of how many changes you make to it.


Click on this button to edit a color in the palette. The Edit Color dialog box appears with the currently selected color in the preview box.

Editing an existing color replaces the original color in the palette.

This option is disabled when Black (the default color) is selected.


Click on this button to delete a color from the palette.

This option is disabled when Black (the default color) is selected.


Click on this button to display the Load Colors dialog box and choose another color palette to use in your document.


Click on this button to display the Save Colors dialog box and save your changes, which will be reflected in the color palette at the bottom of the MasterPublisher window. You can then use this color palette in other documents.


This preview box displays the currently selected color.


Edit Color dialog box/Add Color dialog box


Type a new name for your color in this box.


Click on this to select RGB as your color model. Your color will be made up of red, green and blue.


Click on this to select CMYK as your color model. Your color will be made up of cyan, magenta, yellow and black.


Click on this to select HLS as your color model. With this model you can determine the amount of hue, lightness and saturation in your colors.


Click on this to select PANTONE as your color model. PANTONE is an industry standard that is used for printing.


Check this box to specify a spot color for printing separations. You must give the color a name if you choose this option; if you do not, a message appears asking you to do so.


This preview box shows your new color. Click on the color blocks around the box to add that color. Shift-click on a color block to remove the color.


The preview box shows your new color. Click on the color blocks around the box to add that color. Shift-click on a color block to remove the color.


The preview box shows your new color. Click on the color blocks around the box to add that color. Shift-click on a color block to remove the color.


The preview box shows your new color. Click on the color blocks around the box to add that color. Shift-click on a color block to remove the color.


The preview box shows your new color. Click on the color blocks around the box to add that color. Shift-click on a color block to remove the color.


The preview box shows your new color. Click on the color blocks around the box to add that color. Shift-click on a color block to remove the color.


The preview box shows your new color. Click on the color blocks around the box to add that color. Shift-click on a color block to remove the color.


The preview box shows your new color. Click on the color blocks around the box to add that color. Shift-click on a color block to remove the color.


The preview box shows your new color. Click on the color blocks around the box to add that color. Shift-click on a color block to remove the color.


The name for this bar changes according to which color model you have selected. It can be Red, Cyan or Hue.


Drag the slider to change the amount of red, cyan or hue.


Type the amount of red, cyan or hue you want directly into this box.


The name for this bar changes according to which color model you have selected. It can be Green, Magenta or Lightness.


Drag the slider to change the amount of green, magenta or lightness.


Type the amount of green, magenta or lightness you want directly into this box.


The name for this bar changes according to which color model you have selected. It can be Blue, Yellow or Saturation.


Drag the slider to change the amount of blue, yellow or saturation.


Type the amount of blue, yellow or saturation you want directly into this box.


Use these controls to change the amount of black in your color.


Drag the slider to change the amount of black in your color.


Type the amount of black you want directly into this box.


Drag the Hue slider to add more red, green or blue to your color. If the slider is directly under r your color will be red, under b it will be blue and under g it will be green.


Select the Pantone book you want from this drop-down list box.


Displays the Pantone colors in the book that you have chosen. Click on a color to select it.


Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of colors available.


 Scan Picture dialog box


Click on this button to select which scanner to use. This option is disabled if there is no scanner installed.


Click on this button to start scanning. This option is disabled if no scanner is installed. The scanning options available (e.g. speed, color) will depend on your scanner.

Pictures are scanned as bitmaps. You can color or scale them by selecting Picture Attributes from the Frame menu, and displaying the Frame Picture tab.


Displays the name of the current scanner or informs you that you are not connected to a scanner.


 Add Pages dialog box


Type the number of new pages, or set the number by using the arrows on the box.


Click on this to insert the new pages before the current page.


Click on this to insert the new pages after the current page.


Displays the number of the current page.


 Delete Pages dialog box


Type the number of the first page you want to delete.


Type the number of pages you want to delete after the first page.


Displays the page number of the first page in the document.


Displays the number of the current page in the document.


Displays the page number of the last page in the document.


 Go To Page dialog box


Type the page number that you want to go to.


Click on this to go to the left master page. This button only appears when your document has both a left and right master page.


Click on this to go to the right master page. This button only appears when your document has both a left and right master page.


Click on this to go to the master page. This button only appears when your document has only one master page.


 Find & Replace dialog box/Find dialog box


Type the text you want to find. The text may include spaces. Use '?' as a wildcard, e.g. t?e will find tee, the, the first three letters of tree, etc.


Type the text with which you want to replace the text in the Find What box.


Check this box if you want to search for the string exactly as you have typed it.


Check this box if you want to find whole words only and not parts of longer words.


Click on this to find the next occurrence of the text in the document, when the text is found it will be highlighted.


Click on this to replace the highlighted text with the text in the Replace With box.


Click on this to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.


 Summary Information dialog box


Type the title for the document here.


Type the subject of the document here.


MasterPublisher automatically inserts the user name into this box, but you can edit it to put in a different name.


Type keywords for the document here.


Type any comments you have about the document here. Use the scroll bar to view the whole box.


Click on this to display the Document Statistics dialog box, which contains statistical information about the document.


Displays the filename of your document.


Displays the folder where your document is saved.


Displays the name of the template (if any) used to create your document.


Picture Status dialog box


Displays the name of the file.


Click on this to remove the file from the document. You will be requested to confirm this before you continue.


Type the amount that you want to rotate the picture by in this box, or use the arrows to select a number.


Displays the size of the file in terms of memory.


Displays the size of the file in terms of memory.


Displays the resolution of the image in dpi (dots per inch).


Displays the color depth of the image, i.e. the maximum number of colors used.


 Align Frames dialog box


Click on this to align the selected frames at their left edges.


Click on this to align the selected frames at their centers.


Click on this to align the selected frames at their right edges.


Click on this to turn the horizontal alignment off.


Click on this to align the selected frames at their top edges.


Click on this to align the middle of the selected frames to each other.


Click on this to align the selected frames at their bottom edge.


Click on this to turn the vertical alignment off.


Shows how your frames will align to each other.


 Thesaurus dialog box


Displays the word that you have chosen to look up in the thesaurus. You can type a different word to look up directly into this box. The drop-down list box displays the previous thirty words you have looked up. You can select a word to look up from this drop-down list box.


Lists possible meanings for the selected word. To look up a listed word, select it and click on Look Up. Alternatively, double-click on the word in the list.


Displays the word that you have selected in the Meanings list box (or the first word in the list). You can use this word to replace the word you have looked up.


Displays alternative words or phrases for the word in the Replace Word box.


Click on this to look up a word you have chosen from either the meanings or synonyms list.


Click on this to replace the word you looked up in your text with the word in the Replace Word box.


Displays the language of the spelling, hyphenation and thesaurus dictionaries currently in use. You can select another language if you have other dictionaries installed, and the current word will be searched for in the new language.


 Object status dialog box


Displays the name of the file. You can change this by typing a new name here.


 About IMSI


Click on this to display information about IMSI and their other products.


Displays information about MasterPublisher.


 Popup query


Click on the action that you want to take.


Click on the action that you want to take.


Click on the action that you want to take.


Click on the action that you want to take.


Click on the action that you want to take.


Abort printing


Displays information about the current print job and its progress. Click on the Cancel button to abort the print job.


Document statistics dialog box


Displays the time and date when the document was created.


Displays the time and date when the document was last saved.


Displays the time and date when the document was last printed.


Displays the name of the person who last saved the document.


Displays the revision number of the document. This is the number of times that the document has been edited and saved.


Displays the amount of time that has been spent working on the document.


Displays the number of pages used in the document.


Group box generic


Help is available for each item in the group box. Click on ? at the top of the dialog box, then click on the specific item you want help about.


 Import File dialog box


You have attempted to import a file whose format cannot be recognized by MasterPublisher. Choose a different file type from the list below.


Displays a list of the file formats that can be recognized by MasterPublisher. Select the alternative file format you want, then click on OK.


Displays a list of the file formats that can be recognized by MasterPublisher. Select the alternative file format you want, then click on OK.


Print dialog box


Click on this to display the General tab.


Click on this to display the Paper tab.


Click on this to display the Separations tab.


Click on this to display the Options dialog box.


Click on this to print your document to the selected printer with the properties you have chosen.


Click on this to view a print preview of your document. The document will be shown exactly as it will print according to the print selections you have made.


Click on this to close the Print dialog box without printing your document.


General tab (Print dialog box)


Displays the name of the currently selected printer.


Check this check box if you want to print your document to a file on disk. This option maybe disabled if your selected printer does not support this option.

When you print the document you will be asked to specify where you want to save it.


Click on this to select a different printer or change the settings of the currently selected printer.


Type the number of copies of the document you want to print or use the up and down arrows to change the number.


Check this box to print each copy of your document in the page order 1,2,3,... 1,2,3,... rather than 1,1,... 2,2,... 3,3,...etc.. This option is disabled if you are printing only one copy or only one page.


Click on this if you want to print all the pages of your document.


Click on this if you want to print only the current page of your document.


Click on this if you want to specify a page range in your document to print.


Type the first page of your document that you want to print.

This box is only enabled when you have selected Pages from the Page Selection group box.


Type the last page that you want to print.

This box is only enabled when you have selected Pages from the Page Selection group box.


Click on this if you want to print a copy of the document for all the entries in your mailing list.


Click on this if you want to print a copy of the document for the current record in the mailing list only.


Click on this if you want to print a copy of the document for the selected records in the mailing list.


Click on this to select the records from your mailing list that you want to print copies of the document for.


Paper tab (Print dialog box)


Select how you want your pages to be printed. The options available in this list box will vary according to the page style you selected on the Size & Orientation tab of the Page dialog box.


Check this check box if you want to print on both sides of the paper. This option is automatically checked if you selected Booklet printing from the Paper Mapping list box.


If you have chosen to print on both sides of the paper, check this check box if you want the printing to pause between sides.

A dialog box will appear asking for information about how the paper is fed into your printer. MasterPublisher will print all of the right/left sides of the document. You are then asked to return the paper to the printer and it will print the opposite sides.


Displays a pictorial representation of the paper mapping you have selected.


Separations tab (Print dialog box)


Check this check box to enable color separation printing.


Select the type of color separations you want to print. The spot colors available are those you specified in the Add Color or Edit Color dialog boxes.


Check this check box if you want spot colors to ‘knockout’ the colors beneath them, rather than printing on top of them. This option is disabled if you have selected to print process colors.


Check this check box if you want black to print on top of any other color on the page. This option is disabled if you are printing process colors.


Check this check box if you want to output each separation to disk as a separate file.


Displays all the available separations of the type you selected in the Type of Separations list box. Select the separations you want to print.


Click on this to change the screen settings for your separations. If you are not sure whether you should change these or not, ask your printer bureau.


Options tab (Print dialog box)


Check this check box if your document page is smaller than the printer paper and you want to print crop marks as a guideline to the page size.


Check this check box if you want to print any graphics you have used in your document. This includes pictures, PowerText and OLE objects.

When this box is cleared, graphics are not printed.


Check this check box if you want to print any frames you have marked as annotations in your document.

When this box is cleared, annotation frames are not printed.


Check this check box if you want to print your document in monochrome.


Check this box to pause printing between sheets. After every page is printed you are prompted to continue printing. This option is useful if you need to change headed paper, or are using a sheet feeder.


Check this box to print the document in reverse order. This is a useful option for some printers that collate pages in reverse order.


Check this box to print your document in reverse. This option is only available when printing to a PostScript printer.


Check this box to print your document so that all colors are printed as their negatives. This option is available only when printing to a PostScript printer.


Page dialog box


Click on this to display the Size & Orientation tab.


Click on this to display the Margins & Columns tab.


Click on this to display the Page Numbers tab.


Select the pages you want to apply your changes to. Some options can only be applied to the whole document.


Check this check box if you want to resize the frames on your page in proportion with the page itself. If this check box is cleared, the frames will stay the same actual size.


Size & Orientation tab (Page dialog box)


Select the page style you want from the list of those available.

The choice you make here will affect the page sizes available to you.


Select the page size you want for your document. The choices available here depend on the page style you choose.


Click on this button to add a new page size to the list.


Click on this button to edit the selected page size. You can change the name, height or width.


Click on this to remove a page size from the list.


Select this if you want your page(s) to be portrait orientation. The height of the page is greater than the width.


Select this if you want your page(s) to be landscape orientation. The width of the page is greater than the height.


Displays a pictorial representation of the selected page style.


Margins & Columns tab (Page dialog box)


Type the distance you want from the top of the page to the top of the column guides in this box.


Type the distance you want from the bottom of the page to the bottom of the column guides in this box.


Type the distance you want from the left-hand side of the page to the left-hand side of the left column guide in this box.


Type the distance you want from the right-hand side of the page to the right-hand side of the right column guide in this box.


Type the width you want the binding margin to be in this box.

The binding margin is the extra space given down the edge of the page that will be bound.


Type the number of column guides you want in this box or use the up and own arrows to select the number.


Type the space you want between each column guide in this box or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Type the distance you want between the top of the page and the top of the header frame in this box or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Type the distance you want between the bottom of the page and the bottom of the footer frame in this box or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Page Numbers tab (Page dialog box)


Check this check box if you want to add page numbers to your document.


From this drop-down list box, select where you want to put the page numbers on your page(s). You can choose from either in the header or footer.


From this drop-down list box, select how you want to align the page number in the header or footer frame.


Select this if you want to style your page numbers in standard Arabic numerals i.e. 1, 2, 3, ...


Select this if you want to style your page numbers in lower case roman numerals i.e. i, ii, iii ...


Select this if you want to style your page numbers in upper case roman numerals i.e. I, II, III ...


Select this if you want to style your page numbers in lower case letters i.e. a, b, c ...


Select this if you want to style your page numbers in upper case letters i.e. A, B, C ...


Type the first page of your document that you want to put a page number on in this box.


Type the number that you want to put on the first numbered page of your document in this box.


Add/Edit Custom Page Size dialog box


Type the name for your page or stationery in this box.


Type the width of your page or stationery in this box, or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Type the height for your page or stationery in this box, or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Add Custom Stationery dialog box


Type the distance you want between the left-hand edge of one page (e.g. a label) to the left-hand edge of the page next to it. This will determine any gap to be placed between the pages on the printed paper.


Type the distance you want between the top of one page (e.g. a label) and the top of the page below it. This will determine any gap to be placed between the pages on the printed paper.


Type the space you want from the left-hand edge of the paper and the left-hand edge of the custom page (e.g. a label).


Type the space you want from the top of the paper and the top of the custom page (e.g. a label).


Type the number of pages you want to print across the printed paper, or use the up and down arrows to select the number.


Type the number of pages you want to print down the printed paper, or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Displays a pictorial representation of the measurements you should specify for your custom stationery.


Preferences dialog box


Click on this to display the Document tab.


Click on this to display the Spelling tab.


Click on this to display the Auto Backup tab.


Click on this to display the Controls tab.


Click on this to display the View tab.


Document tab (Preferences dialog box)


Select the way you want MasterPublisher to appear when you open it from this drop-down list box.


Check this check box if you want text to wrap around frames by default.


Select the unit of measurement you want to use in your document from this drop-down list box. The units used are displayed in the ruler intersection.


Select this if you want the Page Up and Page Down keys on your keyboard to scroll the MasterPublisher window.


Select this if you want the Page Up and Page Down keys on your keyboard to flip through the pages of your document.


Check this check box if you want MasterPublisher to create a backup copy of your document when you save it.

The file will be saved with the same name as the original, but with the file extension .BAK. Saving a backup copy of the document when you save will make saving your document take longer.


Check this check box if you want MasterPublisher to compress you documents to save space.


Check this check box if you want to be prompted to enter summary information about your document the first time you save it.


Select this if you want to snap objects to guides when you move them.


Type the size that you want the grid to be in this box or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Spelling tab (Preferences dialog box)


Check this check box if you want MasterPublisher to automatically highlight words that it cannot find in the user dictionary as you type. The words are underlined in the way you specify on the View tab.


Check this check box if you want the spell checker to ignore any words typed entirely in capitals in your document.


Check this check box if you want the spell checker to ignore any word in your document that has a number in it.


Check this check box if you want the spell checker to ignore any words in your document that start with a capital letter e.g. names.


Auto Backup tab (Preferences dialog box)


Select this if you want MasterPublisher to beep at regular intervals to remind you to save your document.


Select this if you want MasterPublisher to save your work automatically at regular intervals.


Select this if you do not want your document to be automatically backed up.


Type the time in minutes you want to leave between each automatic backup.


View tab (Preferences dialog box)


Select the item that you want to change the color of.


Select the color you want to change the item you selected in the list box to.


Check this check box to have frames and column guides displayed in your document.


Check this check box to have ghost styles of paragraph styles displayed in your document.


Check this check box to display the printable area of your document.


Check this check box to make sure that any graphics used in your document are displayed. Graphics include any picture, PowerText effects and OLE objects.


Controls tab (Preferences dialog box)


Check this check box to make sure that rulers are displayed.


Check this check box to make sure that the color bar is displayed.


Check this check box to make sure that the information line is displayed.


Check this check box to make sure that the contents box is displayed.


Check this check box to make sure that the nudge control is displayed.


Check this check box to make sure that the Help Assistant is displayed.


Check this check box to make sure that the General Tools are displayed.


Check this check box to make sure that the Frame Tools are displayed.


Check this check box to make sure that the Border Tools are displayed.


Check this check box to make sure that the Paragraph Tools are displayed.


Check this check box to make sure that the Text Tools are displayed.


Check this check box to make sure that the Mail Merge Tools are displayed.


Check this check box to make sure that the Web Document Tools are displayed.


Frame Properties dialog box


Click on this to display the Shape tab.


Click on this to display the Size and Position tab.


Click on this to display the Border Styles tab.


Click on this to display the Background tab.


Click on this to display the Frame Picture tab.


Click on this to display the Frame Text tab.


Shape tab (Frame Properties dialog box)


Click on this to make the selected frame a rectangle.


Click on this to make the selected frame shape a rectangle with rounded corners.


Click on this to make the selected frame shape a circle or oval.


Click on this to make the selected frame shape a star. Type the number of points you want on the star in the Number of Points box.


Click on this if you want to make the selected frame shape a starburst. Type the number of points you want on the starburst in the Number of Points box.


Click on this if you want to make the selected frame shape autotrace itself around the picture it contains.


Click on this if you want to convert the selected frame to a line.


Click on this if you want to make the selected frame shape a polygon. Type the number of points you want on the polygon in the Number of Points box.


Type the number of points you want on your star, starburst or polygon in this box or use the up and down arrows to select the number.


Check this check box to rotate a star, starburst or polygon so that its base is the next point or side.


Check this check box if you have selected a line shape and want the path to be closed, making it a solid shape.


Drag this slider to change the length of the inner points on a starburst. The higher the percentage, the longer the inner points are.


Drag this slider to change the inner radius of a star or starburst. The higher the percentage radius, the 'fatter' the star is.


Click on this if you want the selected frame to obscure text in a frame that it is positioned over.


Click on this if you want the selected frame to force text in a frame it is positioned over to wrap around it.


Type the amount of space by which you want to repel text from the top and bottom of the frame, or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Type the amount of space that you want to repel text from the left and right-hand sides of the frame by or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Size and Position tab (Frame Properties dialog box)


Type the amount of space you want between the left-hand side of the page and the left-hand side of the selected frame in this box, or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Type the amount of space you want between the top of the page and the top of the selected frame in this box, or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Type the width you want the selected frame to be in this box, or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Type the height you want the selected frame to be in this box, or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Type the angle you want the selected frame to be in this box, or use the up and down arrows to select the amount. Alternatively, drag the radius of the circle to the angle you want.


Check this check box to make sure that whenever you change the height or width of the selected frame, the width or height will change in proportion.


Check this check box to lock the selected frame in position. When this check box is checked you cannot change the size, position or angle of the frame, but can change all other attributes.


Check this check box to mark the selected frame as an annotation. When you print your document this frame will not be printed unless you specify printing annotation frames.


Displays the current units of measurement. You can change these using the Preferences dialog box.


Border Styles tab (Frame Properties dialog box/Table Cell Properties dialog box)


Click on the arrow to drop down the list box and select whether you want no border style, a standard line style, a traditional border style or a decorative border style from the categories available.


Displays the borders available. Select a style from the list to apply it to the selected frame(s) or cell(s).


If you have chosen a standard line style, you can select an arrow head from this box to add to the start of the selected line.


If you have chosen a standard line style, you can select an arrow head from this box to add to the end of the selected line.


Click on this to apply the selected border style to none of the sides on the selected frame.


Click on this to apply the selected border style to the top and bottom sides of the selected frame.


Click on this to apply the selected border style to the right and left-hand sides of the selected frame.


Click on this to apply the selected border style to all the sides of the selected frame.


Check the check boxes on the sides that you want to apply the selected border style to.


Check this check box if you want to specify the width of the border or line style. Type the width you want the border to be, or use the up and down arrows to specify the amount. Select the unit of measurement you want to use from the drop-down list box.


Type the width you want the border to be, or use the up and down arrows to specify the amount. Select the unit of measurement you want to use from the drop-down list box.


Check this check box if you want to specify a color for the selected line or border style other than the default.


Select the color you want the line or border style to be from this drop-down list box.


Select which sides of the selected cell(s) you want to apply the border style to.


Background tab (Frame Properties dialog box/Table Cell Properties dialog box)


Displays all the available background styles, including graduated fill styles and textured fills. Select the fill style you want to use.


Use this drop-down color palette to select a color for a plain fill style. If you have selected a graduated fill style, the color you choose here is the ‘from’ color.


Use this drop-down list box to select a ‘to’ color for a graduated fill style. If you have chosen a textured fill style, this will change the color of the texture.


Displays a preview of the fill style you have chosen. If you have chosen a linear or cylindrical graduated fill style, you can drag the arrow to change the angle of the fill.


Check this check box if you want to specify a color for the textured fill style.


Type the angle that you want the texture at in this box or use the up and down arrows to specify the amount. Alternatively, drag the radius of the circle to the angle you want.


Drag the slider to increase or decrease the detail of the texture. The higher the detail, the larger the texture is.


Frame Picture tab (Frame Properties dialog box)


Click on this to have the picture in the selected frame stretch to fit the size and shape of the frame.


Click on this to have the selected frame resize to fit the picture it contains.


Click on this to have the picture in the selected frame centered in the frame.


Click on this to have the picture in the selected frame tiled by the amount you specify in the Tile Picture group box.


Check this check box if you want to re-color the picture in the selected frame with shades of one color.


Drop-down the color palette and select the color that you want to re-color the picture in the selected frame in shades of.


Check this check box if you want to flip the picture in the selected frame horizontally across a vertical axis.


Check this check box if you want to flip the picture in the selected frame vertically across a horizontal axis.


Check this check box if you want to make the white areas of the picture in the selected frame transparent.


Type the angle that you want the picture at in this box or use the up and down arrows to select the amount. Alternatively, drag the radius of the circle to the angle you want.


Type the number of times you want to tile the picture across the frame or use the up and down arrows to select the number.


Type the number of times you want to tile the picture down the frame or use the up and down arrows to select the number.


Check this check box if you want the tiled pictures to create a mosaic style pattern.


Frame Text tab (Frame Properties dialog box)


Type the angle you want the text in the selected frame to be at, or use the up and down arrows to select the angle. Alternatively, drag the radius of the circle to the angle you want.


Click on this if you want the selected frame to resize to fit the text it contains.


Add/Edit Web Link dialog box


Type the text that you want to create as a link. This text will be styled differently to your normal text according to your preferences.


Select this if you want to link to a bookmark in the same document. Select the bookmark from the drop-down list box.


Select this if you want to link to a completely different document. You can type the path to the document in the box or, if you have used that path before, select it from the drop-down list box.


Click on this to remove the selected link.


Bookmarks dialog box


Select this if you want the selected text to be marked as a bookmark.


Select this if you want the selected frame to be marked as a bookmark.


Select this if you want the selected page to be marked as a bookmark.


Type the name you want to give to the bookmark in the top box.

You can select a bookmark from the list box to go to or delete.


Click on this to add the bookmark you have just named to the list of bookmarks in the document.


Click on this button to delete the bookmark you selected from the Name list box.


Click on this to go to the bookmark you selected from the Name list box.


Insert Field/Insert Mail Merge field dialog box


Select the field you want to insert from this list.


Edit Mailing List dialog box


The name of the columns correspond to the name of the mail merge field. Right-click on the column heading to display a shortcut menu, from which you can rename, add, delete and order columns. Left-click on the column heading to select all the records in that column. Drag the bar between the headings to change the size of the record entry area.

Click on the arrow next to a row to select the entire row. Hold down Ctrl as you click to selected multiple rows. Drag the bar between the buttons to change the size of the record entry area.

Click in a cell to position the text cursor in it. You can edit and type text in the record entry area in the usual way.


Click on this to select a different mailing list to use with your document.


Click on this to display the Print dialog box, from which you can print the mail merge document.


Rename Column dialog box


Type the new name for your column in the text box.


Add New Column dialog box


Type the name for your new column in the text box.


Select this if you want to add your new column before the column you right-clicked on to create the new one.


Select this if you want to add your new column after the column you right-clicked on to create the new one.


Typographic Symbols tab (Insert Character dialog box)


Select the character you want to insert at the text insertion point in your document.


Character Set tab (Insert Character dialog box)


Select this if you want to insert a character from the list of those available to standard fonts. The character will be styled in the same font as the paragraph style you are currently using.


Select this if you want to insert a character from those available to symbol fonts, e.g. Wingdings.


Select the symbol font you want to use.


Select the character you want to insert at the text insertion point in your document.


Startup/New/Open/Import Picture/Insert Design Snippet/Insert Table/Table Auto Style dialog box


Type the path to the folder where the document you want to open or base a new one on is stored. The folders you have opened files from recently are stored in the drop-down list box.


Displays the folders and MasterPublisher files in the current folder that you can use. Double-click on a folder to make it the current folder. Select the file you want to use.

If you are styling a table, select the table style you want to use.


Click on this to move up one level in the path displayed in the Name box.

If you are at C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS\BLANK PAGES you will go to C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS.


Click on this to open an untitled document based on the document you selected in the preview area.


Click on this to open the file you selected in the preview area.


Click on this to return to the MasterPublisher default folder.


Click on this to change the way your files and folders are displayed in the browser. Click on the arrow to display the menu listing the views available.

Select Folder tree from the menu to display a tree view of the drives and folders available in a window on the left-hand side of the preview window. The drives and folders are displayed in the same way as in Windows Explorer.


Select the type of file that you want to open. Files of this type are displayed in the preview area.


Select the resolution that you want to import the selected picture as.


Repeating Frames dialog box


Select this if you want to repeat the selected frame on the left and right pages of your document.


Select this if you want to repeat the selected frame on every other page of your document.


Select this if you want to repeat the selected frame from the start of your document to the current page.


Select this if you want to repeat the selected frame from the current page to the end of your document.


Select this if you want to repeat the selected frame throughout the whole document.


Select this if you want to place the repeated frame on top of any frames already on the page.


Select this if you want to place the repeated frame behind the frames already on the page.


Paragraph Styles dialog box


Select the paragraph style that you want to edit or delete.


Click on this to create a new paragraph style.


Click on this to edit the selected paragraph style.


Click on this to delete the selected paragraph style.


Displays information about the paragraph style selected in the Select Style list box.


Create New Paragraph Style dialog box


Type the name of the new paragraph style in the box.


Select this if you want to base your new paragraph style on an existing paragraph style.

Select the style you want to base it on from the drop-down list box.


Select this if you want to base your new paragraph style on the text selected in the document.


Select this if you do not want to base your new paragraph style on any existing text or style.


Check Spelling dialog box


Displays the spelling mistake or word not found in the user dictionary.

When you select a replacement word from the list box, that word is displayed here. You can also correct the word in this box yourself.


Displays a list of the alternative words for the spelling mistake. Select the word you want to replace the word with.


Displays the language being used to check the spelling in the document.


Click on this to ignore the spelling mistake found.


Click on this to replace the spelling mistake with the word selected from the list of alternatives or the word you have corrected yourself.


Click on this to ignore all occurrences of the spelling mistake found in the document.


Click on this to replace all occurrences of the spelling mistake in the document with the word you selected from the list of alternatives or the word you have corrected yourself.


Click on this to add the ‘spelling mistake’ to the dictionary so that it is not picked up again in any document you create.


Insert Table dialog box/Table Auto Style dialog box


Type the number of rows you want in your table.


Type the number of columns you want in your table.


Halftone Screen Settings dialog box


Type the screen frequency you want to use (in lines per inch), or select a frequency from the drop-down list box. The best setting depends on the type of paper you intend to use; consult your printing company for advice.


Type the angle for the spot color separation in this text box.


Type the angle for the cyan separation in this text box.


Type the angle for the magenta separation in this text box.


Type the angle for the yellow separation in this text box.


Type the angle for the black separation in this text box.


Displays a note about changing your halftone screen settings.


Printing on Both Sides dialog box


Click on this to make sure that the bottom face of the paper is printed on. You may have already printed on the top face.


Click on this to make sure that the top face of the paper is printed on. You may have already printed on the bottom face.


Click on this to specify that the paper is delivered from the printer face down.


Click on this to specify that the paper is delivered from the printer face up.


Displays a hint about printing your booklet.


Displays examples of booklet printing.


Font tab


Displays the fonts available. To select a font, drop down the list box and click on the font you want.


Displays the point size of the font. Select a pre-defined point size from the list box, or type a point size directly into the text box.


Displays the color of the font. Select a new color from the drop-down color palette.


Type the percentage that you want to compress or expand the text by, or use the arrows to select a number. Choose a value between 25% and 200%.


Displays the available underline styles. To select an underline style click on it in the drop-down list box.


Select the language that the text is written in so that the appropriate dictionary can be used when you are spell checking.


Check this check box to move the text up half a line.


Check this check box to move the text down half a line.


Check this check box to put a box around the text.


Check this check box to put a rounded box around the text.


Check this check box to put a line through the text.


Check this check box to make the text bold.


Check this check box to make the text italic.


Displays sample text for the font and styles you have selected.


Type the amount (in percentage) that you want to kern the text by, or use the up and down arrows to select the amount.


Indents & Layout tab


Click on this to align text to the left of the frame.


Click on this to center text in the frame.


Click on this to align text to the right of the frame.


Click on this to align text to both the left and right of the frame. The text is justified.


Type the distance that you want for the space between the left frame edge and the start of the first line of the paragraph.


Type the distance that you want for the space between the left frame edge and the left edge of the paragraph.


Type the distance that you want for the space between the right frame edge and the right edge of the paragraph.


Type the distance that you want above the top of the paragraph.


Type the distance that you want below the bottom of the paragraph.


Type the distance you want between the top of the frame and the top of the first line of text.


Click on this to let MasterPublisher decide where the paragraph is split. This can be across either pages or frames.


Click on this to prevent a paragraph from being split over a frame or page.


Click on this to specify the minimum widow and orphan lines that you want. This allows you to specify the parts of a paragraph that cannot be split across frames or pages.


Type the number of lines that you want to keep at the start of the paragraph, or use the arrows to select a number.


Type the number of lines that you want to keep at the end of the paragraph, or use the arrows to select a number.


Click on this to prevent a paragraph from being separated from the paragraph above it.


Click on this to prevent a paragraph from being separated from the paragraph below it.


Click on this to force a paragraph to always start at the top of the first frame on the next page, if text is flowed into the frame.


Click on this to force a paragraph to always start at the top of the next frame in your document, if the text is flowed into the frame.


Spacing tab


Click on this to let MasterPublisher decide on the spacing for you.


Drag the slider to determine how loose or tight you want the spacing to be and MasterPublisher will work it out for you.


Click on this to specify the word and letter spacing yourself.


Click on this to make sure that the spaces between the letters and words are not stretched when using a monospaced font (where all the characters have the same width, e.g. Courier).


Check this box to allow letter spacing.


Check this check box to let MasterPublisher kern your text automatically.


Type the minimum word spacing you will allow, or use the arrows to select a number.


Type the word spacing you prefer, or use the arrows to select a number.


Type the maximum word spacing you will allow, or use the arrows to select a number.


Type the maximum letter spacing you will allow, or use the arrows to select a number.


Click on this to set the leading relative to the point size of the text. In the box, type the percentage that you want to set the leading to, relative to the text.


Click on this to type the leading you want in points. In the box, type the leading that you want in points, or use the arrows to select a number.


Click on this to set the relative leading at 100%.


Click on this to set the relative leading at 120%.


Click on this to set the relative leading at 150%.


Click on this to set the relative leading at 200%.


Check this box to make sure that, when text is set in columns, paragraphs in the columns will align horizontally so that the baselines of text will line up across the page.


Check this box to turn on hyphenation.


Drag the slider to determine how ragged you want the right-hand edge of the text to be.


Check this check box to allow the lines of text to overlap each other.


Type the space you want between the default tab stops in your text, or use the up and down arrows to select an amount.


 Bullet & Numbering tab


Click on this if you do not want to use a bullet in your text.


Click on this to use a bullet in the selected text.


Click on this to apply list numbering to your text.


Click on this to apply heading numbering to your text.


Select the font for your bullet from the fonts listed here.


Check this box to display only symbol fonts in the Font list box.


Displays the bullet characters for the selected font. Use the scroll bar to view the whole selection. Click on the bullet character you want to use.


Check this check box if you want to specify a color for your bullet.


Select the color for your bullet from the drop-down color palette.


Click on this to use standard numbers for your numbered text.


Click on this to use upper case letters for your numbered text.


Click on this to use lower case letters for your numbered text.


Click on this to use upper case roman numerals for your numbered text.


Click on this to use lower case roman numerals for your numbered text.


Type any text that you want to appear before the numbers in your text.


Type any text that you want to appear after the numbers in your text.


Type the heading level that you want the text to be.


Check this check box to include the previous heading level(s) in the heading numbering for the text.


Divides the sections about number styles and heading levels.


Drop Caps tab


Click on this if you do not want to apply a drop cap to your text.


Click on this if you want to apply a drop cap that covers two lines of text.


Click on this if you want to apply a drop cap that covers three lines of text.


Click on this if you want to apply a drop cap that covers four lines of text.


Click on this if you want to apply a drop cap the height of two lines of text, but with its baseline aligned with the baseline of the first line of text.


Click on this if you want to apply a drop cap the height of three lines of text, but with its baseline aligned with the baseline of the first line of text.


Click on this if you want to apply a drop cap the height of four lines of text, but with its baseline aligned with the baseline of the first line of text.


General tab


Displays the name of the paragraph style you are editing. You can type a new name in this box.


Displays the paragraph style that this one is based on. You can select a style from the drop-down list box.


Displays the paragraph style that will be used after a paragraph of this style. You can select a style from the drop-down list box.


Displays the shortcut key for the paragraph style. You can select a shortcut key from the drop-down list box.


Text Status dialog box


Displays the language of the spelling and hyphenation dictionaries currently in use by the text. You can select another language from the drop-down list box if you have other language dictionaries installed. If the text language is 'neutral' the text will be hyphenated and spell-checked using the document language.


Displays the number of frames that the text is placed within.


Displays the amount of space still unused in the text's frames.


Displays the number of words in the selected text.


Displays the number of words from the text that have been placed in the document.


Displays the number of words from the text that have not been placed in the document, perhaps because there are too few frames, the frames are too small or all of the text has not been flowed into frames.


Picture Cropping dialog box


Drag the slider to zoom into or out of the center of the area specified in the preview window, or click on the arrows to zoom in or out by small amounts.


Displays the picture you are cropping. You can define the crop area by dragging the mouse pointer over an area in the preview window or dragging the edges of the area box.


Click on this to return the picture to its original state.


Click on this to close the dialog box and keep any changes you have made.


Tab Stop dialog box


Select the type of tab stop you want from the drop-down list box.


Type the position for the tab stop, or use the up and down arrows to select the number.


Type the character you want to use as a leader to the tab stop.


Type the spacing you want to apply to the leader.


Colors dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Edit Colors from the Edit menu.

From this dialog box you can add, edit or delete colors, and load or save a color palette.

Color list:

This box shows all the colors in the current color palette with their names. You can edit or rename any color from the palette. Use the scroll bar to select the color if necessary.

Click on a color to see it in the preview box.

Double-click on a color to select it and display the Edit Color dialog box.

Sort by box:

Choose Name if you want your colors listed alphabetically.

Choose Color if you want your colors grouped by shade (e.g. all shades of green together).

Color Bar box:

In the Tints of Each Color box, specify the number of tints of each color you would like shown on the color bar.

Add button:

Click on this button to add a color to the palette. The Add Color dialog box appears, with the currently selected color in the preview box. You can use any color in the current palette as a starting point; this is useful when you want two or more shades of an existing color.

The original color will remain in the palette, regardless of how many changes you make to it.

Edit button:

Click on this button to edit a color in the palette. The Edit Color dialog box appears with the currently selected color in the preview box.

Editing an existing color replaces the original color in the palette.

This option is disabled when Black (the default color) is selected.

Delete button:

Click on this button to delete a color from the palette.

This option is disabled when Black (the default color) is selected.

Load button:

Click on this button to display the Load Colors dialog box and choose another palette to use.

Save button:

Click on this button to display the Save Colors dialog box and save your changes, which will be reflected in the color palette at the bottom of the MasterPublisher window.


Edit Color dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Edit from the Colors dialog box, or when you double-click on a color in the color palette.

From this dialog box you can mix colors to create the exact shade you want and choose whether or not you want to specify spot colours for color printing.

Name box:

Use this box to change the name of an existing color.

Model group box:

Choose one of the following color models for printing separations from this box:

RGB

CMYK

HLS

Pantone

Change the currently selected color by clicking on the color bars surrounding it. Any changes you make are reflected in the preview box.

If you have chosen the RGB model, use the slider controls to change the percentage of red, green and blue used to mix the new color, or enter the value (from 0 to 255) in the boxes beside the sliders.

If you have chosen the CMYK model, use the slider controls to change the percentage of cyan, magenta, yellow and black used to mix the new color, or enter the percentage in the boxes beside the sliders.

If you have chosen the HLS model, use the slider controls to change the degree of hue and the percentage of lightness and saturation used to mix the new color, or enter the figures in the boxes beside the sliders.

If you have chosen the PANTONE model, use the Publication drop-down list box to choose the Pantone book you want. The colors in the chosen book are listed here; use the scroll bar to see the full selection. Click on one of the colors to select it, or use the slider to find the color you want. You will not be able to alter this color, as Pantone offers a standard set of colors.

Spot Color check box:

Select this box to specify a spot color for printing separations. You must give the color a name if you choose this option; if you do not, a message appears asking you to do so.


Add Color dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Add from the Colors dialog box, or when you click on the + button at the right-hand edge of the color palette or the color bar.

From this dialog box you can add a new color or a shade of an existing color to the palette and specify color models and spot colours for printing.

Name box:

Use this box to give the color a name.

Model group box:

Choose one of the following color models from this box:

RGB

CMYK

HLS

PANTONE

Change the color in the box by clicking on the color bars surrounding it. If you have clicked on the + button in the palette to display this dialog box, the startup color will be Black (the default color). Any changes you make are reflected in the preview box.

If you have chosen the RGB model, use the slider controls to change the amount of red, green and blue used to mix the new color, or enter the value (from 0 to 255) in the boxes beside the sliders.

If you have chosen the CMYK model, use the slider controls to change the percentage of cyan, magenta, yellow and black used to mix the new color, or enter the percentage in the boxes beside the sliders.

If you have chosen the HLS model, use the slider controls to change the degree of hue and the percentage of lightness and saturation used to mix the new color, or enter the figures in the boxes beside the sliders.

If you have chosen the PANTONE model, use the Publication drop-down list box to choose the Pantone book you want. The colors in the chosen book are listed below; use the scroll bar to see the full selection. Click on one of the colors to select it, or use the slider to select the color you want. You will not be able to alter this color, as Pantone offers a standard set of colors.

Spot Color check box:

Select this box to specify a spot color for printing separations. You must give the color a name if you choose this option; if you do not, a message appears asking you to do so.


Load Colors dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Load from the Colors dialog box.

From this dialog box you can locate and load a color palette saved in either MasterPublisher or MasterDraw.

File name box:

Select the file you want to load by clicking on the filename in the Folders list box, or by typing the filename into the File name box.

Files of Type drop-down list box:

The MasterPublisher *.col file format (used for palette files) is selected by default in this list box.

Files of this format found in the current folder are displayed in the Folders box.

Folders box:

Displays all the folders in the path from the root to the current folder, and a list of all the sub-folders and files contained in the current folder.

Click on any folder to select it, or double-click on it to make it the current folder.

Look in drop-down list box:

Click on the arrow at the right-hand side of the drop-down list box to display all the disk drives available.

Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of drives and select the one you want.


Save Colors dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Save from the Colors dialog box.

From this dialog box you can specify the disk, folder and filename in which to save your color palette.

File name list box:

Enter the filename in which you want to save your color palette or, if the file already exists, select it by clicking on the filename in the Folders box.

Save as type drop-down list box:

The MasterPublisher *.col file format (used for palette files) is selected by default in this list box.

Your palette will be given the .col extension (for palette files) by default.

Folders box:

Displays all the folders in the path from the root to the current folder, and a list of all the sub-folders and files contained in the current folder.

Click on any folder to select it, or double-click on it to make it the destination folder.

Save in drop-down list box:

Click on the arrow at the right-hand side of the drop-down list box to display all the drives available.

Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of drives and select the one you want.


Halftone Screen Settings dialog box

This dialog box appears when you click on the Halftone Screen Settings button on the Separations tab of the Print dialog box.

From this dialog box, you can choose further options for printing separations.

Lines per inch box:

Use this box to type the screen frequency you want to use (in lines per inch), or select a number from the drop-down list box. The best setting depends on the type of paper you intend using; consult your printing company for advice.

Screen Angles group box:

You use this box to set the angle for each type of separation you are using. Enter the required figures, or use the arrows to select them. Your imagesetting bureau can give advice on this.


Scan Picture dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Scan Picture from the File menu.

From this dialog box you can choose a scanner and scan a picture into your document.

Scanner group box:

The default scanner is listed.

Click on Select to select which scanner to use. This option is disabled if none or only one scanner is installed.

Acquire button:

Click on this button to start scanning. This option is disabled if no scanner is installed. The scanning options available (e.g. speed, color) will depend on your scanner.

Pictures are scanned as bitmaps. You can color or scale them by selecting Picture Attributes from the Frame menu.


Add Pages dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Add Pages from the Page menu.

From this dialog box you can specify the number and location of new pages to be inserted into the document on which you are currently working.

Number of Pages to Add box:

Enter the number of new pages, or set the number by using the arrows on the box.

Current Page:

Displays the number of the page on which you are currently working.

Add New Pages group box:

Click on an option button to choose to insert the new pages before or after the current page.


Delete Pages dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Delete Pages from the Page menu.

From this dialog box you can specify the number and location of pages to be deleted from the document on which you are currently working.

Pages group box:

Specify the pages to be deleted.

First Page to Delete: Enter the number of the first page you want to delete.

Number of Pages to Delete: Enter the number of pages you want to delete after the first page.

First Page Number:

Displays the number of the first page in the document.

Current Page:

Displays the number of the page on which you are currently working.

Last Page Number:

Displays the number of the final page in the document.


Go To Page dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Go to Page from the Page menu or when you click on the page indicator.

Go To group box:

Page Number: Enter the number of the page to which you want to turn.

Master button: Click on this button to go to the master page. This button appears when your document has only one master page.

Left Master & Right Master buttons: Click on a button to go to the corresponding master page. These buttons appear when your document has both a left and a right master page.


Find dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Find from the Edit menu.

From this dialog box you can specify a word or phrase that you want to find in the text.

Find What box:

Type the text you want to search for. The text may include spaces. Use '?' as a wildcard. For example, t?e will find tee, the, the first three letters of tree, etc.

When the text is found, it is marked as a block. If the text is not found in the document, a message informs you of this.

Match Whole Word Only check box:

Check this check box if you want to find the text as a whole, not as part of another word.

Match Case check box:

Check this check box if you want to search for the text exactly as you have typed it.

Find Next button:

Click on this button to find the next instance of the text in the document.


Replace dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Find & Replace from the Edit menu.

From this dialog box you can replace one piece of text with another.

Find What box:

Type the text you want to replace. The text may include spaces. Use '?' as a wildcard, e.g. t?e will find tee, the, the first three letters of tree, etc.

Replace With box:

Type the text that you want to replace the text in the Find What box with.

Match Case check box:

Check this check box if you want to search for the text exactly as you have typed it.

Match Whole Word Only check box:

Check this check box if you want to find the text as a whole, not as part of another word.

Find Next button:

Click on this button to find the next instance of the text in the document. When the text is found, it will be highlighted.

Replace button:

Click on this button to replace the highlighted text in the document with the text in the Replace With box.

Replace All button:

Click on this button to replace all instances of the text in the document automatically.


Summary Information dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Summary Information from the File menu, or when you save a document using the Save Document As dialog box.

In this dialog box, you can give the current document a title and subject, and assign keywords and comments to it.

File Name:

Displays the filename of the current document.

Folder:

Displays the location of the document.

Title box:

Use this box to give the document a title.

Subject box:

Use this box to record the subject of the document.

Author box:

MasterPublisher automatically inserts the user's name into this box, but you can edit it to put in a different name.

Keywords box:

Use this box to record keywords from the document.

Comments box:

Use this box to record any comments you have about the document. Use the scroll bar to see the whole box.

Statistics button:

Select this button to display the Document Statistics dialog box, which contains statistical information about the document.


Document Statistics dialog box

This dialog box appears when you click on the Statistics button in the Summary Information dialog box.

In this dialog box, you see the length and size of a document, the number of words placed and remaining unplaced, and the proportion of all frames still unused. It also gives dates of saving and printing.

Document group box:

Name: Displays the name of the current document.

Language: Displays the language of the spelling and hyphenation dictionaries in use by the current document.

Size (Kbytes): Displays the size of the document in terms of memory.

Number of Pages: Displays the number of pages the document spans.

Unused Frame: Displays the unused portion (totaled) of all the frames in the document.

Dates group box:

Created: Displays the date and time the document was created.

Last Saved: Displays the date and time the document was last saved.

Last Printed: Displays the date and time the document was last printed.

Last Saved By: Displays the name of the person who last saved the document.

Revision Number: Displays the number of times the document has been saved.

Total Editing Time: Displays the number of minutes the document has been open during all editing sessions since its creation.

Words group box:

Total: Displays how many words are in the document.

Number Placed: Displays how many words have been placed, i.e. appear in the document.

Number Unplaced: Displays how many words have not been placed, e.g. the number of words which do not appear in the document because there are too few frames, the frames are too small or the text has not been flowed into the frames.

Note:

The unit of measurement used on the Document Statistics dialog box can be changed using the Preferences dialog box.


Picture Status dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select a frame containing an imported picture, click on its filename in the contents list, and then click on the Item Information tool.

From this dialog box you can view information about the picture, change its name and remove it from your document.

Picture group box:

Name: Displays the name of the picture file. This name can be changed by entering a new name in the Name box. The name of the original picture file will not be affected.

Size (Kbytes): Displays the size of a picture in terms of memory.

Remove button:

Removes the picture from the document. You will be requested to confirm your choice before you continue.


Save Document As dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Save As from the File menu, or when you select Save for a document that has not been saved before.

From this dialog box you can specify the disk, folder and filename in which to save your document.

File name box:

Type a filename for your document or, if the file already exists, select it by clicking on the filename in the Folders box.

Save as type box:

Select the file format that you want your document to be saved in.

All MasterPublisher documents are saved as .dtp files and will be given the .dtp extension by default.

Folders box:

Displays all the folders and .dtp files contained in the current folder.

Click on any folder to select it, double-click on it to make it the destination folder.

Save in box:

Click on the arrow at the right-hand side of the drop-down list box to display all the drives available.

Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of drives and select the one you want.


Import Text dialog box

This dialog box appears when you do any of the following:

Select Import Text from the File menu

Right-click on a frame then select Import Text from the shortcut menu that appears

Click on the Import Text tool in the contents box.

From this dialog box you can locate and import text files into your document.

File name box:

Select the text you want to import by clicking on the filename in the Folders box, or by typing the name of the text into the text box.

Files of type box:

Select the file format of the text you want to import. Files of the selected format found in the current folder are displayed in the Folders list box.

When All text types is selected, if MasterPublisher cannot interpret the format of the text you are trying to import, a dialog box appears from which you must select the exact format in which the file was saved.

Folders box:

Displays all the folders contained in the current folder.

Click on any folder to select it, double-click on it to make it the source folder.

Look in box:

Click on the arrow at the right-hand side of the drop-down list box to display all the drives available.

Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of drives and select the one you want.

Autoflow text check box: Check this check box if you want to flow the text automatically through your document.


Export Text dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Export Text from the File menu.

From this dialog box you can specify the file name and destination to which you want to export your text, and the file's export format.

File Name box:

Type the filename for your document or, if the file already exists, select it by clicking on the filename in the list box.

Save as type box:

Select the format in which your text is to be exported. The files of this format in the current folder are displayed in the Folders list box.

Folders box:

Displays all the folders contained in the current folder.

Click on any folder to select it, double-click on it to make it the destination folder.

Save in box:

Click on the arrow at the right-hand side of the drop-down list box to display all the disk drives available.

Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of drives and select the one you want.


Filename for Disk Output dialog box

This dialog box appears when you check the Print to File check box on the General tab of the Print dialog box, then click on Print.

From this dialog box you can specify a file to print your document to.

File name box:

Type the filename you want to print your document as or, if the file already exists, select it by clicking on the filename in the Folders box.

Save file as type box:

Select the file format in which you want to print your file to disk. The files of this format in the current folder are displayed in the Folders list box.

The appropriate format will depend upon the printer you have selected. For example, if you are printing to a PostScript file the file extension will be .ps. Otherwise the MasterPublisher default is .ptd.

Folders box:

Displays all the folders contained in the current folder.

Click on any folder to select it, double-click on it to make it the destination folder.

Save in drop-down list box:

Click on the arrow at the right-hand side of the drop-down list box to display all the drives available.

Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of drives and select the one you want.


Align Frames dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select two or more frames and choose Align from the Frame menu, or when you click on the Align Frames tool in the Frame Tools.

From this dialog box you can align frames within a group precisely on your page.

Vertical group box:

Select an option button to determine the vertical alignment relationship of the selected frames. They can be aligned to the Top, Middle or Bottom of each other, or vertical alignment can be turned Off.

Horizontal group box:

Select an option button to determine the horizontal alignment relationship of the selected frames. They can be aligned to the Left, Center or Right of each other, or horizontal alignment can be turned Off.

The preview box illustrates how your frames will align given the selections that you make.


Thesaurus dialog box

This dialog box appears when you choose Thesaurus from the Text menu.

From this dialog box you can vary the vocabulary in your document, choose a precise word for a specific context, and look up the meaning of, or a synonym for, a selected word.

Look Up Word drop-down list box:

The word that is selected in your document will be displayed in the Look Up Word box when the Thesaurus dialog box is first displayed. Click on Look Up to look up the word.

To look up a word that is not selected in your document, type it in the Look Up Word box and click on Look Up.

To look up a word that you have previously looked up, select the word from the Look Up Word drop-down list box and click on Look Up. The last thirty words you have looked up in the current MasterPublisher session will be listed.

Meanings list box:

This box lists possible meanings for the selected word. To look up a listed word, select it and click on Look Up. Alternatively, double-click on the word in the list.

Replace Word box:

When you click on Look Up, MasterPublisher inserts the word selected from the Meanings list box (or the first word in the list) in the Replace Word box.

To look up meanings and synonyms for the word in the Replace Word box, click on Look Up.

To look up a word that is not listed in the dialog box, type the word in the Replace Word box and click on Look Up.

To replace the word in the document, click on the replacement word and click on Replace.

Synonyms list box:

Alternative words or phrases for the text in the Replace Word box are listed in the Synonyms list box. To look up a listed word, select it and click on Look Up. Alternatively, double-click on the word in the list.

Language drop-down list box:

Displays the language of the spelling, hyphenation and thesaurus dictionaries currently in use. You can select another language if you have other dictionaries installed, and the current word will be searched for in the new language.


Insert Object dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Insert Object from the Edit menu.

From this dialog box you can create a new object or select an existing file to insert into your MasterPublisher document.

Create New option button:

Select this option to create and embed a new object into your document.

Create from File option button:

Select this option to link or embed an existing file into your document.

Object Type list box:

This list box is only displayed when the Create New option button is selected. It lists the types of object that you can create, e.g. MasterDraw Picture. Select the object type that you want.

The contents of this list box depend on which of your applications support OLE.

File box:

This box is only displayed when the Create from File option button is selected. Enter the path and filename of the file you want to embed, or to which you want to link your document.

Browse button:

This box is only displayed when the Create from File option button is selected. Click on Browse to display the Browse dialog box, from which you can search for and select the file to be placed in the File box.

Link check box:

This box is only displayed when the Create from File option button is selected. Check this box to link the selected file to your document. When the box is not checked, the file will be embedded rather than linked.

Display As Icon check box:

Check this box to represent the linked or embedded object as an icon in your MasterPublisher document.

Change Icon button:

This button is only available when the Display as Icon box is checked. Click on Change Icon to display the Change Icon dialog box, from which you can choose an icon to represent the linked or embedded object.

Result box:

This box describes the result of your selected options.


Paste Special dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Paste Special from the Edit menu.

From this dialog box you can paste, link or embed the contents of the Clipboard in a specific format.

Source:

This displays the path and filename of the object stored on the Clipboard.

Paste option button:

Select Paste to paste or embed the object on the Clipboard into your document.

When you select the item with the word “Object” in its name from the As box, e.g. MasterDraw Picture Object, the object is embedded; at all other times it is pasted.

Paste Link option button:

Select Paste Link to link the object into your document. This button is only enabled when the object is from an application that supports Object Linking.

As box:

This box lists all the available formats in which the object can be inserted into your document. Select the format that you want.

Display As Icon check box:

Check this box to represent the linked or embedded object as an icon in your MasterPublisher document. This check box is disabled when the item selected in the As box cannot be linked or embedded.

Change Icon button:

This button is only available when the Display as Icon box is checked. Click on Change Icon to display the Change Icon dialog box, from which you can choose an icon to represent the linked or embedded object.

Result box:

This box describes the result of your selected options.


Object Status dialog box

This dialog box appears when you click on an object name in the list of OLE Objects in the contents box, and then click on the Item Information tool.

Object group box:

Displays the name of the object. You can rename the object by typing a new name in the Name box.

Remove button:

Removes the object from the document, but not from your hard disk. A message will be displayed asking you for confirmation before the object is removed from the document.


Links dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Object Links from the Edit menu.

From this dialog box you can:

Specify either automatic or manual updating for each link

Open the source file of a selected link for editing

Display the Change Source dialog box and reconnect a link to a new name and location.

Links box:

Displays the file path and link type for each link in your MasterPublisher document, and indicates whether links are set to automatic or manual updating. From this box, select the link that you want to modify.  To select multiple links, hold down Ctrl and click on each link.

Source:

Displays the file path of the selected link.

If multiple links are selected, the file path is not displayed when the links point to different source files.

Type:

Displays the object type of the selected link, e.g. MasterDraw Picture.

If multiple links are selected, the object type is not displayed when the links are of different types.

Update:

This indicates whether the selected link is set to automatic or manual updating.

If multiple links are selected, no option is indicated when the selected links are set to be updated in different ways.

Select Automatic to set all the selected links to automatic updating. Select Manual to set all the selected links to manual updating.

Automatic links are updated each time the source file is edited; manual links are updated only when specified by you.

Update Now button:

Click on Update Now to update all the selected links.

This is the only way to update links manually.

Open Source button:

Click on Open Source to open the source file of the selected link in a separate window for editing. This button is disabled when multiple links are selected.

Change Source button:

Click on Change Source to display the Change Source dialog box, from which you can reconnect a broken link or redirect the selected link to a different source file. This button is disabled when multiple links are selected.


Change Source dialog box

This dialog box appears when you click on the Change Source button in the Links dialog box.

From this dialog box you can reconnect a broken link or redirect the selected link to a different source file.

File name box:

Select the source file to which you want to link by selecting the filename from the list box, or by typing the filename in the File name box.

Files of type drop-down list box:

Select the file format of the source file to which you want to link. Files of this format in the current folder are displayed in the Folders list box.

Folders box:

Displays all the folders and files of the type selected in the Files of Type box contained in the current folder.

Click on a folder to select it, double-click to make it the current folder.

Look in box:

Click on the arrow to the right-hand side of the Look in box to drop-down a list of all the drives available. Select a drive.

If necessary, use the scroll bar to display more drives.


Change Icon dialog box

This dialog box appears when you click on the Change Icon button in the Paste Special dialog box, or in the Insert Object dialog box.

From this dialog box you can choose an icon with which to represent your linked or embedded object.

Icon group box:

Use this box to choose from three types of icon that are available to the object.

Current: Displays the icon currently in use.

Default: Displays the default icon for the object (usually the program icon of the source application).

From File: Displays the file path of the source application. To use an icon from a different file, enter the file path in this box. The icons in this file are listed below the From File list box for you to select.

Select the option that you want.

Label box:

This box displays the name of the source application. If you want, you can change the label to a description that will make the object easier to identify.

Browse button:

Click on Browse to display the Browse dialog box, from which you can search for and select the file to be placed in the From File box.


Browse (Object) dialog box

This dialog box appears when you click on the Browse button in the Insert Object dialog box.

From this dialog box you can search for and select the file that you want to link or embed into your document.

File name box:

Select the file to which you want to link or embed by selecting the filename from the Folders box, or by typing the file path in the File name box.

Files of type drop-down list box:

Select the format of the file that you want to link or embed. Files of this format in the current folder are displayed in the Folders list box.

Folders box:

Displays all the folders and files of the type selected in the Files of type box contained in the current drive and folder.

Click on a folder to select it, double-click to make it the current folder.

Look in drop-down list box:

Click on the arrow to the right-hand side of the Look in box to drop-down a list of all the disk drives available. Select a disk drive.

If necessary, use the scroll bar to display more drives.


Browse (Icon) dialog box

This dialog box appears when you click on the Browse button in the Change Icon dialog box.

From this dialog box you can search for and select the file containing the icon you want to represent your object.

File name box:

Select the file in which the icon is located by selecting the filename from the Folders box, or by typing the file path in the File name box.

Files of type drop-down list box:

Select the format of the file that you want to open. Files of this format in the current folder are displayed in the Folders list box.

Folders box:

Displays all the folders and files of the type selected in the Files of type box contained in the current drive and folder.

Click on a folder to select it, double-click to make it the current folder.

Look in drop-down list box:

Click on the arrow to the right-hand side of the Look in box to drop-down a list of all the drives available. Select a drive.

If necessary, use the scroll bar to display more drives.


Print Setup dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Printer Setup from the General tab on the Print dialog box.

From this dialog box you can select an alternative printer, or change the settings of the currently selected printer.

Printer group box:

Select a different printer from the Name drop-down list box.

Status: Displays the status of the selected printer, e.g. Ready.

Type: Displays the make of the printer you have selected.

Where: Displays how the selected printer is connected to your PC, e.g. LPT1

Comment: Displays any comments you have specified in the printer properties for the selected printer.

Orientation group box:

Select either Portrait (tall) or Landscape (wide) orientation for your paper. An example is shown alongside the options. These options may be disabled.

Paper group box:

From the Size drop-down list box, select the size of paper you want to use.

from the Source drop-down list box, choose how the paper is to be fed into the printer.

Properties button:

Select this to display the Printer Properties dialog box, where you can set further options for the selected printer.

Click on OK to return to the Print dialog box.


Import File dialog box

This dialog box appears when you try to import a file whose format MasterPublisher does not recognize.

Type of File list box:

Displays the types of file that are recognized by MasterPublisher. Select an alternative type for your file from this list.


Print dialog box

This tabbed dialog box appears when you select Print from the File menu.

General tab

Paper tab

Separations tab

Options tab

From this dialog box you can make choices about the way you print your document.


General tab (Print dialog box)

Printer group box:

The currently selected printer is named in this box.

Printer Setup button: Click on this button to display the Print Setup dialog box, from which you can select a different printer or change the settings of the current printer.

Print To File check box: Check this check box to print your document to disk, rather than directly to a printer.

Page Selection group box:

All: Prints all the pages of your document.

Current Page: Prints the page you are currently working on in your document.

To print a range of pages from your document, select Pages and enter the first and last page numbers of your selection in the From and To boxes.

Copies group box:

Number spin box: Type the number of copies you want or change the amount using the up and down arrows.

Collate check box: Check this check box if you want to print each copy of your document in the page order 1,2,3,... 1,2,3,... rather than 1,1,... 2,2,... 3,3,...etc. Collate is disabled if you are printing only one copy or only one page.

Mail Merge Selection group box:

All Records: Prints a copy of the document for all the records in the mailing list.

Current Record: Prints a copy of the document for the record that is currently displayed in the document only.

Selected Records: Prints a copy of the document for the selected records in the mailing list.

Mailing List button: Click on this button to display the Edit Mailing List dialog box, from which you can select records to print or select a different mailing list to use.


Paper tab (Print dialog box)

Paper Mapping group box:

Select the way you want to print your document on the paper. The options in this box change according to the document type you chose in the Page dialog box.

Paper Sides group box:

Print on Both Sides check box: Check this check box if you want to print on both sides of the paper.

Pause Between Sides check box: Check this check box if you want the printer to pause after each side it prints, e.g. to let you turn the paper over.


Separations tab (Print dialog box)

From this tab card, you can choose colors and options for printing separations.

Print Separations check box:

Check this check box if you want to print separations.

Type of Separations drop-down list box:

Choose Spot Separations to print the colors you have specified as spot colours in the Edit Color or Add Color dialog boxes.

Choose Process Separations to print process color separations (CYMK). Any spot colors in your document will be printed to their nearest process color equivalent.

Choose Spot & Process Separations to print the spot colors you have specified together with process colors.

Separations To Print list box:

From this box you can choose which separations are to be printed. The ticked separations are the ones that will be printed.

Knockouts check box:

Check this check box to enable knockouts for printing. This means that items will “knockout” colors underneath them. This option is disabled if you have chosen to print process colors.

Overprint Black check box:

Check this check box to enable overprinting. This means that solid black items will be printed over other colors. Items drawn in any color other than black will "knockout" colors underneath them.

Output Individual Separation Files check box:

Check this check box to print each separation to a separate file on disk.

Halftone Screen Settings button:

Click on this button to display the Halftone Screen Settings dialog box.

You cannot view the separations you have specified from the Halftone Screen Settings dialog box, although they will be printed.


Options tab (Print dialog box)

Print group box:

Crop Marks check box: Check this check box if you want to print crop marks on the paper. Crop marks will only be shown if the document page is smaller than the printed page.

Graphics check box: Check this check box if you want to print any pictures or OLE objects used in your document.

Annotations check box: Check this check box if you want to print any frames you have marked as annotations in your document.

Monochrome check box: Check this check box if you want to print the document in monochrome. This option is only enabled if you are printing to a color printer.

Output group box:

Pause Between Sheets: After every page is printed you are prompted to continue printing. This option is useful if you need to change headed paper, or are using a sheet feeder.

Reverse Sheet Order: Select to print the document in reverse order. This is a useful option for some printers that collate pages in reverse order.

Reversed (Emulsion Down): This option is available only when printing to a PostScript printer, and enables you to print your document in reverse.

Negative (White on Black): This option is available only when printing to a PostScript printer, and enables you to print your document so that all colors are printed as their negatives.


Preferences dialog box

This tabbed dialog box appears when you select Preferences from the Options menu.

Document tab

Spelling tab

Auto Backup tab

View tab

Controls tab

From this dialog box you can specify the default operation and values of various program settings.


Document tab (Preferences dialog box)

Startup group box:

Select an option from this drop-down list box for MasterPublisher to default to on startup.

Open Last Document: Opens the last document you were working on, on startup.

Blank Page: Opens a new document, using the default document settings, on startup.

Startup Dialog box: Displays the Startup dialog box on startup.

Frames Repel Text Check box: check this check box if you want text behind a frame to wrap around it by default.

Units group box:

Drop-down the list box to select the unit of measurement you want to use throughout your document.

Any changes you have made in the Startup group box will take effect the next time you run MasterPublisher. All other changes will take effect immediately.

Page Up/Down Keys group box:

You can choose one of two ways for your keyboard's Page Up and Page Down keys to work.

Scroll Window: Key presses scroll up or down a window.

Flip Pages: Key presses 'turn' through the pages of your document.

Note:  Shift PgUp/Shift PgDn activates the option that is de-selected.

File Options group box:

Create .BAK Documents check box: Check this check box if you want MasterPublisher to save a backup copy of your documents. This backup copy is the previously saved version of the document.

Compress .DTP Documents check box: Check this check box if you want MasterPublisher to compress your files, to save space.

Prompt for Summary Info check box: Check this check box if you want to be prompted to enter summary information the first time you save a document.

Grid group box:

Snap to Guides & Grid check box: Check this check box if you want items to snap to the column guides and grid when you move them.

Grid Size: Type the size you want the grid to be in this box, or use the up and down arrows to select the size.


Spelling tab (Preferences dialog box)

Background Proofing group box:

Highlight Misspelt Words check box: Check this check box to have MasterPublisher automatically highlight any words it cannot find in the user dictionary as you work.

Spelling Checker group box:

Check the boxes to specify which groups of words you want the spell checker to ignore.

Words in Uppercase: Spell checker will ignore any words written entirely in uppercase letters.

Words with Numbers: Spell checker will ignore any words which contain numbers (such as serial numbers or telephone numbers).

Capitalized Words: Spell checker will ignore any words beginning with a capital letter (such as names).


Auto Backup tab (Preferences dialog box)

Action group box:

Warning Beep: Your machine will remind you to save a document. A message appears in the information line, and the beeps will continue until you save your work or until you turn automatic backup off.

Auto-backup: Your document will automatically back itself up at regular intervals.

Off: Disables the automatic backup facility.

Interval box:

If you have selected Warning Beep or Auto-backup, enter a time interval, in minutes, between automatic back ups or reminder 'beeps'. The maximum interval is 60 minutes; the minimum is 1 minute.


View tab (Preferences dialog box)

View Markers group box:

Check the check boxes of the markers you want to display.

Show Graphics check box: Check this check box to make sure that graphics (including pictures, PowerText and OLE objects) appear in your document.

Change Colors group box:

Select the item you want to change the color of from the list box.

Select the color you want from the drop-down color palette.


Controls tab (Preferences dialog box)

Show Controls group box:

Check the check boxes of the controls you want to display.

Show Tools group box:

Check the check boxes of the tools you want to display.


Page dialog box

This tabbed dialog box appears when you select Page Size & Orientation, Margins & Column Guides or Page Numbers from the Page menu.

Size & Orientation tab

Margins & Columns tab

Page Numbers tab

From this dialog box you can specify the size, layout and numbering of your pages.


Size & Orientation tab (Page dialog box)

Style and Size group box:

From the drop-down list box, select the page style you want.

From the list box, select the size or type of paper you want to use. The types and sizes listed here will vary, depending on what paper style you chose.

Add button: Click on this to add your own page size to the list.

Edit button: Click on this to edit the selected page size.

Delete button: Click on this to delete the selected page size.

Page Orientation group box:

Use this group box to specify whether you want the page(s) to be portrait or landscape.

Apply To drop-down list box:

From this drop-down list box select which pages you want to apply the changes to.

Resize Frames check box: Check this check box if you want to resize the frames with your page.


Margins & Columns tab (Page dialog box)

Margins group box:

Type the size you want the margins and the binding margin to be in the appropriate boxes.

Column Guides group box:

Specify the number of column guides you want in the Number of Columns box.

Specify the gap you want between the columns in the Columns Gap box.

Headers and Footers group box:

Type the size you want the header and footer margins to be in the appropriate boxes.

Apply To drop-down list box:

From this drop-down list box select which pages you want to apply the changes to.

Resize Frames check box: Check this check box if you want to resize the frames with your margins.


Page Numbers tab (Page dialog box)

Insert Page Number group box:

Check the Insert Page Number check box to enable this group box.

Position drop-down list box: Click on the arrow to drop down a list of options for where you want to put the page number on the page. Select the option you want.

Alignment drop-down list box: From this drop-down list box, select how you want the page number aligned in the header or footer.

Style group box:

From this group box, select the style that you want you page numbers to be in.

Whole Document Numbering group box:

Start From Page box: Type the number of the page that you want to put the first number onto.

First Number box: Type the number that you want to put on the first page to be numbered.

If you type 3 in the Start From Page box and 1 in the First Number box, MasterPublisher will start numbering from page 3 of the document and number that page 1, leaving the first two pages blank.

Apply To drop-down list box:

From this drop-down list box select which pages you want to apply the changes to.


Add/Edit Custom Page Size dialog box
Add/Edit Custom Page Size

This dialog box appears when you have a standard page size selected and click on the Add or Edit button in the Size & Orientation tab of the Page dialog box.

Name box: Type a name for your page size in this box.

Width box: Type the width you want the page to be, or use the up and down arrows to select an amount.

Height box: Type the height you want the page to be, or use the up and down arrows to select an amount.


Add/Edit Custom Stationery dialog box

This dialog box appears when you have a stationery page size (e.g. Labels) selected and click on the Add or Edit button in the Size & Orientation tab of the Page dialog box.

In this dialog box the page is the custom stationery, such as a label, and the paper is the paper the stationery will be printed to.

Name box: Type a name for your custom stationery in this box.

Width box: Type the width you want the page to be, or use the up and down arrows to select an amount.

Height box: Type the height you want the page to be, or use the up and down arrows to select an amount.

Horizontal Pitch: Type the distance you want between the left-hand edge of the page to the left-hand edge of the page next to it. This will determine any gap to be left between the pages when they are printed.

Vertical Pitch: Type the distance you want between the top of the page to the top of the page below it. This will determine any gap to be left between the pages when they are printed.

Left Indent: Type the distance you want between the left-hand edge of the page and the left-hand edge of the paper it is printed on.

Top Indent: Type the distance you want between the top of the page and the top of the paper it will be printed on.

Number Across: Type the number of pages you want to fit across the printed paper.

Number Down: Type the number of pages you want to fit down the printed paper.


Frame Properties dialog box

This tabbed dialog box appears when you select any of the frame property options from the Frame menu.

Shape tab

Size & Position tab

Border Styles tab

Background tab

Frame Picture tab

Frame Text tab

The effects of the options you choose take effect on the selected frame as you make your choices.


Shape tab (Frame Properties dialog box)

Style group box:

Click on the button that corresponds to the shape you want your frame to be. You can choose from:

Rectangle

Rounded box

Ellipse

Star

Polygon

Line

Autotrace graphic

Starburst

Number of Points box: This option is enabled only when you choose a polygon, star or starburst. You can change the number of points by typing a number in the box, or by using the up and down arrows.

Rotate check box: This option is enabled only when you choose a polygon, star or starburst. Check this box if you want to give your frame a half-turn.

Closed Path check box: This option is enabled only when you choose a line. Check this box if you want your line to be a closed path.

Inner Radius slider: Drag the slider to determine the inner radius of a star or starburst.

Inner Points slider: Drag the slider to determine the length of the inner points of a starburst.

Repel group box:

Frame Obscures Text button: Click on this to make the selected frame have no effect on text in frames underneath it.

Frame Repels Text button: Click on this to make text in other frames underneath the selected frame wrap around the selected frame.

Vertical Padding box: This box is enabled only when Frame repels text is selected. Type the distance that you want to keep text from the top and bottom of the frame.

Horizontal Padding box: This box is enabled only when Frame repels text is selected. Type the distance that you want to keep text from the left and right of the frame.


Size and Position tab (Frame Properties dialog box)

Position group box:

Left Position box: Type the distance that you want between the left-hand side of the page and the left-hand edge of the selected frame.

Top Position box: Type the distance that you want between the top of the page and the top of the selected frame.

Width box: Type the width you want the frame to be.

Height: Type the height you want the frame to be.

Frame Angle group box:

Type the angle that you want the frame at in the degrees box. Alternatively you can drag the radius of the degrees circle to the angle you want.

Preserve Aspect Ratio check box: Check this check box if you want to make the height and width change proportionately with each other.

Lock Size and Position check box: Check this check box if you want to lock the frame in its current size, position and angle.

Annotation check box: Check this check box if you want to mark the selected frame as an annotation that you can decide whether to print or not.


Border Styles tab (Frame Properties dialog box)

Style group box:

None: Select this if you do not want to apply a border style to the selected frame.

Lines: Select this if you want to choose from the range of line styles available. Line styles can be applied to any shape frame or line.

If you have selected a line style for a frame, the line style will be applied to the entire frame. You cannot select which sides to apply the line style to.

Traditional: Select this if you want to choose from the range of traditional border styles available. Traditional border styles can only be applied to rectangular frames.

Decorative Categories: Select one of these if you want to choose from the range of decorative border styles available. Decorative border styles can only be applied to rectangular frames.

Click on the border style in the list box to select it.

Arrow Heads group box:

This group box only appears when Lines is selected. Select the arrow head, if any, that you want at the start and end of the line.

Sides group box:

This group box only appears when Traditional or Decorative is selected. Click on a button that corresponds to the sides you want the border to appear on. You can choose from none, all, top and bottom and right and left.

Alternatively, check the check boxes on the square to have the border appear on the sides checked.

Custom Width group box:

Check the Custom Width check box to enable this group box.

Select the units you want to measure the border width in from the drop-down list box and type the width you want the border to be.

Color group box:

Check the Color check box to enable this group box. Choose a color for your border from the drop-down palette and drag the slider to change the tint. The color you choose will override any existing default colors.


Background tab (Frame Properties dialog box)

Style group box:

Select a fill style from the list box. The options available in the Attributes group box differ according to whether you choose a standard color fill or a textured background.

Attributes group box (with a standard color fill selected):

From the top drop-down color palette, select the ‘from’ color for your fill style (if you selected a plain fill style, the top drop-down color palette changes the fill color).

From the bottom drop-down color palette, select the ‘to’ color for your fill style.

When you change the colors, the previews in the Style list box change to reflect these changes.

Preview window: This displays a preview of the effect of the changes you make in the attributes group box. If you have chosen a linear or cylindrical graduated fill style, you can drag the arrow in the preview window to change the angle of the color change.

Attributes group box (with a textured background selected):

Custom Color check box: Check this check box if you want to change the color of the texture.

From the drop-down color palette, select the color you want. When you change the color of the texture, the previews in the Style list box change to reflect this.

Angle box: Type the angle you want the texture to be in this box. Alternatively, drag the radius of the Angle circle to the angle you want.

Detail slider: Drag the slider to change the detail of the texture. The higher the detail, the larger the texture appears.


Frame Picture tab (Frame Properties dialog box)

Resizing group box:

Click on one of the button options for resizing your picture:

Stretch

Fit

Center

Tile

Custom Color group box:

Check the Custom Color check box to enable this group box. Choose a color from the drop-down palette to color your picture in shades of that color.

Flip Picture group box:

Horizontally check box: Check this check box if you want to flip the picture horizontally from left to right.

Vertically check box: Check this check box if you want to flip the picture vertically from top to bottom.

Picture Angle group box:

degrees box: Type the angle that you want the picture at in this box. Alternatively, drag the radius of the degrees circle to the angle you want.

Tile Picture group box:

This group box is only enabled when you select Tile from the Resizing group box.

times across box: Type the number of pictures that you want to fit across your frame.

times down box: Type the number of pictures that you want to fit down your frame.

Mosaic Pattern check box: Check this check box if you want to create a mosaic effect with your tiled picture.


Frame Text tab (Frame Properties dialog box)

Angle of Text group box:

degrees box: Type the angle you want your text at. Alternatively, drag the radius of the degrees circle to the angle you want.

Resize Frame group box:

Click on this button if you want the frame to automatically resize to fit the text within it.


Add Web Link dialog box
Add/Edit Web Link dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Add/Edit Web Links from the Edit menu.

Text to link from box: Type the text that you want to create as the link. If you have selected text already, the text will appear in this box. If you have not selected text or positioned the text insertion point, this box is disabled.

If you are editing a link, you can edit the text in this box.

Link To group box:

Bookmark: Select this if you want to link to a bookmark in the current document. Select the bookmark from the drop-down list box.

URL: Select this if you want to link to another Web document. Type the path for the other document in the box.

Unlink button: Click on this to remove the selected link.


Bookmarks dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Bookmarks from the Edit menu.

Bookmark group box:

Text: Click on this to make the selected text the bookmark.

Frame: Click on this to make the selected frame the bookmark.

Page: Click on this to make the current page the bookmark.

Name box:

Type the name of the bookmark in the text box or select a bookmark from the list box.

Add button: Click on this to add a new bookmark to the list.

Delete button: Click on this to delete the selected bookmark.

Go to button: Click on this to go to the selected bookmark.


Insert Mail Merge Field dialog box
Insert Mail Merge Field

This dialog box appears when you select Mail Merge Field from the Insert submenu of the Text menu.

Field to insert list box:

Select the mail merge field that you want to insert, then click on OK.


Edit Mailing List dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Mail Merge from the File menu.

From this dialog box you can add to, edit and create mailing lists for your mail merge documents.

The column headings correspond with the mail merge fields. Type your information in the relevant boxes.

Right-click on a heading to display a shortcut menu with the following commands:

Sort Column Ascending: Click on this to sort your mailing list in ascending alphabetical order according to that column.

Sort Column Descending: Click on this to sort the mailing list in descending alphabetical order according to that column.

Rename Column: Click on this to display the Rename Column dialog box, from which you can change the name of the column.

Delete Column: Click on this to delete the column. A message box appears, asking if you are sure. This command cannot be undone.

Add New Column: Click on this to display the Add New Column dialog box, from which you name and add a new column.

Left-click on a column heading to select the whole column.

Left-click on the arrow button to the left of a row to select the whole row. Ctrl-click selects each row you click next to. Shift-click selects all the rows from the first to last click.

Change List button: Click on this to select another mailing list.

Print button: Click on this to print the mailing list.


Rename Column dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Rename Column from the shortcut menu that appears when you right-click on a column heading.

New Name for Column group box:

Type the new name for the column in the text box, then click on OK.


Add New Column dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Add New Column from the shortcut menu that appears when you right-click on a column heading.

New Column Name group box:

Type the name for the new column in the text box.

Add New Column group box:

Before Current Column: Select this if you want to add the new column before the column you clicked on.

After Current Column: Select this if you want to add the new column after the column you clicked on.


Insert Field dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Field from the Insert submenu of the Text menu.

Field to insert list box:

Select the field you want to insert and click on OK.


Insert Character dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Character from the Insert submenu of the Text menu.

Typographic Symbols tab

Character Set tab


Typographic Symbols tab (Insert Character dialog box)

This tab appears when you select the Typographic Symbols tab from the Insert Character dialog box.

Character to insert list box:

Displays a list of characters, their names and keyboard shortcuts. Select the character you want to insert, then click on OK.


Character Set tab (Insert Character dialog box)

This tab appears when you select the Character Set tab from the Insert Character dialog box.

Plain Text: Select this to insert a standard text character into your document.

From Symbol Font: Select this if you want to insert a character from a symbol font.

Font drop-down list box: Select the symbol font you want.

Character to insert list box: Select the character you want to insert, then click on OK.


Select Data Source dialog box

This dialog box appears when you click on Change List in the Edit Mailing List dialog box. From this dialog box you can select a new mailing list.

From the list box, select either the mailing list you want to use or the type of database that you want.

If you choose a type of database and click on OK, the Select Database dialog box will appear, from which you can look for and select a different mailing list.


Select Database dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select a database type from the Select Data Source dialog box and click on OK. From this dialog box you can look for and select a database (mailing list) to open.

Drives drop-down list box:

Click on the arrow to drop down the list box and select the drive where the database you want to open is stored.

Directories list box:

Displays the folders available in the current drive or folder. Click on a folder to select it, double-click on it to make it the current folder. The files (of the type selected in the List Files of Type drop-down list box) are displayed in the Database Name list box.

List Files of Type drop-down list box:

Drop down the list box and select the type of database you want to open.

Database Name box:

Type the name of the database in the text box or select a database from the list box.

Read Only check box: Check this check box if you want to open the database as a read-only file. If you do this, you will not be able to save any changes you make to the database.

Exclusive check box: Check this check box if you want to make sure that nobody else can open the database while you are working with it.


Startup dialog box

This dialog box appears when you open MasterPublisher. From this dialog box you can start a document from scratch, open an existing document to work on, create a new document based on an existing one, run a PagePilot or open one of the sample documents provided with MasterPublisher. The text in the box at the bottom of the dialog box is there to help you get started.

Name drop-down text box:

Type the path of the folder where the document you want to open is stored. All the paths that you have visited recently are listed in the drop-down list box for you to select. The default path when you first open MasterPublisher is C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS (where C: is the drive you installed MasterPublisher on).

Up One Level button:

Click on this to move up to the previous folder in the path. If you are at C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS\SAMPLES and you click on this, it will take you to C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS.

Preview area:

The folders and files that you can open in the current folder are displayed in this area. Double-click on a folder icon to view the available files in that folder. Click on the file you want to open and click on New or Open.

Browse button:

Click on this to change the way your files and folders are displayed in the browser. Click on the arrow to display the menu listing the views available.

Select Folder tree from the menu to display a tree view of the drives and folders available in a window on the left-hand side of the preview window. The drives and folders are displayed in the same way as in Windows Explorer. Click on a folder to make it the current folder and display all the .DTP files in the preview area.

Home button:

Click on this to return to the default MasterPublisher folder.

New button:

Click on this to create a new document based on the one you have selected in the preview window.

Open button:

Click on this to open and work on the selected document.

Cancel button:

Click on this to close the dialog box without opening a document. MasterPublisher also closes.


Open Document dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Open from the File menu, or click on the Open Document tool in the General Tools. From this dialog box you can look for and open an existing document. The text in the box at the bottom of the dialog box is there to help you get started.

Name drop-down text box:

Type the path of the folder where the document you want to open is stored. All the paths that you have visited recently are listed in the drop-down list box for you to select. The default path when you first open MasterPublisher is C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS (where C: is the drive you installed MasterPublisher on).

Up One Level button:

Click on this to move up to the previous folder in the path. If you are at C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS\SAMPLES and you click on this, it will take you to C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS.

Preview area:

The folders and files that you can open in the current folder are displayed in this area. Double-click on a folder icon to view the available files in that folder. Click on the file you want to open and click on Open.

Browse button:

Click on this to change the way your files and folders are displayed in the browser. Click on the arrow to display the menu listing the views available.

Select Folder tree from the menu to display a tree view of the drives and folders available in a window on the left-hand side of the preview window. The drives and folders are displayed in the same way as in Windows Explorer. Click on a folder to make it the current folder and display all the .DTP files in the preview area.

Home button:

Click on this to return to the default MasterPublisher folder.

Open button:

Click on this to open and work on the selected document. If the document you selected is read-only, this button will be replaced with a New button.

Cancel button:

Click on this to close the dialog box without opening a document and return to MasterPublisher.


New Document dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select New from the File menu, or click on the New Document tool in the General Tools. From this dialog box you can choose a document to base your new document on or start a document from a blank page. The text in the box at the bottom of the dialog box is there to help you get started.

Name drop-down text box:

Type the path of the folder where the document you want to open is stored. All the paths that you have visited recently are listed in the drop-down list box for you to select. The default path when you first open MasterPublisher is C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS (where C: is the drive you installed MasterPublisher on).

Up One Level button:

Click on this to move up to the previous folder in the path. If you are at C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS\SAMPLES and you click on this, it will take you to C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS.

Preview area:

The folders and files that you can open in the current folder are displayed in this area. Double-click on a folder icon to view the available files in that folder. Click on the file you want to open and click on New.

Browse button:

Click on this to change the way your files and folders are displayed in the browser. Click on the arrow to display the menu listing the views available.

Select Folder tree from the menu to display a tree view of the drives and folders available in a window on the left-hand side of the preview window. The drives and folders are displayed in the same way as in Windows Explorer. Click on a folder to make it the current folder and display all the .DTP files in the preview area.

Home button:

Click on this to return to the default MasterPublisher folder.

New button:

Click on this to create a new document based on the one you have selected in the preview window.

Cancel button:

Click on this to close the dialog box without opening a document and return to MasterPublisher.


Import Picture dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Import Picture from the File menu or click on the Picture tool in the Toolbox. From this dialog box you can look for and import pictures.

Name drop-down text box:

Type the path of the folder where the picture you want to import is stored. All the paths that you have visited recently are listed in the drop-down list box for you to select.

Up One Level button:

Click on this to move up to the previous folder in the path. If you are at C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS\SAMPLES and you click on this, it will take you to C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS.

Files of type drop-down list box:

Select the type of picture you want to import from this list. Files of that type in the current folder are displayed in the preview area.

Resolution drop-down list box: This is displayed only when a Flash Pix Bitmap is selected. Select the resolution that you want to import the bitmap as.

Preview area:

The folders and files that you can open in the current folder are displayed in this area. Double-click on a folder icon to view the available pictures in that folder. Click on the picture you want to import and click on Open.

Browse button:

Click on this to change the way your files and folders are displayed in the browser. Click on the arrow to display the menu listing the views available.

Select Folder tree from the menu to display a tree view of the drives and folders available in a window on the left-hand side of the preview window. The drives and folders are displayed in the same way as in Windows Explorer. Click on a folder to make it the current folder and display all the picture files in the preview area.

Home button:

Click on this to return to the default MasterPublisher folder.

Open button:

Click on this to import the selected picture.

Cancel button:

Click on this to close the dialog box without importing a picture and return to MasterPublisher.


Insert Design Snippet dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Insert Design Snippet from the File menu or click on the Design Snippet tool in the Toolbox. From this dialog box you can look for and insert design snippets into your documents.

Name drop-down text box:

Type the path of the folder where the design snippet you want to insert is stored. All the paths that you have visited recently are listed in the drop-down list box for you to select.

Up One Level button:

Click on this to move up to the previous folder in the path. If you are at C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS\SAMPLES and you click on this, it will take you to C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS.

Preview area:

The folders and files that you can open in the current folder are displayed in this area. Double-click on a folder icon to view the available design snippets in that folder. Click on the design snippet you want to import and click on Open.

Browse button:

Click on this to change the way your files and folders are displayed in the browser. Click on the arrow to display the menu listing the views available.

Select Folder tree from the menu to display a tree view of the drives and folders available in a window on the left-hand side of the preview window. The drives and folders are displayed in the same way as in Windows Explorer. Click on a folder to make it the current folder and display all the design snippets in the preview area.

Home button:

Click on this to return to the default MasterPublisher folder.

Open button:

Click on this to insert the selected design snippet.

Cancel button:

Click on this to close the dialog box without inserting a design snippet and return to MasterPublisher.


Save As Design Snippet dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Save Design Snippet from the File menu. With this dialog box you can select a folder for the design snippet and save it to use later.

Save in drop-down list box:

From this list box, select the drive where you want to save the design snippet. The folders available appear in the Folders box.

Folders box:

This box displays the folders and files (of the type selected in the Save as type drop-down list box) available in the current drive and folder. Double-click on a folder to make it the current folder.

File name text box:

Type a file name for the design snippet in this box. If the file already exists, select its name from the Folders box.

Save as type drop-down list box:

Select the file type you want to save the design snippet as. Document Design Snippet (*.srp) is selected by default.

Save button:

Click on this to save the design snippet with the name you have specified.

Cancel button:

Click on this to close the dialog box without saving the design snippet and return to MasterPublisher.


Repeating Frames dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Repeat on Pages from the Frame menu. From this dialog box you can specify where you want to repeat the selected frame(s).

All Pages: Select this if you want to repeat the selected frame(s) on each page.

Alternate Pages: Select this if you want to repeat the selected frame(s) on every other page.

From the start of the document to this page: Select this if you want to repeat the selected frame(s) on either each or alternate pages from the start of the document to the current page.

From this page to the end of the document: Select this if you want to repeat the selected frame(s) on each or alternate pages from the current page to the end of the document.

Over the entire document: Click on this if you want to repeat the selected frame(s) on each or alternate pages throughout the whole document.

In the foreground: Select this if you want the repeated frame(s) to be placed on top of any frames already on the page.

In the background: Select this if you want the repeated frame(s) to be placed behind any frames already on the page.


Paragraph Styles dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Paragraph Styles from the Text menu. From this dialog box you can add, edit and delete paragraph styles.

Select Style list box:

Click on the style you want to edit, delete or base a new one on.

New button:

Click on this to display the Create New Paragraph Style dialog box, through which you can create a new paragraph style.

Edit button:

Click on this to display the Edit Paragraph Style dialog box, through which you can change the properties of the selected paragraph style.

Delete button:

Click on this to delete the selected paragraph style.

Close button:

Click on this to close the dialog box.


Create New Paragraph Style dialog box

This dialog box appears when you click on New in the Paragraph Styles dialog box. From this dialog box you can name a new paragraph style and choose what paragraph style or text to base it on.

Paragraph Style Name text box:

Type the name for your new paragraph style here.

Based on group box:

Style: Select this if you want to base your new paragraph style on a current paragraph style. Select the paragraph style from the drop-down list box.

Current selection: Select this if you want to base your new paragraph style on the text currently selected in the document.

None: Select this if you do not want to base your new paragraph style on any other style.


Check Spelling dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Check Spelling from the Text menu. From this dialog box you can select a word to replace the misspelt word with, choose to ignore the word or add the word to the user dictionary.

Word not found box:

This box displays the word that MasterPublisher cannot find in the dictionary. The alternatives are listed in the box below. You can edit the word in this box directly or choose a word from the list of alternatives.

Language group box: Displays the language dictionary being used for the spelling check.

Ignore Word: Click on this to ignore the word as a spelling mistake and move on to the next word MasterPublisher does not recognize.

Replace Word: Click on this to replace the spelling mistake with the word in the word not found box.

Ignore All: Click on this to ignore all occurrences of the word in the document.

Replace All: Click on this to replace all occurrences of the spelling mistake with the word in the word not found box.

Add to Dictionary: Click on this to add the word not found to the user dictionary. You can edit the user dictionary by editing the file SPUK.TXT using NotePad.

Close: Click on this to close the dialog box.


Insert Table dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Insert Table from the Table menu or click on the Table tool in the Toolbox. From this dialog box you can decide how many rows and columns you want in your table.

Based on drop-down text box:

Type the path of the folder where the table style you want is stored. You will be taken by default to the folder where the MasterPublisher table styles are stored. All the paths that you have visited recently are listed in the drop-down list box for you to select.

Up One Level button:

Click on this to move up to the previous folder in the path. If you are at C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS\SAMPLES and you click on this, it will take you to C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS.

Browse button:

Click on this to change the way your files and folders are displayed in the browser. Click on the arrow to display the menu listing the views available.

Select Folder tree from the menu to display a tree view of the drives and folders available in a window on the left-hand side of the preview window. The drives and folders are displayed in the same way as in Windows Explorer. Click on a folder to make it the current folder and display all the table styles in the preview area.

Home button:

Click on this to return to the default MasterPublisher folder.

Number of Rows: Type the number of rows you want.

Number of Columns: Type the number of columns you want.

Preview area:

The folders and table styles that you can use are displayed in this area. Double-click on a folder icon to view the available table styles in that folder. Click on the table style you want to use and click on OK.


Table Auto Style dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Table Style from the Table menu. From this dialog box you can change the style of all or part of your table.

Based on drop-down text box:

Type the path of the folder where the table style you want is stored. You will be taken by default to the folder where the MasterPublisher table styles are stored. All the paths that you have visited recently are listed in the drop-down list box for you to select.

Up One Level button:

Click on this to move up to the previous folder in the path. If you are at C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS\SAMPLES and you click on this, it will take you to C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS.

Browse button:

Click on this to change the way your files and folders are displayed in the browser. Click on the arrow to display the menu listing the views available.

Select Folder tree from the menu to display a tree view of the drives and folders available in a window on the left-hand side of the preview window. The drives and folders are displayed in the same way as in Windows Explorer. Click on a folder to make it the current folder and display all the table styles files in the preview area.

Home button:

Click on this to return to the default MasterPublisher folder.

Preview area:

The folders and table styles that you can use are displayed in this area. Double-click on a folder icon to view the available table styles in that folder. Click on the table style you want to use and click on OK.


Table Cell Properties dialog box

This tabbed dialog box appears when you select Borders & Background from the Table menu.

Border Styles

Background

From this dialog box you change the line and fill styles for the selected cells.


Border Styles tab (Table Cell Properties dialog box)

Sides group box:

Select the sides you want to apply the line style to, or you can choose to apply the line style to the entire grid. Hold down Ctrl to select individual sides from the list, hold down Shift to select the sides you click on and those in between.

Style group box:

Select the line style that you want to apply to the selected cells.

Width group box:

Type the width you want the line style to be in the spin box. Select the units you want to measure the width in from the drop-down list box.

Color group box:

Select the color you want the line style to be from the drop-down color palette.


Background tab (Table Cell Properties dialog box)

Style group box:

Select a fill style from the list box. The options available in the Attributes group box differ according to whether you choose a standard color fill or a textured background.

Attributes group box (with a standard color fill selected):

From the top drop-down color palette, select the ‘from’ color for your fill style (if you selected a plain fill style, the top drop-down color palette changes the fill color).

From the bottom drop-down color palette, select the ‘to’ color for your fill style.

When you change the colors, the previews in the Style list box change to reflect these changes.

Preview window: This displays a preview of the effect of the changes you make in the attributes group box. If you have chosen a line or cylindrical graduated fill style, you can drag the arrow in the preview window to change the angle of the color change.

Attributes group box (with a textured background selected):

Custom Color check box: Check this check box if you want to change the color of the texture.

From the drop-down color palette, select the color you want. When you change the color of the texture, the previews in the Style list box change to reflect this.

Angle box: Type the angle you want the texture to be in this box. Alternatively, drag the radius of the Angle circle to the angle you want.

Detail slider: Drag the slider to change the detail of the texture. The higher the detail, the larger the texture appears.


Picture Status (PostScript) dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select a frame containing an imported EPS picture and then double-click on its filename in the contents box.

From this dialog box you can see the name, size and orientation of the EPS picture. The EPS picture cannot be displayed on screen unless it contains a bitmap preview, and can only be printed on a PostScript printer.

Picture group box:

Name: Displays the name of the picture file. This name can be changed by entering a new name in the Name box. The name of the original picture file will not be affected.

Size (Kbytes): Displays the size of a picture in terms of memory.

Rotate: Enter the angle you want to rotate the picture by in the box, or select the angle by using the arrows on the box. Alternatively drag the radius of the circle until the box displays the desired angle.

Remove button:

Removes the picture from the document, but does not delete it from your hard disk. You will be requested to confirm your choice before you continue.


Text Status dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select a frame containing text, click on its name in the contents box, and then click on the Item Information tool.

From this dialog box you can see the length and size of the text, how many frames it occupies and how much of it has not yet been placed. You can also re-name the text.

Text group box:

Name: Displays the current name of the text. A text name can be changed by entering a new name into the Name box.

Size (Kbytes): Displays the size of the text in terms of memory.

Number of Frames Used: Displays how many frames the text occupies.

Unused Frame (units): Displays the amount of space remaining in the text's frames.

Language drop-down list box:

Displays the language of the spelling and hyphenation dictionaries currently in use by the text. You can change this setting from the Language drop-down list box if you have other language dictionaries installed. If the text language is 'neutral' the text will be hyphenated and spell-checked using the document language. This can be set from the Language command in the File menu.

Words group box:

Total: Displays the number of words that are in the text. Note that this is not the total number of words in the document if the document contains more than one piece of text.

Number Placed: Displays the number of words in the text that have been placed, i.e. those that appear in the document.

Number Unplaced: Displays how many of the text's words have not been placed, i.e. the number of words that do not appear in the document because there are too few frames, or because the frames are too small.

Remove button:

Removes the text from the document but does not delete it from your hard disk. You will be requested to confirm your choice before you continue.

Note:

The unit of measurement used in the Text Status dialog box can be changed using the Units dialog box.


Printing on Both Sides dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Booklet printing and/or Pause Between Sides from the Paper tab of the Print dialog box, and then go ahead with printing.

In order for MasterPublisher to print on both sides (i.e. with two pages on each sheet of paper), it needs to know more about the direction in which your printer accepts and outputs paper. You specify this information in this dialog box.

Paper Tray group box:

Select either Paper is Loaded Face Down or Paper is Loaded face Up, according to how your printer loads paper.

Output Bin group box:

Select either Paper is Delivered Face Down or Paper is Delivered Face Up, according to how your printer delivers printed sheets.


Override Paragraph Style dialog box

This tabbed dialog box appears when you select any of the following from the Text menu: Layout, Spacing, Bullets & Numbers, Drop Caps, Ruler Lines.

Indents & Layout tab

Spacing tab

Bullets & Numbering tab

Drop Caps tab

From this dialog box you can change the properties of selected text.


Font tab (Character Properties dialog box)

Font drop-down list box:

Click on the arrow to drop-down the list of fonts available and select the font you want from the list.

Language drop-down list box:

Select the language the text is written in (so that the correct dictionary - if you have additional dictionaries - is used).

Underline drop-down list box:

To attribute an underline style to the text, drop down the list and select the underline style you want:

None: Turns off underlining

Single: Underlines all text with a single line

Single Words: Underlines words only with a single line

Double: Underlines all text with a double line

Double Words: Underlines words only with a double line

Point Size drop-down list box:

To select a point size:

Click on the point size in the drop-down list box

Type the size into the Point Size box.

Drop-down Color palette:

To attribute a color to the text, click open the drop-down color palette, move the mouse pointer over it and click on the color of your choice. Color is attributed to text in exactly the same way as a font style such as bold or italic. Use the slider to change the tint of the color.

Set Width box:

To compress or expand text, type a value into the Set Width box. Acceptable values range from 25% to 200%.

A value of less than 100% will compress text by an equivalent percentage. A value greater than 100% will expand it accordingly.

Style check boxes:

Check the seven style check boxes to apply further styling to the text:

Bold

Italic

Superscript: Moves text up half a line and reduces the size of the text

Subscript: Moves text down half a line and reduces the size of the text

Boxed: Puts a box around text

Round Boxed: Puts a rounded box around text

Strikeout: Puts a line through text.

Preview group box:

This displays the screen representation of the chosen font.

Shortcut:

Use the color palette at the bottom of the MasterPublisher window to attribute text color to selected text instead of opening this dialog box.

Note:

The color of text displayed on a 16-colour screen may not appear the same as the color you have selected from the palette.


Indents & Layout tab (Override Paragraph Style dialog box)

Justification:

Click on one of the buttons that corresponds to the alignment you want:

Flushed Left for left justified text

Centered for text justified to the center of the frame

Flushed Right for right justified text

Justified for left and right justified text

Indents group box:

Use this group box to set the amounts by which the text will be indented within its frame:

In the First Line box, type the amount of space you want between the left frame edge and the start of the first line of the paragraph.

In the Left box, type the amount of space you want between the left frame edge and the rest of the paragraph.

In the Right box, type the amount of space you want between the right frame edge and the right edge of the paragraph.

Space Between Paragraphs group box:

Use this box to specify how much space you want to leave blank above and below the paragraph and at the top of the frame. Type the measurements, or use the arrows to select them.

Keep Lines Together box:

Use this box to determine how paragraphs are split across frames and pages:

None if you don’t mind where the paragraph is split

Whole Paragraph to prevent a paragraph from being split over a frame or page

At Start and End if you want to specify the minimum widow lines and orphan lines that you want (these are the lines that cannot be split at the start and end of a paragraph). Type the numbers of lines in the Start and End boxes.

Keep Paragraphs Together group box:

Check the check boxes to specify which paragraphs are to be kept together:

Select Keep with Previous to prevent a paragraph from being separated from the paragraph above it.

Select Keep with Next to prevent a paragraph from being separated from the paragraph below it. This is especially useful for headings.

Start Paragraph group box:

Check the check boxes to specify where new paragraphs will be started:

Select On Next Page to force a paragraph to always start at the top of the first frame on the next page, if text is flowed into the frame.

Select In Next Frame to force a paragraph to always start at the top of the next frame in your document, if the text is flowed into the frame.


Spacing tab (Override Paragraph Style dialog box)

Word & Letter Spacing group box:

Choose one of three options to specify how the words and letters are spaced:

Standard: MasterPublisher decides on spacing for you, but you can specify how tight or loose this is to be by moving the slider.

Custom: You can type the minimum, optimum and maximum space you want between words, and the maximum space allowed between letters.

Monospacing: Select this to ensure that the spaces between the letters and words are not stretched when using a monospaced font (where all the characters have the same width, e.g. Courier).

If you want MasterPublisher to be able to put extra space between letters as well as between words, when necessary, check the Allow Letter Spacing check box.

If you want MasterPublisher to kern your text automatically, check the Autokern check box.

Line Spacing group box:

Choose one of two options to specify which type of leading is used to put space between lines of text:

Relative Leading: Select this to set the leading relative to the point size of the text. Four buttons represent common choices or you can type the amount in the % box.

Absolute Leading: Select this to type the leading you want in points.

Allow Line Overlap check box: Check this check box if you want to let your lines of text overlap each other.

Align Baselines check box:

Check this check box to make sure that, when text is set in columns, paragraphs in the columns will align horizontally so that the baselines of text will line up across the page.

Hyphenation group box:

Check the Hyphenation check box to turn on hyphenation.

Drag the Raggedness slider to specify how ragged you want the right-hand edge of the text to be.

Tab Spacing group box:

Type the default tab spacing you want for your text.


Bullets & Numbering tab (Override Paragraph Style dialog box)

None button: Click on this if you do not want to use bullets or numbering in your text.

Bullet button: Click on this if you want to use a bullet in the selected text.

List Numbering button: Click on this if you want to apply list numbering to your text.

Heading Numbering button: Click on this if you want to apply heading numbering to your text.

If you have selected Bullet:

Font drop-down list box:

Select the font you want to use. By default, all of the fonts for the currently selected printer are listed.

Show Symbol Fonts Only check box: Check this check box to display only symbol fonts in the Font list box.

Custom Color check box: Check this check box if you want to apply a specific color to your bullets. Select the color you want from the drop-down color palette.

Bullet Character list box:

This displays the bullet characters for the selected font. Use the scroll bar to display the whole selection. Click on the bullet character you wish to use.

A bullet always appears as the first character on the first line of the paragraph. Use the Indents & Layout tab to create a hanging indent so that there is a space between the bullet and the text.

If you have selected List Numbering or Heading Numbering:

Number styles:

Select the style of numbering you want from the list of those available.

Text before box: Type any text you want to appear before the numbers.

Text after box: Type any text you want to appear after the numbers.

If you have selected Heading Numbering:

Heading Level box: Type the number of the heading level you want the text to be.

Include Previous Levels check box: Check this check box if you want the heading numbering of the text to include any previous levels.


Drop Caps tab (Override Paragraph Style dialog box)

None button: Click on this if you do not want to apply a drop cap to your text.

Lowered or Raised: Click on the drop cap style you want.

The drop cap will appear as the first letter of that paragraph of text.


Picture Cropping dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select Crop Picture from the Frame menu.

Preview window: Drag the mouse pointer over the area that you want to crop to, alternatively you can drag the edges of the crop box to mark the area you want.

Zoom slider: Drag the zoom slider to zoom in and out of the selected area in the preview window.

Reset button: Click on this to restore the picture to its original 'uncropped' state.

The changes you make to the picture will take effect in your document as you work in the dialog box.


Edit Paragraph Style dialog box

This tabbed dialog box appears when you click on Edit button in the Paragraph Styles dialog box, or click on the Edit Paragraph Style tool in the Paragraph Tools.

You can use this dialog box to change all aspects of the paragraph style by clicking on the appropriate tab:

General tab

Font tab

Indents & Layout tab

Spacing tab

Bullets tab

Drop Caps tab

You can easily switch from one option to another (e.g. to change the format when you are choosing a font) simply by clicking on a tab in the dialog box.


General tab (Edit Paragraph Style dialog box)

Name box: Displays the name of the paragraph style. You can edit the name by typing a new name in this box.

Based on drop-down list box: Displays the paragraph style this one is based on. You can select a style from the drop-down list.

Next Style drop-down list box: Displays the next paragraph style to be used after this one. You can select a paragraph style from the drop-down list.

Shortcut Key drop-down list box: Displays a shortcut key for the paragraph style. You can select a shortcut key from the drop-down list.


Font tab (Edit Paragraph Style dialog box)

Font drop-down list box:

Click on the arrow to drop-down the list of fonts available and select the font you want from the list.

Language drop-down list box:

Select the language the text is written in (so that the correct dictionary - if you have additional dictionaries - is used).

Underline drop-down list box:

To attribute an underline style to the paragraph style, drop down the list and select the underline style you want:

None: Turns off underlining

Single: Underlines all text with a single line

Single Words: Underlines words only with a single line

Double: Underlines all text with a double line

Double Words: Underlines words only with a double line

Point Size drop-down list box:

To select a point size:

click on the point size in the drop-down list box

type the size into the Point Size box.

Drop-down Color palette:

To attribute a color to the paragraph style, click open the drop-down color palette, move the mouse pointer over it and click on the color of your choice. Color is attributed to text in exactly the same way as a font style such as bold or italic. Use the slider to change the tint of the color.

Set Width box:

To compress or expand text, type a value into the Set Width box. Acceptable values range from 25% to 200%.

A value of less than 100% will compress text by an equivalent percentage. A value greater than 100% will expand it accordingly.

Style check boxes:

Check the seven style check boxes to apply further styling to the text:

Bold

Italic

Superscript: Moves text up half a line and reduces the size of the text

Subscript: Moves text down half a line and reduces the size of the text

Boxed: Puts a box around text

Round Boxed: Puts a rounded box around text

Strikeout: Puts a line through text.

Preview group box:

This displays the screen representation of the chosen font.

Shortcut:

Use the color palette at the bottom of the MasterPublisher window to attribute text color to selected text instead of opening this dialog box.

Note:

The color of text displayed on a 16-colour screen may not appear the same as the color you have selected from the palette.


Indents & Layout tab (Edit Paragraph Style dialog box)

Justification:

Click on one of the buttons that corresponds to the alignment you want:

Flushed Left for left justified text

Centered for text justified to the center of the frame

Flushed Right for right justified text

Justified for left and right justified text

Indents group box:

Use this group box to set the amounts by which the text will be indented within its frame:

In the First Line box, type the amount of space you want between the left frame edge and the start of the first line of the paragraph.

In the Left box, type the amount of space you want between the left frame edge and the rest of the paragraph.

In the Right box, type the amount of space you want between the right frame edge and the right edge of the paragraph.

Space Between Paragraphs group box:

Use this box to specify how much space you want to leave blank above and below the paragraph and at the top of the frame. Type the measurements, or use the arrows to select them.

Keep Lines Together box:

Use this box to determine how paragraphs are split across frames and pages:

None if you don’t mind where the paragraph is split

Whole Paragraph to prevent a paragraph in that style from being split over a frame or page

At Start and End if you want to specify the minimum widow lines and orphan lines that you want (these are the lines that cannot be split at the start and end of a paragraph). Type the numbers of lines in the Start and End boxes.

Keep Paragraphs Together group box:

Check the check boxes to specify which paragraphs are to be kept together:

Select Keep with Previous to prevent a paragraph from being separated from the paragraph above it.

Select Keep with Next to prevent a paragraph from being separated from the paragraph below it.

Start Paragraph group box:

Check the check boxes to specify where new paragraphs will be started:

Select On Next Page to force a paragraph to always start at the top of the first frame on the next page, if text is flowed into the frame.

Select In Next Frame to force a paragraph to always start at the top of the next frame in your document, if the text is flowed into the frame.


Spacing tab (Edit Paragraph Style dialog box)

Word & Letter Spacing group box:

Choose one of three options to specify how the words and letters are spaced:

Standard: MasterPublisher decides on spacing for you, but you can specify how tight or loose this is to be by moving the slider.

Custom: You can type the minimum, optimum and maximum space you want between words, and the maximum space allowed between letters.

Monospacing: Select this to ensure that the spaces between the letters and words are not stretched when using a monospaced font (where all the characters have the same width, e.g. Courier).

If you want MasterPublisher to be able to put extra space between letters as well as between words, when necessary, check the Allow Letter Spacing check box.

If you want MasterPublisher to kern your text automatically, check the Autokern check box.

Line Spacing group box:

Choose one of two options to specify which type of leading is used to put space between lines of text:

Relative Leading: Select this to set the leading relative to the point size of the text. Four buttons represent common choices or you can type the amount in the % box.

Absolute Leading: Select this to type the leading you want in points.

Allow Line Overlap check box: Check this check box if you want to let your lines of text overlap each other.

Align Baselines check box:

Check this check box to make sure that, when text is set in columns, paragraphs in the columns will align horizontally so that the baselines of text will line up across the page.

Hyphenation group box:

Check the Hyphenation check box to turn on hyphenation.

Drag the Raggedness slider to specify how ragged you want the right-hand edge of the text to be.

Tab Spacing group box:

Type the default tab spacing you want for your text.


Bullets tab (Edit Paragraph Style dialog box)
Bullets & Numbering tab (Edit Paragraph Style dialog box)

None button: Click on this if you do not want to use bullets or numbering in your text.

Bullet button: Click on this if you want to use a bullet in the selected text.

List Numbering button: Click on this if you want to apply list numbering to your text.

Heading Numbering button: Click on this if you want to apply heading numbering to your text.

If you have selected Bullet:

Font drop-down list box:

Select the font you want to use. By default, all of the fonts for the currently selected printer are listed.

Show Symbol Fonts Only check box: Check this check box to display only symbol fonts in the Font list box.

Custom Color check box: Check this check box if you want to apply a specific color to your bullets. Select the color you want from the drop-down color palette.

Bullet Character list box:

This displays the bullet characters for the selected font. Use the scroll bar to display the whole selection. Click on the bullet character you wish to use.

A bullet always appears as the first character on the first line of the paragraph. Use the Indents & Layout tab to create a hanging indent so that there is a space between the bullet and the text.

If you have selected List Numbering or Heading Numbering:

Number styles:

Select the style of numbering you want from the list of those available.

Text before box: Type any text you want to appear before the numbers.

Text after box: Type any text you want to appear after the numbers.

If you have selected Heading Numbering:

Heading Level box: Type the number of the heading level you want the text to be.

Include Previous Levels check box: Check this check box if you want the heading numbering of the text to include any previous levels.


Drop Caps tab (Edit Paragraph Style dialog box)

None button: Click on this if you do not want to apply a drop cap to your text.

Lowered or Raised: Click on the drop cap style you want.

The drop cap will appear as the first letter of that paragraph of text.


Tab Stop dialog box

This dialog box appears when right-click on a tab stop in the ruler at the top of the page and select Properties from the shortcut menu that appears.

From this dialog box you specify an actual tab position for the tab.

Type drop-down list box: Select the type of tab stop you want.

Tab Position box: Type the position you want the tab to be in or use the up and down arrows to select the position.

Leader Character box: Type the character you want to use as a leader.

Leader Spacing: Type the spacing you want to apply to the tab leader.


No longer used?


Insert Clipart dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select a frame that is already filled, e.g. with a picture, a PowerText object or some text, and then click on the Clipart tool in the Toolbox.

Replace contents of selected frame with clipart

Select this option to clear the frame of its contents and fill it with the clipart you are about to insert.

Create or select frame for clipart

Select this option to return to your document. You can then create a new frame in which to insert the clipart, or select an empty frame that already exists.


Insert from Picture Browser dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select a frame that is already filled, e.g. with a picture, a PowerText object or some text, and then click on the Picture Browser tool in the Toolbox.

Replace contents of selected frame with Picture Browser

Select this option to clear the frame of its contents and fill it with the photo you are about to insert.

Create or select frame for Picture Browser

Select this option to return to your document. You can then create a new frame in which to insert the photo, or select an empty frame that already exists.


 Insert Object dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select a frame that is already filled, e.g. with a picture, a PowerText object or some text, and then click on the Object tool in the Toolbox.

Replace contents of selected frame with object

Select this option to clear the frame of its contents and fill it with the object you are about to insert.

Create or select frame for object

Select this option to return to your document. You can then create a new frame in which to insert the object, or select an empty frame that already exists.


Insert PhotoEditor dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select a frame that is already filled, e.g. with a picture, a PowerText object or some text, and then try to insert a PhotoEditor object.

Replace contents of selected frame with PhotoEditor

Select this option to clear the frame of its contents and fill it with the PhotoEditor bitmap you are about to insert.

Create or select frame for PhotoEditor

Select this option to return to your document. You can then create a new frame in which to insert the PhotoEditor bitmap, or select an empty frame that already exists.


Insert PowerText dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select a frame that is already filled, e.g. with a picture or some text, and then click on the PowerText tool in the Toolbox.

Replace contents of selected frame with PowerText

Select this option to clear the frame of its contents and fill it with the PowerText you are about to create.

Create or select frame for PowerText

Select this option to return to your document. You can then create a new frame in which to insert the PowerText, or select an empty frame that already exists.


Insert PowerText dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select a frame that already contains a PowerText object, and then click on the PowerText tool in the Toolbox.

Edit the existing PowerText in the selected frame

Select this option to display PowerText, from where you can edit the PowerText object.

Create or select frame for PowerText

Select this option to return to your document. You can then create a new frame in which to insert the PowerText, or select an empty frame that already exists.


Insert MasterDraw dialog box

This dialog box appears when you select a frame that is already filled, e.g. with a picture or some text, and then click on the MasterDraw tool in the Toolbox.

Replace contents of selected frame with MasterDraw

Select this option to clear the frame of its contents and fill it with the MasterDraw picture you are about to insert.

Create or select frame for MasterDraw

Select this option to return to your document. You can then create a new frame in which to insert the MasterDraw picture, or select an empty frame that already exists.


Import Text dialog box

This dialog box appears when you try and import text into a frame that is already filled, e.g. with a PowerText object.

Create a new frame for the imported text

Select this option to create a new frame at the top left-hand corner of the page, and import the text into this new frame.

Replace contents of selected frame with imported text

Select this option to clear the frame of its current contents and fill it with the imported text.

Import text without flowing it into a frame

Select this option to import the text without placing it in a frame. The text file is listed in the contents box for you to flow through frames later.


Import Text dialog box

This dialog box appears when you do not have a frame selected and you import a text file.

Create a new frame for the imported text

Select this option to create a new frame at the top left-hand corner of the page, and import the text into this new frame.

Import text without flowing it into a frame

Select this option to import the text without placing it in a frame. The text file is listed in the contents box for you to flow through frames later.


Import Picture dialog box

This dialog box appears when you try and import a picture into a frame that is already filled, e.g. with a PowerText object.

Create a new frame for the imported picture

Select this option to create a new frame at the top left-hand corner of the page, and import the picture into this new frame.

Replace contents of selected frame with imported picture

Select this option to clear the frame of its current contents and fill it with the imported picture.

Import picture without placing it in a frame

Select this option to import the picture without placing it in a frame. The picture file is listed in the contents box for you to place in a frame later.


Import Picture dialog box

This dialog box appears when you do not have a frame selected and you import a picture.

Create a new frame for the imported picture

Select this option to create a new frame at the top left-hand corner of the page, and import the picture into this new frame.

Import picture without placing it in a frame

Select this option to import the picture without placing it in a frame. The picture file is listed in the contents box for you to place in a frame later.


Import Multiple Items dialog box

This dialog box appears when you import several text or picture files into your document at the same time, e.g. by dragging and dropping them from the Windows Explorer.

Create a new frame for each of the imported items

Select this option to create a new frame into which each new item will be placed. You can then size and position these frames to suit your required layout.

Import items without placing them into frames

Select this option to import the items without placing them in frames. The items are listed in the contents box for you to place in frames later.


Glossary
Click on a tab for more glossary entries.

- A -

Active window

Align

Alignment

Annotation frame

ASCII

Aspect ratio

Auto-numbering

Autotrace

- B -

Baseline

Background shapes

Basic shape

Binding margin

Bitmap

Body text

Bold text

Bookmark

Boxed text

Break control

Bullet

- C -

Case

Cell

Centered text

Character

Check box

Clear

Clipart

Clipboard

CMYK

Color palette

Color separation

Column

Column guides

Command

Contents box

Control menu

Copy

Crop

Crop marks

Custom page

Cut


Glossary
Click on a tab for more glossary entries.

- D -

Decimal tab

Delete

Design snippet

Dialog box

Dithered color

Dockable toolbars

Document

DPI

Drag-and-drop

Drop caps

Duplicate frames

- E -

Em

Embed

En

Exceptions dictionary

Export text

- F -

Facing pages

Fancy fonts

Field

File

File extension

File format

Fill style

Floating tools

Folder

Font

Footer

Frame


Glossary
Click on a tab for more glossary entries.

- G -

Ghost styles

Graduated fill style

Greeking

Grid

- H -

Hairline

Handles

Hanging indent

Hard space

Header

Help Assistant

Highlight

HLS

Hue

Hyphenation

- I -

Import

Indent

Information line

In-place editing

Internet

Inverse video

Italic text


Glossary
Click on a tab for more glossary entries.

- J -

Justified text

- K -

Kern

Keyboard alternatives

Keyboard shortcuts

- L -

Landscape

Language dictionary

Leader

Leading

Left-aligned text

Letter spacing

Lightness

Line-art file

Line style

Link

- M -

Mailing list

Mail merge

Margin

Master page

Menu

Menu bar


Glossary
Click on a tab for more glossary entries.

- O -

Object

OLE

Orphan

Overprint

- P -

Padding

Page format

Pantone

Paper mapping

Paragraph

Paragraph style

Paste

Pasteboard

Path

Pica

Picture format

PagePilot

Plain fonts

Point

Pointer

Point size

Portrait

PowerText

Print margin

Process color

Proportional spacing


Glossary
Click on a tab for more glossary entries.

- R -

Ragged text

Redo

Registration

Repel text

RGB

Right-aligned text

Rivers

Roman

RTF

- S -

Sans serif

Saturation

Scale

Scanner

Screen font

Scroll bar

Selected block

Serif

Slider

Snap

Soft hyphen

Source application

Source file

Spot color

Stack pages

String

Subscript

Superscript

Summary information

Synonym


Glossary
Click on a tab for more glossary entries.

- T -

Tab bar

Tabbed dialog box

Tab stop/point

Text insertion point

Text runaround

Text selection

Tile

Tile pages

Tint

Title bar

Toggle

Toolbar

Tool tips

TWAIN

- U -

Undo

- V -

Variable space

View size

Visibility


Glossary
Click on a tab for more glossary entries.

- W -

Web link

Widow

Word spacing

Work area

WYSIWYG

- X -

x-height


A


American Standard Code for Information Interchange; a computer code used to represent letters and numbers.


The relationship between the height and width of an object.


The window in which you are currently working or that is currently selected; only one window can be active at a time. When a window is active, its title bar is highlighted to differentiate it from other windows.


The positioning of a selected group of frames relative to each other.


The positioning of text on the page; left aligned, right aligned, centered, or justified.


The process of numbering lines of text, paragraphs or headings automatically. Each new section is numbered in sequence.


A frame that has been marked as an annotation. Annotation frames can be useful for adding notes for yourself in your document because you can opt not to print them out when you print the document.


To trace the outline of an imported picture automatically.


B


This is a feature of PowerText which allows the creation of background effects such as rectangles or starbursts.


A box, rounded box, ellipse or star created with one of MasterPublisher’s frame shape tools.


An invisible line on which text rests.


Extra space added to the side of a printed page to allow for punching or binding: usually the left-hand side of a right page and the right-hand side of a left page.


The main text of a document.


A weight of text characterized by thick heavy lines.


Text which has a box drawn around it.


A heavy dot or other symbol, used in lists and as an ornament before a paragraph.


A picture that is made up of individual dots created with a paint program or with a scanner.

Compare with Line-art.


The paragraph style attribute that controls where and how paragraphs are broken and where they begin.


A marker in the document that you can jump to quickly. Bookmarks are particularly useful in long documents and for jumps in Web pages. Bookmarks can refer to text, frames or pages.


C


A color model of subtractive mixing with cyan, magenta, yellow and black used to make any other color. These are the colors of the four inks used in process color printing.


A set of colors available to your MasterPublisher documents. You can create more colors to add to the color palette, or you can delete colors if you do not want to use them. When you save a document, the color palette is saved as part of the document, with any changes that you have made. Each document can be saved with a different selection of colors in the palette.


A technique used in color printing. A color document is separated into a number of components, each of which is printed using a single color ink. The combination of separate components reconstitutes the original full color document.

The color of each separation depends on the separation method used.


Hairlines drawn on a printout to mark the edge of the document when the printout is printed on paper larger than the page size of the document.


Text can be either upper case (CAPITAL letters), lower case (small letters), or initial capitals (First Letters Upper Case).


Text that is positioned halfway between the left and right edges of the frame.


Any single letter, number, punctuation mark, or symbol.


A temporary holding place for a block of text, a frame or a graphic that has been cut or copied.


The vertical arrangement of text on the page.


Dotted lines displayed on screen that can be used to help position frames on the page.

Column guides are not printed.


To place a block of text, a frame, or a graphic onto the Clipboard without removing it from the page, so that you can transfer it to another location.

Compare with Cut.


To select a part of the picture, imported bitmap, line-art file or OLE object or to be displayed in the document.


To move a block of text, a frame or a graphic from the page onto the Clipboard so that you can transfer it to another location.

Compare with Copy and Delete.


A standard Windows menu displayed by clicking on the program icon at the top left of a window that allows you to move, resize and close the window.


The small window that lists the named text, pictures and OLE objects in your document.

The contents box can be turned on or off from the Controls tab of the Preferences dialog box.


A small square box on a dialog box that can be selected or cleared. A check box represents an option that you can turn on or off.


To remove the contents of the selected frame(s), table(s) or cell(s) to allow you to place another item into them.


A 'library' of pictures, often classified by themes, that can be used in your documents.


A word or phrase found in a menu that you choose in order to carry out an action.


A user-defined page size.


A section of a table that you insert your information into. Every table is divided up into cells.


D


These are toolbars that you can move to different positions on the desktop.


The number of dots (pixels) per inch that a printer can produce. Most laser printers print at 300 or 600 dpi. High-resolution phototypesetters provide several thousand dpi.

The higher the dpi, the sharper the printout.


A tab stop that allows columns of decimal numbers to be aligned at the decimal point.


The combination of text and pictures. Also called a MasterPublisher DTP file.


A window used to supply information to MasterPublisher.


To remove a block of text, a frame, or a graphic, from the page without placing it on the Clipboard.

Compare with Cut and Copy.


A color made up of two or more solid colors. For example, orange is a combination of red and yellow.


An enlarged first letter that drops below or is raised above the first line of text. Sometimes called fancy first letters.


A section of a document (a frame or group of frames) that has been saved separately from the main document and can be inserted into other MasterPublisher documents.


The act of dragging an object (text, pictures etc.) from one program to another. For example, you might drag-and-drop a picture from PhotoEditor into your MasterPublisher document.


Frames and their contents that have been copied and repeated on other pages in the document using the Repeat on Pages command.


E


A unit for measuring widths in a font, equal to the width of the letter 'm' in the current font and point size.


A unit for measuring widths in a font, half the width of an em.


A file containing a list of words that are exceptions to the standard hyphenation rules, or that are not hyphenated at all (for example, personal names).

This file is used by MasterPublisher when deciding where to split a word at the end of a line.


To extract text from a DTP file so that it can be edited using a word-processor. The text is saved as a text file that can be opened in word-processing programs.


To copy an object that was created in a source application, e.g. MasterDraw, into your MasterPublisher document. By embedding an object, you gain fast access to the features of the source application without having to leave MasterPublisher.

When you embed an object, a copy of the object file is made and stored within your MasterPublisher document: the original file is not altered in any way and remains available for future use.


F


Fonts of this type may include Ornamental, Script and Brushwood. These and similar fonts are used for more decorative or ornate text, and are useful for PowerText effects.


The full-stop and characters at the end of a filename. An extension usually identifies the kind of information a file contains. For example, files that you create using MasterPublisher have the .DTP extension.


The way in which information is structured in a file. Applications always store files in a particular format. A format readable by one application may not be readable by another application.


The optional display of the MasterPublisher tools in a moveable window.


This is used in MasterPublisher to mean the style of type, for example Sans, Serif or Courier.

Elsewhere this may be called a typeface, with the term font reserved for a particular weight, size and style of a typeface.


Text that appears at the bottom of the page. MasterPublisher has standard footer frames that appear at the bottom of the page, ready for you to add information into.


A shape used to hold text, pictures, graphics, PowerText or OLE objects.


Part of a structure for organizing your files on a disk. A folder can contain files and other folders called sub-folders.


A document stored on a hard or floppy disk, or other media.


The attribute of graphics, frames and PowerText specifying how they should be filled.

Fill styles can have different colors, and can be plain, graduated or textured.


A special code that you insert into your document that tells MasterPublisher to insert specific information, such as the date and time. These fields update automatically when the document changes.


A way of displaying pages in the MasterPublisher window. Both the left and right pages will be displayed at the same time (left pages are even page numbers and right pages are odd page numbers).


G


A method of representing text by a series of gray horizontal lines, used when text is too small to display legibly, or when a small enough screen font is unavailable.


An invisible overlay of crossed lines to help accurate positioning of frames.

Precise positioning is assisted by the option of making frames snap to the grid when they are drawn or moved.


A fill style that graduates from one color to another.


Gray text displaying the name of the paragraph style on blank lines of text or the name of a mail merge field if it is empty. Ghost styles only appear when they are selected in your preferences. When ghost styles appear, paragraph markers also appear at line breaks.


H


A color model using Hue, Lightness and Saturation to specify a color.


The position of a color along the color spectrum from 0 to 360 degrees where red is 0, yellow is 60, green is 120, cyan is 180, blue is 240, magenta is 300 and red is 360, again.


A space that is never 'stretched' during justification or split across line breaks.

Compare with Variable space.


Small squares on the edges and corners of a selected frame that are used for sizing or rotating.


A paragraph style where the first line is flush with the left margin and subsequent lines are indented.


A thin line displayed or printed at the finest possible resolution of a particular screen or printer.


Text that appears at the top of the page. MasterPublisher has standard header frames that appear at the top of the page, ready for you to add information into.


To emphasize an area of text in some way, for example, in inverse video.


Splitting a word at the end of a line, to produce a more even distribution of text between lines.


A window that appears as part of the MasterPublisher desktop, displaying information about the task you are performing. From this window you can jump to relevant Help topics for further information.


I


A bar at the foot of the MasterPublisher desktop giving hints and tips as you work.


To load text or a picture created with another program into MasterPublisher.


The gap between the left or right-hand margin and one or more lines of text.


To display black and white reversed so that white characters are shown on a black background and vice versa.


A style of text characterized by letters slanting to the right.


To edit an embedded object without having to leave MasterPublisher. Some of the MasterPublisher menus and tools will be temporarily replaced by those of the source application.

Linked objects cannot be edited in-place.


A collection of computer networks that connect millions of computers around the world. The Internet is a constantly changing source of information available to anyone, from big businesses to the home user. Searching through the Internet is often referred to as ‘surfing the Web’.


J


Text that aligns evenly with both the left and right margins. This is done by adding extra space between words and characters where necessary.


K


An alternative to using the mouse for selection. Keyboard alternatives are shown by underlining a letter in menu titles, dialog boxes and so on. They are also given in other sections of the Help system, when appropriate.


To adjust the spacing between pairs of characters to move them closer together or further apart.


A key or key combination that you press to carry out a command or action.

If a menu command has a keyboard shortcut, the key combination is listed to the right of the command name on the menu.


L


The percentage by which a color approaches black (0 percent) and white (100) percent.


The attribute of frames, lines or shapes that specifies how the line or outline should be drawn. Line styles can be drawn with or without arrow-heads and in different colors and thicknesses.


A page whose width is greater than its height.

Compare with Portrait.


A row of characters, usually dots, used to guide the reader's eye across the page in, for example, a table of contents.


The distance in points from the baseline of one line of text to the next.


Text that is flushed with the left margin and uneven on the right margin.

Compare with Right-aligned text.


When text is justified, extra space is inserted between the words in each line (see Justified text).

If this space exceeds a user-defined maximum value (see Word Spacing), then extra space is added between the letters in each word.


A picture made up of lines, curves, etc.

Compare with Bitmap.


To create a reference in your MasterPublisher document to a source file.

By creating links between files, you save time and ensure consistency in your work. You can share information from one file with several others, and you need only maintain the original file.


A set of files containing information about the spelling and hyphenation rules of a particular language.


M


The white space surrounding the text area of a page.


A single or double-sided page that acts as the foundation for any new pages added to a document.


A list of available commands and actions in MasterPublisher.

Menu names are displayed in the menu bar near the top of the MasterPublisher window.


The horizontal bar containing the names of MasterPublisher’s menus.

It is displayed below the title bar.


The combination of a standard document, such as a letter, and a data source containing the details of a mailing list. Insert mail merge fields into your document that will automatically pick up the appropriate information from the mailing list e.g. a person’s name and address.


A set of records with information, such as name address, telephone numbers, for the people/companies you would send mail merged documents to.


O


When a color without the overprint property overlaps another color, the color lying under the line or fill is removed when spot color separations are produced. This is sometimes called under color removal. However, if a color has the overprint property selected, it is printed on top of the underlying object without under color removal. The usual color for overprinting with is black, as this can overprint any other color without itself being affected.

Under color removal prevents the color of the foreground color being mixed with the underlying color, but imperfect registration of the spot color separations may produce a white hairline around the foreground color. Overprinting can be used to make traps which prevent unwanted color mixing and offset the effects of imperfect registration.


A technical term for one or more lines of a paragraph left at the bottom of a column or page.

Compare with Widow.


A file such as a drawing, chart or sound file that can be linked or embedded into a MasterPublisher document.


A way to transfer and share files between Windows applications. OLE lets you produce a document consisting of information created in multiple applications.


P


A color model in which colors are specified from a standard reference set.


This is a means of choosing the way you want your documents to be laid out on the page for printing, e.g. as a booklet, or with a number of document pages to one printed page.


The area around your page that provides an alternative to the Clipboard, but allows you to keep several objects to be pasted visible at one time. You can also move objects from the document to the paste board.


A PagePilot is a feature which can quickly create a certain kind of document, such as a newsletter. It does this by asking you questions and using your answers to automatically lay out and format the type of document you specify. Each PagePilot gives you a choice of several document templates.


Fonts of this type may include Serifed and Sans. These and similar fonts are most useful for creating plain documents.


The area within the boundaries of the blue rectangular outline on the work area, which shows how much of the page will be printed. This is based on the current page size and orientation of your printer driver.


A color model of subtractive mixing with cyan, magenta, yellow and black used to make any other color. Black is used to replace equal mixtures of the other three colors to produce better dark colors.


The space around a frame into which text cannot flow.


The size and orientation of your document's pages, and whether there are left and right pages or all the pages are alike.


The name for a particular type of paragraph with its own set of features, for example, font, alignment, bullets and indents.


To insert the contents of the Clipboard into a document.


A typesetting unit of measurement equal to 1/6 of an inch.

Twelve points equal one pica.


The kind of file (line-art or bitmap) that a picture has been saved as.


A typesetting unit of measurement equal to 1/72 of an inch.


The height of a font measured in points.


A page whose height is greater than its width.

Compare with Landscape.


A means of spacing characters such that the space each character occupies varies according to the width of that character.

For example, the letter 'i' occupies less space than the letter 'm'.


Text that can be stretched, rotated, skewed, filled and made 3D to create a variety of effects.


Any line or lines of text ended by pressing the Enter key.

A single letter, word, or line is considered a paragraph if the Enter key is pressed after entering it.


The arrow-shaped cursor on the screen that follows the movement of the mouse and indicates which area of the screen will be affected when you press the mouse button.

The pointer will change shape when you perform certain tasks.


A straight or curved line consisting of one or more segments joined together at points.


R


The alignment of color separations to reconstitute the full color version.


A color model for additive mixing, in which Red, Green and Blue are mixed to produce any color.


Another term for Left-aligned text.


To make text run around the edges of a frame.


Text which is flush with the right margin and uneven on the left margin.

Compare with Left-aligned text.


The alignment of spaces in adjacent lines of text that join together to form white 'rivers' of space running through the text.

Rivers are most noticeable when text is justified in narrow columns, because large spaces can occur between words.


A style of text characterized by upright letters.

Compare with Italic text.


Rich Text Format. A standard Windows text format that many word-processors use to save their files.


To Redo an action that has been undone.

Compare with Undo.


S


The intensity of a color, or how much hue is present or absent. Completely saturated color is color at its most intense (100 percent). At its least intense, a color is Grey (0 percent).


A device used to convert a picture on paper to a bitmap in a computer. Scanners are usually either hand held or flat bed and either color or monochrome; most have a TWAIN Windows driver, which MasterPublisher supports. Scanners usually scan at a resolution of between 300 dpi and 600 dpi.


A box that you can drag to adjust the effect of the control e.g. the tint slider on a color palette.


A color specified as a spot color can have its own separation when it is printed instead of being made up of a mixture of process colors.


A highlighted section of text that can be cut, copied, deleted or styled.


A font without serifs (see Serif).

This Help system is written in a sans serif font.


To increase or decrease the size of an imported bitmap or line-art file within a frame.

See also Aspect ratio.


A short line at the end of strokes in a character. Times New Roman is a commonly-used serif font.

Compare with Sans serif.


To make a frame or graphic positionable only on the current grid divisions or column guides.


A hyphen inserted by the user that overrides any automatic hyphenation by the program.

A soft hyphen placed at the beginning of a word ensures that the word is not hyphenated at all.


A series of characters and/or spaces of any length.


Text, in a reduced point size, that is dropped below the baseline of the surrounding text.


Text, in a reduced point size, that is raised above the baseline of the surrounding text.


A bar that appears at the bottom and/or right edge of a window whose contents are not entirely visible.


The font that is displayed on your screen, which will approximate a printer font so that documents look as similar as possible on screen to their printed counterparts.


The application in which the linked or embedded object was created.


The file that provides information to MasterPublisher through a link.


A word that means the same as another word, for example, transparent and clear.


A way of displaying pages in the MasterPublisher window. Stacked pages are stacked one above the other so that when you scroll down, you also scroll through the pages.


Information about a MasterPublisher document, including the author and any notes about the document. You can use the preferences to choose to be prompted to insert any summary information when you save the document.


T


This is a line embedded in the horizontal ruler bar, which lets you drag tabs to the position you want.


A type of dialog box in which each tab, when selected, shows a different page of the dialog box.


Tool tips appear as a small flag with a brief description (one or two words) of a tool or object on the MasterPublisher desktop when you position the mouse pointer over it. These can be turned on and off from the Options menu.


A standard interface for scanners with a TWAIN Windows driver.


A means of aligning text in columns using Tab.


A thin vertical flashing line that indicates where text editing will take place.


The amount of whiteness applied to a color, where 0% is white and 100% is the full color.


An option that is turned ON or OFF using the same action.


The horizontal bar that contains the title of the window or dialog box.


A number of tools, each representing a menu command, that you can use to create or modify your document.


Text flowing around the edge of a frame.


A way of arranging open windows so that all the windows are visible on the screen.


A selected block of text for editing.


A way of displaying pages in MasterPublisher. When you tile pages, MasterPublisher will determine how many pages to have in each column and row.


U


To undo the last command performed on your document.


V


A space inserted by pressing Space, that may be 'stretched' during justification and at which lines may be broken.

Compare with Hard space.


Whether a frame is solid (hiding what is behind it) or transparent (allowing items behind to show through).


The on-screen magnification of a MasterPublisher document.


W


A technical term for one or more lines of a paragraph left at the top of a column or page.

Compare with Orphan.


The adjustment controlling the minimum and maximum amount of space allowed between words.


What You See Is What You Get: the ability to show on screen an accurate representation of what will be printed.


The on-screen area within which a MasterPublisher document is created.


A link created in a Web document that will take you to another Web document or a marked point in the same Web document.


X


The height of the main body of a lower case letter, not including the ascenders and descenders.


Work with documents


Page basics


Creating a document from a blank page
To create a document from a blank page

1.	From the File menu, select New. The New Document dialog box appears.

2. Click on the Home button. The Name box displays the path C:\ PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER \DOCUMENTS (where C: is the drive you installed MasterPublisher on).

3.	Double-click on the Blank Page icon. A list of the available page sizes appears.

4.	Click on the page size you want for your document.

5.	Click on New. The blank page appears in the MasterPublisher window, ready for you to start work.

Note:

If you are running MasterPublisher for the first time, C:\ PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER \DOCUMENTS is the default path.

The paths you have visited recently are listed in the Name drop-down list box.

You can also change the page size and orientation of a document once the document has been opened.

Tools:

Related Topics


Creating a document based on an existing one
To create a document based on an existing one

1.	From the File menu, select New. The New Document dialog box appears.

2.	In the Name box, type the path for the folder where the document you want to base your new one on is stored. The MasterPublisher documents in this folder appear in the preview area.

If you have visited this folder recently, it will be listed in the Name drop-down list and you can select it from there.

3.	Click on the document you want to base your new document on.

4.	Click on New. The document appears in the MasterPublisher window as an untitled document that you can edit and save with a different filename.

Note:

If you cannot remember the path for the folder you want, drag the divider bar at the left-hand side of the preview area to display the drives and folders on your computer.

Tools:

Related Topics


Opening and editing an existing document
To open and edit an existing document

1.	From the File menu, select Open. The Open Document dialog box appears.

2.	In the Name box, type the path for the folder where the document you want to work on is stored. The MasterPublisher documents in this folder appear in the preview area.

If you have visited this folder recently, it will be listed in the Name drop-down list and you can select it from there.

3.	Click on the document you want to open.

4.	Click on Open. The document appears in the MasterPublisher window.

Note:

If you cannot remember the path for the folder you want, drag the divider bar at the left-hand side of the preview area to display the drives and folders on your computer.

Tools:

Related Topics


Inserting a design snippet into your document
To insert a design snippet into your document

1.	From the File menu, select Insert Design Snippet. The Insert Design Snippet dialog box appears.

2.	In the Name box, type the path of the folder where the design snippet is saved. A list of all the design snippet files appears in the preview area.

If you have visited this folder recently, it will be listed in the Name drop-down list and you can select it from there.

3.	Select the design snippet you want to insert.

4.	Click on Open. The design snippet is inserted into your document.

Note:

If you cannot remember the path for the folder you want, drag the divider bar at the left-hand side of the preview area to display the drives and folders on your computer.

Tools:

Related Topics


Opening a recently used document
To open a recently used document

1.	Select the File menu.

The most recently opened documents are listed at the bottom of the menu.

2.	Click on the document you want to open.

Note:

You can also open a recently used document by clicking on the Home button in the New Document, Open Document or Startup dialog boxes and opening the Recently Opened folder.

Related Topics


Saving your documents


Saving your document
To save your document

1.	From the File menu, select Save As. The Save Document As dialog box appears.

2.	Select the disk drive and folder where you want to save your document.

3.	In the File name box, type the name you want to give the document.

4.	Click on Save. The document is saved to a file of that name and the filename will appear in the title bar.

If you type a filename that already exists, a message box will appear, asking if you want to overwrite the original document. Click on Yes or No as appropriate.

Note:

If you have checked the Prompt for Summary Info check box on the Document tab of the Preferences dialog box, the Summary Information dialog box will appear after you click on Save. Type in the appropriate information, then click on OK.

You can also save a file by selecting Save from the File menu.

Tools:

Related Topics


Autosaving your document
To autosave your document

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Select the Auto Backup tab.

3.	In the Action group box, choose whether you want to be prompted to save your document (Warning Beep), or let the document be saved automatically (Auto-backup). Select Off if you want neither.

4.	In the Interval box, type the number of minutes you want between each automatic backup or warning beep.

5.	Click on OK to close the dialog box.

Related Topics


Saving part of your document as a design snippet
To save part of your document as a design snippet

1.	Select the frame(s) containing the objects you want to save as a design snippet.

2.	From the File menu, select Save Design Snippet. The Save As Design Snippet dialog box appears.

3.	Select the disk drive and folder where you want to save the design snippet.

4.	In the File name box, type the name you want to give the design snippet.

5.	Click on Save. The design snippet is saved to a file of that name and given the file extension .SRP.

If you type a filename that already exists, a message box will appear, asking if you want to overwrite the original file. Click on Yes or No as appropriate.

Related Topics


Creating a backup copy when saving
To create a backup copy when saving

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Select the Document tab.

3.	In the File Options group box, check the Create .BAK Documents check box.

When you next save your document, the previous version is renamed as <FILENAME>.BAK and the latest version, with your most recent changes, is saved as <FILENAME>.DTP (where <FILENAME> is the name of your document).

4. Click on OK to close the dialog box.

Note:

You can open your .BAK files by double-clicking on them in Windows Explorer or by manually changing their file extension to .DTP and opening them from MasterPublisher.

This is separate from the Automatic Backup command.

Related Topics


Compressing files when saving
To compress files when saving

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Select the Document tab.

3.	From the File Options group box, check the Compress .DTP Documents check box.

You can compress your .DTP files when saving to reduce their size by up to fifty percent. If you are short of disk space, or your .DTP files contain large color bitmaps, we recommend that you choose to compress your files.

4. Click on OK to close the dialog box.

Note:

If you are using an automatic disk compression utility, selecting the MasterPublisher compression option will not save any disk space. In this case, for speed of operation, we recommend that you do not select file compression in MasterPublisher.

Related Topics


Keeping an item in the contents box
To keep an item in the contents box

1.	From the contents list, select the item you want to keep.

2.	Click on the Keep Item button. The item in the list is marked with a paper clip to show that it is kept.

3.	You can now delete the item from your page(s) and keep it in the contents box.

Note:

When you add an item to your document, it will be listed in the contents box. If you then delete that item from the page(s), it will also be deleted from the contents box. You can keep an item in the contents box, even after deleting it from your page(s). This can be useful if you want to use that item again later in your document.

If you cannot see the contents list, right-click on the toolbar area and select Contents from the shortcut menu that appears.

Tools:


Working with pages


Setting up the page format
To set up the page format

1.	From the Page menu, select Page Size & Orientation. The Page dialog box appears with the Size & Orientation tab card selected.

2.	From the Style and Size drop-down list box, select the type of pages you want.

3.	From the Style and Size list box, select the page size you want. The choices available here will depend on the style you chose.

4.	From the Page Orientation group box, choose whether you want the page to be portrait or landscape.

5.	If you do not want to resize the frames with your page, clear the Resize Frames check box.

6.	Click on OK.

Note:

If you are only changing the orientation, you can select which pages to apply it to from the Apply To drop-down list box.

Changing the page size will always affect the whole document.

Related Topics


Creating a custom page size
To create a custom page size

1.	From the Page menu, select Page Size & Orientation. The Page dialog box appears with the Size & Orientation tab card selected.

2.	from the Style and Size drop-down list box, select any style other than Label, Business Card or Compliments Slip.

3.	Click on the Add button. The Add Custom Page Size dialog box appears.

4.	In the Name box, type a name for your page size.

5.	In the Width box, type the width of the page.

6.	In the Height box, type the height of the page.

7.	Click on OK to return to the Page dialog box.

8.	Click on OK.

Note:

Use the up and down arrows on the Width and Height boxes to move up or down by small amounts.

Related Topics


Creating a custom label
To create a custom label

1.	From the Page menu, select Page Size & Orientation. The Page dialog box appears with the Size & Orientation tab card selected.

2.	From the Style and Size drop-down list box, select Label.

3.	Click on the Add button. The Add Custom Stationery dialog box appears.

4.	In the Name box, type a name for your page size.

5.	In the Width box, type the width of the page.

6.	In the Height box, type the height of the page.

7.	In the Horizontal Pitch box, type the distance you want between the left-hand edge of the label and the left-hand edge of the label next to it.

8.	In the Vertical Pitch box, type the distance you want between the top edge of the label and the top edge of the label below it.

9.	In the Left Indent box, type the distance you want between the left-hand edge of the label and the left-hand edge of the paper you print on.

10.	In the Top Indent box, type the distance you want between the top of the label and the top of the paper you print on.

11.	In the Number Across box, type the number of labels you want to print across the paper.

12.	In the Number Down box, type the number of labels you want to print down the page.

13.	Click on OK to return to the Page dialog box.

14.	Click on OK.

Note:

Use the up and down arrows on the boxes to move up or down by small amounts.

You can also use the Add Custom Stationery dialog box to create a layout for business cards and compliments slips.

Related Topics


Setting up the column guides
To set up the column guides

1.	From the Page menu, select Margins & Column Guides. The Page dialog box appears with the Margins & Columns tab card selected.

2.	In the Number of Columns box, type the number of columns you want.

3.	In the Columns Gap box, type the width of the space you want between the columns.

4.	From the Apply To drop-down list box, select which pages of the document you want to apply the column guides to.

5.	Click on OK.

Note:

You can use the up and down arrows on the boxes to select the number you want.

Column guides are displayed when Frames & Margins is checked on the View tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Related Topics


Setting up the page margins
To set up the page margins

1.	From the Page menu, select Margins & Column Guides. The Page dialog box appears with the Margins & Columns tab card selected.

2.	In the Margins group box, type the width you want each of the margins to be.

3.	In the Headers and Footers group box, type the space you want the headers and footers to be from the top and bottom of the page.

4.	From the Apply To drop-down list box, select which pages of the document you want to apply the margins to.

5.	If you do not want to resize the frames when you change the margins, clear the Resize Frames check box.

6.	Click on OK.

Note:

The binding margin is the space left at the edge of the page that will be bound, ensuring that none of the items on the page are obscured when the document is bound.

Any margin given to the edge of the page that will be bound is added to the binding margin i.e. if the binding margin is 1 cm and the edge margin is 2 cm, a space of 3 cm is left between the edge of the page and the edge of the column guide.

You can use the up and down arrows on the boxes to select the margin widths.

Related Topics


Adding pages
To add pages

1.	From the Page menu, select Add Pages. The Add Pages dialog box appears.

2.	In the Number of Pages to Add box, type the number of pages you want to add.

3.	From the Add New Pages group box,  choose whether they should be added before or after the current page.

4.	Click on OK. The number of pages you specified are added to your document.

Note:

You can also click on the Add Page button on the page controls to add a page after the current page.

Tools:

Related Topics


Hints and tips when adding pages

If you add pages to the middle of your document, the following pages are renumbered appropriately.

New pages are copies of the master page and contain any features that you have placed on the master page.

If you add an odd number of pages when using separate left and right-hand pages, any following pages will change sides and frames may need to be realigned as a result.

You cannot add pages via the Add Pages dialog box when the master page is displayed.

Related Topics


Deleting pages
To delete pages

1.	From the Page menu, select Delete Pages. The Delete Pages dialog box appears.

2.	Type the number of the first page you want to delete and the number of pages to be deleted. To delete the current page only, leave the values unchanged.

3.	Click on OK to delete the pages you have specified.

Note:

You cannot delete pages when the master page is displayed.

If you delete an odd number of pages when using different left and right-hand pages, any following pages will change sides and frames may need to be realigned as a result.

If you delete a page that contains part of a piece of text, the text will be flowed onto the next page.

Related Topics


Adding headers and footers
To add headers and footers

1.	From the Page menu, select either Edit Header or Edit Footer. The text cursor appears in the header/footer frame and the Header and Footer Tools appear.

2.	Do any of the following:

Type your text directly into the frame

Click on the Insert a page number button in the Header and Footer Tools

Click on the Insert the total number of pages button in the Header and Footer Tools

Click on the Insert date button in the Header and Footer Tools

Insert a field.

3.	From the Apply To drop-down list box, select which pages of the document you want to apply the changes to.

4.	Click away from the header/footer frame to close the Header and Footer Tools.

Note:

You can clear the contents of a header or footer frame by clicking on the Clear Header/Footer button in the Header and Footer Tools.

If you have made a change to the header or footer that applies to only that page, you can click on the Reset Header/Footer button in the Header and Footer Tools to restore the header or footer to the default for the whole document.

You can also double-click on a header or footer frame to edit that header or footer.

Related Topics


Setting up page numbering
To set up page numbering

1.	From the Page menu, select Page Numbers. The Page dialog box appears with the Page Numbers tab card selected.

2.	Check the Insert Page Number check box. The group box is enabled.

3.	From the Position drop-down list box, select where you want the page numbers to be.

4.	From the Alignment drop-down list box, select how you want the page numbers to be aligned with the page.

5.	In the Style group box, select the format for your page numbers.

6.	In the Start From Page box, type the number of the page that you want to start numbering from.

7.	In the First Number box, type the number that you want to start numbering from.

8.	From the Apply To drop-down list box, select which page(s) you want to apply the page number to.

9.	Click on OK.

Note:

If you type 3 in the Start From Page box and 1 in the First Number box, MasterPublisher will start numbering from the third page of your document and number that Page 1.

You can also apply page numbering via the headers and footers.

Related Topics


Displaying the master pages
To display the master pages

1.	From the Page menu, select Go to Page. The Go to Page dialog box appears.

If you have only one master page for your document, there is one Master button on this dialog box. If you have left & right master pages, there is a Left Master button and a Right Master button.

2.	Click on Master, Left Master or Right Master to display the master page that you want.

Note:

The page indicator changes to display Page M, indicating that the page currently displayed is the master page. If there are two master pages, the page indicator shows whether you have a left (PAGE ML) or right (PAGE MR) master page displayed.

Changes made to the master page will not affect existing pages, but will affect any new pages that you add to the document.

Related Topics


Hints and tips when using master pages

One of the keys to a well-designed document is consistency of page layout. MasterPublisher makes this consistency easy by letting you put items that will be repeated on every page onto the master page. These items could be frames to flow text through, or features such as pictures or PowerText.

The master page acts as the foundation for any new pages that you add to your document; existing pages are unaffected by any changes that you make to the master page.

You cannot place named text on the master page, but you can type text directly into a frame, or set up frames to automatically flow text into your document.

To use left and right master pages

If you intend to print your document on both sides of the paper, you should use left and right master pages. The binding margin is then on the left for each right-hand page, and on the right for each left-hand page.

Use left and right master pages when page numbers have to appear consecutively on the left-hand side, then the right-hand side of the page.

Note:

The right-hand page is normally an odd numbered page and the left-hand page normally even numbered.

Related Topics


Adding a bookmark to your document
To add a bookmark to your document

1.	Select the text, frame or page you want to mark as a bookmark.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Bookmarks. The Bookmarks dialog box appears.

3.	From the Bookmark group box, select whether you want the bookmark to be the selected text, frame or page.

4.	In the Name text box, type a name for the bookmark.

5.	Click on the Add button. The bookmark is added to the list of bookmarks in the document and the dialog box closes.

Tools:

Related Topics


Moving to a bookmark in your document
To move to a bookmark in your document

1.	From the Edit menu, select Bookmarks. The Bookmarks dialog box appears.

2.	From the Name list box, select the bookmark you want to move to.

3.	Click on the Go to button. The document changes to make the bookmark the focus and the dialog box closes.

Related Topics


Removing a bookmark from your document
To remove a bookmark from your document

1.	From the Edit menu, select Bookmarks. The Bookmarks dialog box appears.

2.	From the Name list box, select the bookmark you want to remove.

3.	Click on the Delete button. The bookmark is removed from the document, but the text, frame or page that was marked as the bookmark remains.

4.	Click on Close to close the dialog box.

Tools:

Related Topics


Viewing your document


Moving between pages
To move between pages

1.	From the Page menu, select Go to Page. The Go To Page dialog box appears.

2.	In the Page Number box, type the page number you want to go to.

3.	Click on OK. The page number you specified appears in the work area.

Note:

To go to the master page, click on the Master button. If you have different left and right master pages, you will have the choice of a Left Master and Right Master button.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the view size
To change the view size

Do any of the following:

From the View menu, select Actual Size, Fit Page, Fit Window or Fit Selection.

Click on the view size indicator and select the size you want from the shortcut menu that appears.

Click on the + or - buttons in the view size controls to enlarge or reduce the view size to the next available percentage.

Note:

On most monitors Actual Size is WYSIWYG but, because the screen and printer have different resolutions, the printed document may look slightly different.

Tools:

Related Topics


Viewing more than one page at a time
To view more than one page at a time

From the View menu, select one of the following:

Single Page - to view only one page at a time.

Facing Pages - to view left and right facing pages.

Stack Pages - to position the pages one on top of the other so that you can scroll through them all.

Tile Pages - to tile the pages, MasterPublisher will decide how many pages to have per row and column.

Related Topics


Hiding and displaying the rulers
To hide and display the rulers

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Select the Controls tab.

3.	In the Show Controls group box, select Rulers. The rulers are displayed when this check box is checked.

4.	Click on OK.

Related Topics


Changing the unit of measurement
To change the unit of measurement

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Select the Document tab.

3.	From the Units drop-down list box, select the units you want.

4.	Click on OK.

Note:

The currently selected unit is indicated by two letters where the rulers intersect.

The unit of measurement that you use in a document is saved in the .DTP file. Therefore, if you open a document the unit setting may change from that of the previous document.

Shortcut:

Click on the unit indicator where the rulers intersect, then select a unit from the shortcut menu that appears.

Related Topics


Viewing the status of your document
To view the status of your document

1.	From the File menu, select Summary Information. The Summary Information dialog box appears.

2.	Click on Statistics to display the Document Statistics dialog box.

This dialog box contains information about your document, such as:

Its length

The language dictionary used

The number of pages

The number of words.


Web pages and stuff


Creating links to other Web pages
To create links to other Web pages

1.	Do one of the following:

Select the text you want to use as the link.

Position the text insertion point at the position you want to insert the link.

Select the frame you want to use as the link.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Add Web Link. The Add Web Link dialog box appears.

3.	If you chose to place the text insertion point at the position where you want to insert the link, type the text you want to use as a link in the Text to link from box.

4.	In the Link To group box, select URL.

5.	In the URL text box, type the path of the file you want to link to.

6.	Click on OK.

Note:

You cannot select text that includes a paragraph break (created by pressing Enter) to use as a link.

You can also edit or change a link using the Edit Web Link dialog box.

Tools:

Related Topics


Creating links to a point within your document
To create links to a point within your document

1.	Do one of the following:

Select the text you want to use as the link.

Position the text insertion point at the position you want to insert the link.

Select the frame you want to use as the link.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Add Web Link. The Add Web Link dialog box appears.

3.	If you chose to place the text insertion point at the position where you want to insert the link, type the text you want to use as a link in the Text to link from box.

4.	In the Link To group box, select Bookmark.

5.	from the Bookmark drop-down list box, select the bookmark you want to link to.

6.	Click on OK.

Note:

You cannot select text that includes a paragraph break (created by pressing Enter) to use as a link.

You can also edit or change a link using the Edit Web Link dialog box.

Tools:

Related Topics


Removing a link from your document
To remove a link

1.	Select the link you want to remove.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Edit Web Links. The Edit Web Link dialog box appears.

3.	Click on Unlink.

Note:

You can also edit or change a link using the Edit Web Link dialog box.

Tools:

Related Topics


Exporting your document as a web page
To export your document as a Web page

To convert your MasterPublisher document to a Web page, create your document and follow the steps below.

1.	From the File menu, select Export Web Document. The Printing message box appears, showing the progress of the print operation. The Net-It Now dialog box then appears.

2.	Click on the Browse button to select a location for the Internet files you will create.

Each document that you turn into Web pages should have a separate folder.

3.	Click on the Select button to display the Navigation Style dialog box and specify the type of buttons you want to appear for your users to navigate through your document on the Internet.

4.	Choose one of the options listed and click on OK to return to the Net-It Now dialog box.

5.	Check the View in Web Browser after the build check box to open your Web page in your Internet browser once the page has been built.

6.	Click on Build. Your MasterPublisher document is converted to a Web page.

Note:

If you checked the View in Web Browser after the build check box, once your Web page has been created your Internet browser opens and previews your new Web page from the folder you saved it to.

Tools:

Related Topics


Hints and tips on creating Web pages

To convert your documents to Web pages you must have Net-It Now installed on your hard drive. If you do not have it, run the MasterPublisher installation again and select this option to install.

You may find that some of the fonts you have used in your document cannot be used in your Web page. If this is the case, a message will appear during the build telling you what font the original font has been replaced with.

If you have used graduated fill styles in your Web document, you may find that they do not display properly on a machine running in 256 color mode. To avoid any display problems for your Web document readers, we advise that you do not use graduated fill styles.

Graphics with white set to be transparent will not display correctly in MasterPublisher documents converted to Web documents.

Now that your Web page has been created in the specified folder you need to copy all of the files in that folder (using File Transfer Protocol) to the Web space provided by your Internet provider.

Each document that you put on the Internet must have its own folder.

You can create links to your document from other Web pages using standard http addressing e.g. http://www.mysite.com/document1, where ‘mysite’ is the name of your Web address and ‘document1’ is the name of the folder you copied your files to (using FTP).

Net-It Now is only available to use with Windows 95 and you must have a Java-enabled Internet browser capable of reading Java files e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.

For more information about Net-It Now, click on the Help button in the Net-It Now dialog box to view the Net-It Now Help.

Related Topics


Sending mail


Sending your document to an electronic mail program
To send your document to an electronic mail program

From the File menu, select Send Mail. A copy of your document is saved as a temporary file and your MAPI compatible electronic mail program (e.g. Microsoft Exchange) is started.

When your electronic mail program appears on the desktop, a new message is created and the temporary file is attached to it, leaving you to type the address and message text.


Work with frames


Frame basics


Drawing a frame
To draw a frame

1.	From the Toolbox, select the frame shape tool you want.

2.	Position your mouse pointer on the page where you want to start drawing your frame. Press and hold down the left mouse button.

3.	Drag the pointer diagonally. As you drag an outline of the frame is drawn, showing you the size of the frame.

4.	When the frame is the size you want, release the mouse button. The frame is drawn on the page.

Note:

Hold down Ctrl as you draw the frame to keep the height and width of the frame the same.

Hold down Shift after you start to draw the frame to draw the frame from its center.

The shape tool that you chose will remain selected until you select another shape or line tool.

Related Topics


Hints and tips when drawing frames

Frames are not printed out unless you give them a border or background color.

You can place frames anywhere on the page or pasteboard and move, copy, delete or resize them to manipulate the contents of your document.

Frames can be easily sized or moved after drawing, so accuracy is not important.

You can draw frames anywhere on the page or on the pasteboard, even within or overlapping existing frames. To draw a frame inside another frame, make sure the frame underneath is not selected.

Related Topics


Selecting a frame
To select a frame

1.	Position the mouse pointer over the frame you want to select.

2.	Click the left mouse button. Eight handles appear around the frame, showing that it is selected.

Note:

Deselect the frame by clicking anywhere outside the selected frame.

Use Tab to select the frames on the page one-by-one, moving forward through their stacking order. Use Shift+Tab to select them one-by-one, moving backwards through their stacking order.

Related Topics


Selecting more than one frame
To select more than one frame

Do one of the following:

Hold down Ctrl as you click on each frame you want to select.

Hold down Shift and the left mouse button and then drag the mouse pointer over the frames you want to select. All the frames within the area you mark will be selected.

Note:

Deselect individual frames by holding down Ctrl and clicking on the frames you want to deselect.

Deselect all the selected frames by clicking away from them.

Related Topics


Selecting all the frames on the page
To select all the frames on the page

1.	From the View menu, select Fit Page so that you can see the whole page in the work area.

2.	Do one of the following:

From the Edit menu, select Select All Frames.

Right-click on the page or pasteboard and select Select All Frames from the shortcut menu that appears.

All the frames on the page are selected.

Note:

Deselect individual frames by holding down Ctrl and clicking on the frames you want to deselect.

Deselect all the selected frames by clicking away from them.

If you are at a different view size, all the frames on the pasteboard or pages that are visible (or partly visible) are selected.

Related Topics


Resizing a frame
To resize a frame

1.	Select the frame you want to resize. Eight handles appear around the edge of the frame.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over a handle so that it changes shape to a double-headed arrow.

3.	Press and hold down the mouse button as you drag the handle to a different position.

4.	When the frame is the size you want, release the mouse button. The frame is redrawn and remains selected.

Note:

Drag a corner handle to resize the frame both vertically and horizontally.

Drag a side handle to resize only the height or width.

Hold down Ctrl as you resize the frame to maintain its aspect ratio.

Hold down Shift as you resize the frame to resize it from its center.

You can make more accurate changes to the size of the frame in the Size and Position tab of the Frame Properties dialog box.

Tools:

Related Topics


Hints and tips when resizing frames

You can size a group of frames by dragging the handles on the surrounding box. All the frames in the group are resized accordingly.

If a frame is partly hidden it can still be sized. Selecting a frame causes the handles to become visible through any frames or pages on top of it, so you can use these handles to size the frame in the usual way.

Use Snap to Guides & Grid to help you size the frames accurately.

Tools:

Related Topics


Moving a frame
To move a frame

1.	Select the frame you want to move.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the frame so that it changes shape to a four-headed arrow.

3.	Press and hold down the mouse button.

4.	Drag the frame to its new position. As you drag the frame the outline of the frame follows your movements, making it easier to reposition.

5.	When the frame is in the position you want, release the mouse button. The frame and its contents are redrawn.

Note:

You can also move a group of frames in the same way.

You can make more accurate changes to the position of a frame(s) by using the Size and Position tab on the Frame Properties dialog box or the nudge control.

Use Snap to Guides & Grid to help you move the frame(s) accurately.

Hold down Ctrl as you drag the frame to make a copy of the frame and its contents.

If the frame is full of text, move the pointer to the edge of the frame so that it changes shape to a four-headed arrow.

Tools:

Related Topics


Rotating a frame
To rotate a frame

1.	Select the frame you want to rotate. Eight handles appear around the frame.

The top right-hand handle is a different shape to the other seven handles. This is the rotate handle.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the rotate handle so that it changes shape to a circular arrow.

3.	Press and hold down the mouse button as you drag the handle. An outline of the frame appears as a guide to show you how much you have rotated the frame.

4.	When the frame is at the angle you want, release the mouse button. The frame and its contents are redrawn at the angle you created.

Note:

Hold down Ctrl as you rotate the frame to constrain the angle of rotation to multiples of 45 degrees.

Hold down Shift as you rotate the frame to constrain the angle of rotation to multiples of 5 degrees.

You can make exact changes to the angle of a frame via the Size and Position tab on the Frame Properties dialog box.

Shortcut:

Hold down Ctrl and press the left or right arrow key to rotate the selected frame 5 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise.

Hold down Ctrl and press the up or down arrow key to rotate the selected frame 45 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise.

Tools:

Related Topics


Locking frames in position
To lock frames in position

1.	Select the frame(s) you want to lock in position.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Lock Frame. The frame is locked so that you cannot delete it or change its size, position or angle without unlocking it first.

Note:

You can also lock a frame in position via the Size and Position tab on the Frame Properties dialog box or right-clicking on the frame and selecting Lock Frame from the shortcut menu that appears.

Tools:

Related Topics


Grouping frames
To group frames

1.	Hold down Ctrl and click on each of the frames you want in your group.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Group. The frames are grouped together and act as one object.

To ungroup a group of frames:

1.	Select the group of frames you want to ungroup.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Ungroup. The frames are ungrouped from each other and reverted to individual frames.

Note:

You can click on individual frames within a group to select them and edit them, e.g. to change the color.

You can ungroup a single frame to make the frame an editable shape.

Tools:

Related Topics


Aligning frames
To align frames

1.	Hold down Ctrl and click on the frames you want to align to each other.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Align. The Align Frames dialog box appears.

3.	From the Horizontal and Vertical group boxes, select how you want to align the frames. The preview illustrates the effect of your choices.

4.	Click on OK.

Tools:

Related Topics


Snapping frames to the column guides/grid
To snap frames to the column guides/grid

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears, with the Document tab selected.

2.	In the Grid group box, check the Snap to Guides & Grid check box.

3.	In the Grid Size text box, type the size that you want the grid divisions to be.

4.	Click on OK.

Note:

When Snap to Guides & Grid is turned on, any frames you draw or move will be forced to position themselves with the closest grid division or column guide.

You can also right-click on the page or pasteboard and select Snap to Guides and Grid from the shortcut menu that appears.

Tools:

Related Topics


Overlapping frames
To overlap frames

1.	Select the frame whose stacking order you want to change.

2.	Do one of the following:

From the Frame menu, select Bring to Front. This moves the frame to the front of all the frames on the page.

From the Frame menu, select Send to Back. This sends the frame behind all the frames on the page.

From the Frame menu, select Nudge to Front. This moves the frame forward in front of the frame that was previously in front of it.

From the Frame menu, select Nudge to Back. This moves the frame backwards behind the frame that was previously behind it.

Note:

Frames are stacked in the order in which they were created until you change their stacking order.

When you move a frame behind another it may be completely obscured and you may have difficulty selecting it again. You can press Tab to select the frames one-by-one in their stacking order until the frame you want is selected. Press Shift+Tab to move backwards through the stacking order.

Tools:

Related Topics


Editing frames


Specifying frame attributes
To specify frame attributes

1.	Select the frame(s) whose attributes you want to specify.

2.	In the Frame Tools, click on the Edit Frame Properties button. The Frame Properties dialog box appears.

3.	Make the changes to the frame attributes using the appropriate tabs.

4.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the attributes you have chosen.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected frame(s) on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame you are making changes to, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

You can also display the Frame Properties dialog box by right-clicking on a frame and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu that appears.

Tools:

Related Topics


Applying a frame border
To apply a frame border

1.	Select the frame you want to apply the border style to.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Border. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Border Styles tab selected.

3.	From the Style drop-down list box, select whether you want no border, a basic line style, a traditional style border or a decorative border from the categories available.

4.	From the list of border styles, select the style you want.

If you have chosen a basic line style, you can choose arrow heads to apply to that style from the Arrow Heads list boxes.

If you have chosen a decorative or traditional border style, you can choose which sides of the frame you want to apply the border to.

5.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the border style you have chosen for the frame.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected frame on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame you are applying the border to, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

You can apply a traditional or decorative border to rectangular frames only.

You can also use the Frame Border Tools to apply a border to the selected frame(s).

Tools:

Related Topics


Editing a frame border
To edit a frame border

1.	Select the frame whose border you want to edit.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Border. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Border Styles tab selected.

To change the width of the border style:

1.	Check the Custom Width check box.

2.	From the units drop-down list box, select the unit of measurement you want.

3.	In the width box, type the width you want for the border.

To change the color of the border:

1.	Check the Color check box.

2.	From the drop-down color palette, select the color you want the border to be. The border styles in the list will change accordingly.

3.	Change the tint of the color by dragging the tint slider to the percentage you want.

4.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made to the border.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected frame on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame you are applying the border to, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

You can change the border color by right-clicking on the color in the color bar and selecting Frame Border form the shortcut menu that appears.

Tools:

Related Topics


Defining the shape of a frame
To define the shape of a frame

1.	Select the frame you want to change the shape of.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Shape. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Shape tab selected.

3.	From the Style group box, click on the button for the shape you want.

If you chose the polygon, starburst or star, specify the number of points you want in the Number of Points box.

If you chose the polygon, starburst or star, you can check the Rotate check box to rotate the frame so that its base is changed to the next point or side.

If you chose a starburst or star, you can specify the shape of the star using the Inner Radius and Inner Points sliders.

If you chose the line, specify whether you want a closed or open path by checking the Closed Path check box. The path is closed when the box is checked.

4.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made to the frame shape.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected frame on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame you are changing the shape of, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

Tools:

Related Topics


Manually editing the shape of a frame
To manually edit the shape of a frame

Frames are formed from closed paths and can be converted back into these paths so that you can edit the shape.

1.	Select the frame whose shape you want to edit.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Ungroup. The frame is ungrouped and converted to points and paths.

3.	Move the mouse pointer over a point so that it changes shape to a pointer with a four-headed arrow at its base.

4.	Press and hold down the mouse button as you drag the point to a new position.

5.	Add a point to a path by right-clicking on the point you want to add the point next to and selecting Add Point from the shortcut menu that appears.

6.	Delete a point from a path by Ctrl-clicking on the point you want to delete or right-clicking on the point and selecting Delete Point from the shortcut menu that appears.

7.	Change the type of point by right-clicking on the point and selecting the point type from the shortcut menu that appears.

8.	Split the path by right-clicking on a point and selecting Open Path from the shortcut menu that appears.

9.	When the frame is the shape you want, select Group from the Frame menu.

Note:

If you have split the path to make it an open path, you cannot put anything into the frame or give it a fill style.

Related Topics


Repelling text around a frame
To repel text around a frame

1.	Select the frame that you want to repel text around.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Shape. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Shape tab selected.

3.	In the Repel group box, select whether you want the frame to repel text or not.

4.	In the Vertical Padding box, type the amount you want to repel text from the top and bottom of the frame.

5.	In the Horizontal Padding box, type the amount you want to repel text from the left and right-hand sides of the frame.

6.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made to the frame.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected frame on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame you are making changes to, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

Tools:

Related Topics


Applying a frame background
To apply a frame background

1.	Select the frame whose background you want to change.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Background. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Background tab selected.

3.	From the Style list box, select the background style you want.

4.	In the Attributes group box, make any changes to the style you want, such as color.

5.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made to the background style.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected frame on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame you are making changes to, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

Tools:

Related Topics


Editing a graduated background style
To edit a graduated background style

1.	Select the frame whose graduated background style you want to edit.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Background. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Background tab selected.

3.	From the Style list box, select the graduated style you want.

4.	In the Attributes group box, select the colors for the style from the two drop-down color palettes.

If you have chosen a linear style you can drag the arrow in the preview window to change the direction of the graduation.

5.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made to the background style.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected frame on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame you are making changes to, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

You can change the ‘from’ color by left-clicking on the color in the color bar.

You can change the ‘to’ color by Shift-clicking on the color in the color bar.

You can also right-click on a color in the color bar to display a shortcut menu and select either Frame Background or Frame Grad Fill from the shortcut menu that appears.

Tools:

Related Topics


Editing a textured background style
To edit a textured background style

1.	Select the frame whose textured background style you want to edit.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Background. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Background tab selected.

3.	From the Style list box, select the texture style you want.

4.	In the Attributes group box, check the Custom Color check box.

5.	From the drop-down color palette, select the color you want the texture to be.

6.	In the Angle box, type the angle you want the texture at or drag the radius of the circle to specify the angle.

7.	Drag the Detail slider to specify the size of the texture tiles.

8.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made to the textured style.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected frame on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame you are making changes to, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

You can change the color of the texture by left-clicking on the color in the color bar.

Tools:

Related Topics


Repeating frames on pages
To repeat frames on pages

1.	Draw or select the frame(s) you want to repeat through your document.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Repeat on Pages. The Repeating Frames dialog box appears.

3.	Select which pages you want to repeat the frame(s) on.

4.	Click on OK. The frame(s) is drawn on the pages you specified and any changes you make to the frame will be applied to each page.

Related Topics


Cutting, copying and pasting frames
To cut, copy and paste frames

To cut or copy a frame:

1.	Select the frame(s) you want to cut or copy.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Cut or Copy as appropriate.

To paste a frame:

From the Edit menu, select Paste. The frame is pasted onto the page.

Note:

The Clipboard can only contain one item at a time, so when you cut or copy a frame onto the Clipboard, any previous item on the Clipboard is lost.

You can right-click on a frame and select Cut or Copy from the shortcut menu that appears.

You can right-click on the page or pasteboard and select Paste from the shortcut menu that appears.

Tools:

Related Topics


Marking a frame as an annotation
To mark a frame as an annotation

1.	Select the frame you want to mark as an annotation.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Size, Position & Angle. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Size and Position tab selected.

3.	Check the Annotation check box. The frame is marked as an annotation.

4.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box.

Note:

When you print your document you have the option of printing annotation frames or not.

Tools:

Related Topics


Deleting frames
To delete frames

Select the frame(s) you want to delete, then do any of the following:

from the Edit menu, select Delete.

press Delete on your keyboard.

right-click on the frame and select Delete from the shortcut menu that appears.

The frame and its contents are deleted from the page.

Related Topics


Clearing frames
To clear frames

Select the frame you want to clear, then do one of the following:

From the Edit menu, select Clear Frame

Right-click on the frame and select Clear Picture or Clear Text from the shortcut menu that appears.

Related Topics


Hiding frames
To hide frames

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Select the View tab.

3.	In the View Markers group box, the Frames & Margins check box is checked when the frames are showing. Clear the check box to hide the frames.

Note:

You can also right-click on the page or pasteboard and select Show Frames and Guides from the shortcut menu that appears. This command is checked when frames are displayed.

Hiding frames is useful when you need to see which frames need borders to make them stand out on the page.

Tools:


Work with paragraph styles


Creating a new paragraph style
To create a new paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	Click on the New button. The Create New Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

3.	In the Paragraph Style Name box, type the name of the new paragraph style.

4.	From the Based on group box, select either a style to base the paragraph style on, to base the style on the currently selected text or to base it on no style at all.

5.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

6.	Click on Edit to go to the Edit Paragraph Style dialog box and specify the attributes of the new paragraph style.

7. When you have specified the paragraph style attributes, click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

8.	Click on Close.

Related Topics


Editing an existing paragraph style
To edit an existing paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to edit.

3.	Click on the Edit button. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Make any changes you want to the paragraph style.

5.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

6.	Click on Close. The changes to the paragraph style are applied to all text in the document styled in that paragraph style.

Tools:

Related Topics


Applying paragraph styles
To apply a paragraph style

1.	Place the text insertion point in the paragraph or select a range of paragraphs you want to apply the paragraph style to.

2.	From the Paragraph Style drop-down list box in the Paragraph Tools, select the paragraph style you want. The paragraph you are working on takes on the characteristics of the new style.

Note:

Any changes you make to individual pieces of text override the paragraph style.

Tools:

Related Topics


Deleting a paragraph style
To delete a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to delete.

3.	Click on the Delete button. The paragraph style is removed from the list and any text styled in that paragraph style is styled in ‘normal’.

4.	Click on Close.

Related Topics


Changing the font, point size and color of a paragraph style
To change the font, point size and color of a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to make changes to.

3.	Click on Edit. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Select the Font tab.

5.	From the Font drop-down list box, select the font you want.

6.	From the Point Size drop-down list box, select the point size you want.

7.	From the Color drop-down list box, select the color you want.

8.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

9.	Click on Close. The changes are applied to all text in the document styled in that paragraph style.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the text effects of a paragraph style
To change the text effects of a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to make changes to.

3.	Click on Edit. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Select the Font tab.

5.	Make your selections from the list of effects available e.g. Bold.

6.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

7.	Click on Close. The changes are applied to all text in the document styled in that paragraph style.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the language dictionary of a paragraph style
To change the language dictionary for a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to make changes to.

3.	Click on Edit. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Select the Font tab.

5.	From the Language drop-down list box, select the language dictionary you want.

6.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

7.	Click on Close. The changes are applied to all text in the document styled in that paragraph style.

Note:

If you do not want to make a paragraph style language specific, select Neutral from the Language drop-down list box. The text will not be spell-checked but will be hyphenated in the language set for the whole document. This language can be changed using the Text Status dialog box.

If you have not purchased a separate language pack, you will be able to select an English language dictionary only.

Tools:


Changing the alignment of a paragraph style
To change the alignment of a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to make changes to.

3.	Click on Edit. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Select the Indents & Layout tab.

5.	Click on the justification button that corresponds to the alignment you want.

6.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

7.	Click on Close. The changes are applied to all text in the document styled in that paragraph style.

Note:

You cannot have monospaced and justified text. If you select both, the last option you selected will be kept, but the previous option will be changed i.e. if you select Monospacing and then Justified text, the text will be justified, but monospacing will be turned off.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the indentation of a paragraph style
To change the indentation of a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to make changes to.

3.	Click on Edit. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Select the Indents & Layout tab. The controls for indentation are in the Indents group box.

5.	In the First Line box, type the space you want between the left edge of the frame and the start of the first line of the paragraph.

6.	In the Left box, type the space you want between the left edge of the frame and the left edge of the rest of the paragraph.

7.	In the Right box, type the space you want between the right edge of the frame and the right edge of the paragraph.

8.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

9.	Click on Close. The changes are applied to all text in the document styled in that paragraph style.

Note:

The First Line setting must be smaller than the Left setting to create a hanging indent.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the paragraph control of a paragraph style
To change the paragraph control of a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to make changes to.

3.	Click on Edit. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Select the Indents & Layout tab.

5.	Select one of the following from the Keep Lines Together group box.

None if you do not mind where the paragraph is split.

Whole Paragraph to prevent a paragraph in that style from being split over a frame or page.

At Start and End if you want to specify the number of lines at the top and bottom of the paragraph that you do not want to be split. Use the Start and End boxes to specify the number of lines.

6.	In the Keep Paragraphs Together group box, select Keep With Previous if you do not want the paragraph to be separated from the previous paragraph. Select Keep With Next if you do not want the paragraph to be separated from the following paragraph.

7.	In the Space Between Paragraphs group box, specify the space you want between each paragraph and the top of the frame.

8.	In the Start Paragraph group box, select On Next Page to force a paragraph in that style to always start at the top of the first frame on the next page. Select In Next Frame to force a paragraph in that style to always start at the top of the next frame in your document.

9.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

10.	Click on Close. The changes are applied to all the text in the document styled in that paragraph style.

Tools:

Related Topics


Hints and tips when changing the paragraph control of a paragraph style

The Whole Paragraph option is ignored if the paragraph is too long to fit into any frame.

If the widow and orphan values overlap for a paragraph of text, that paragraph is prevented from being broken at all. For example, if the paragraph is four lines long, with minimum widow lines set at three and minimum orphan lines set at two, the paragraph will not be broken.

Keep With Previous is not available if the paragraph style is set to have a frame or page break.

Related Topics


Changing the word and letter spacing of a paragraph style
To change the word and letter spacing of a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to make changes to.

3.	Click on Edit. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Select the Spacing tab.

5.	In the Word & Letter Spacing group box, select either Standard, Custom or Monospacing.

6.	Do one of the following:

If you choose Standard, MasterPublisher decides on spacing for you, but you can specify how tight or loose this is to be by moving the slider.

If you choose Custom, you can type in the minimum, optimum and maximum space required between words, and the maximum space allowed between letters.

In a monospaced font, all of the characters, including the space character, have the same width: Courier is an example. When using monospaced fonts, you can ensure that the spaces between letters and words are not stretched for the selected paragraph style by selecting Monospacing.

7.	If you want to allow MasterPublisher to vary the spacing between letters as well as between words check the Allow Letter Spacing check box.

8.	Check the Auto Kern check box to make sure that the letters always kern together properly.

9.	Check the Hyphenation check box to allow hyphenation and set how ragged you want the right-hand side to be using the Raggedness slider.

10.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

11.	Click on Close. The changes are applied to all the text in the document styled in that paragraph style.

Note:

You cannot have monospaced and justified text. If you select both, the last option you selected will be kept, but the previous option will be changed i.e. if you select Monospacing and then Justified text, the text will be justified, but monospacing will be turned off.

Tools:

Related Topics


Hints and tips when changing the word and letter spacing of a paragraph style

The minimum, maximum and letter spacing values are only used in justified text. In ragged text only the optimum spacing can be defined.

You can insert soft hyphens to override the hyphenation rules.

If there are words that you never want to be hyphenated, or that you always want to be hyphenated in a particular way, you can edit the hyphenation exceptions dictionary.

Related Topics


Changing the line spacing of a paragraph style
To change the line spacing of a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to make changes to.

3.	Click on Edit. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Select the Spacing tab.

5.	In the Line Spacing group box, select either Relative or Absolute leading.

6.	If you chose Relative, set the leading relative to the point size of the text or click on one of the line spacing tools. If you chose Absolute, type the leading (in points) you want in the Absolute box.

7.	To make sure that, when text is set in columns, lines of text in the columns align across the page, check the Align Baselines check box.

8.	To make the line spacing the same from baseline to baseline, regardless of the size of text, check the Allow line overlap check box.

9.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

10.	Click on Close. The changes are applied to all text in the document styled in that paragraph style.

Tools:

Related Topics


Hints and tips when changing the line spacing of a paragraph style

If in doubt, make the leading 20% greater than the point size by specifying a relative leading of 120%.

Relative leading is automatically recalculated if you change point size.

If part of the paragraph is styled in a larger point size, the text around it is moved downwards to align with its baseline and therefore the space above it increases.

If you check the Allow line overlap check box, the distance between the baselines of lines of text will stay the same, no matter how large the text is. This means that if your text is 12 points high, but one line has some text at 20 points high, the large text will overlap the line above it.

Related Topics


Changing the bullet style of a paragraph style
To change the bullet style of a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to make changes to.

3.	Click on Edit. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Select the Bullets & Numbering tab.

5.	From the Style list box, select Bullet.

6.	From the Font drop-down list box, select a font for the bullet.

7.	Check the Show Symbol Fonts Only check box if you want to only display symbol fonts in the Fonts drop-down list box.

8.	From the Bullet Character list box, select the bullet you want.

9.	If you want to change the color of the bullet, check the Custom Color check box and select a color for the bullet from the drop-down color palette.

10.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

11.	Click on Close. The changes are applied to all text in the document styled in that paragraph style.

Note:

A bullet always appears as the first character on the first line of a paragraph. Use the Indents & Layout tab to create a hanging indent so that there is a space between the bullet and the text.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the number style of a paragraph style
To change the number style of a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to make changes to.

3.	Click on Edit. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Select the Bullets & Numbering tab.

5.	From the Style list box, select either List Numbering or Heading Numbering.

6.	Select the style of numbering you want to use.

7.	Type any text you want to appear before or after the number in the Text Before and Text After boxes.

8.	If you have chosen Heading Numbering, type the heading level you want the paragraph style to be in the Heading Level box.

9.	If you have chosen Heading Numbering, check the Include Previous Levels check box if you want the numbering to include any previous heading levels.

10.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

11.	Click on Close. The changes are applied to all text in the document styled in that paragraph style.

Note:

A number appears as the first character on the first line of a paragraph. Use the Indents & Layout tab to create a hanging indent so that there is a space between the number and the text.

Tools:

Related Topics


List numbering and heading numbering

List numbering

List numbering is the standard numbering format where each new paragraph (the next line after Enter is pressed) is numbered in sequence.

1.	One.

2.	Two.

3.	Three.

You can choose to number your text in this way by selecting list numbering and the style of numbers you want. Having MasterPublisher number the text for you will make typing numbered lists much easier.

Heading numbering

Heading numbering is slightly different to list numbering because you can stagger the level of the numbered points. Lower level headings are indented slightly from the higher level headings and you can also choose to include the higher level heading numbers in the lower level heading numbers.

Standard heading numbering:

1.	Level One.

1.	Level Two.

2.	Level Two, point two.

1.	Level Three.

Heading numbering, including previous levels:

1.	Level One.

1.1.	Level Two, including Level One.

1.2.	Level Two, point two, including Level One.

1.1.1.	Level Three, including Level One and Level Two.

{button, Klink(numbering)}	Related Topics


Changing the default tab spacing of a paragraph style
To change the default tab spacing of a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to make changes to.

3.	Click on Edit. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Select the Spacing tab.

5.	In the Tab Spacing group box, type the space you want each tab to be in the Default text box.

6.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

7.	Click on Close. The changes are applied to all text in the document styled in that paragraph style.

Note:

This will only change the default space between tab positions. To set specific tab positions, use the tab bar.

Tools:

Related Topics


Adding drop caps to a paragraph style
To add drop caps to a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to make changes to.

3.	Click on Edit. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Select the Drop Caps tab.

5.	Click on the style of drop caps that you want.

6.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

7.	Click on Close. The changes are applied to all text in the document styled in that paragraph style.

Tools:

Related Topics


Assigning a shortcut to a paragraph style
To assign shortcuts to a paragraph style

1.	From the Text menu, select Paragraph Styles. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.

2.	From the Select Style list box, select the paragraph style you want to make changes to.

3.	Click on Edit. The Edit Paragraph Style dialog box appears.

4.	Select the General tab.

5.	From the Shortcut Key drop-down list box, select the shortcut key you want to use for the paragraph style.

6.	Click on OK to return to the Paragraph Styles dialog box.

7.	Click on Close. The shortcut is applied to the paragraph style.

Tools:

{button , Klink("paragraph styles, attributes")	Related Topics


Work with text


Text basics


Using the text cursor
To use the text cursor

1.	Select the frame you want to type text in.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the frame so that it changes shape to an I-beam.

If the frame is empty, this will be the top left-hand corner.

If the frame already contains text, this will be when the mouse pointer is over the text.

3.	Click the left mouse button. The text insertion point is placed where you clicked.

You can move the text insertion point using the mouse, arrow keys or keyboard shortcuts.

Using the arrow keys:

To move the text insertion point up or down a line, use the up and down arrow keys.

To move the text insertion point by one character, use the left and right arrow keys.

Keyboard shortcuts:

Home moves to the start of the line containing the text insertion point.

End moves to the end of the line containing the text insertion point.

Ctrl Home moves to the beginning of the frame containing the text insertion point.

Ctrl End moves to the end of the frame containing the text insertion point.

Shift Ctrl Home moves to the start of the story containing the text insertion point.

Shift Ctrl End moves to the end of the story containing the text insertion point.

Related Topics


Typing in text
To type in text

1.	Select the frame that you want to type text into.

2.	Type your text. The text appears in the selected frame.

Note:

If there is already text in the frame you want to type text into, position the text insertion point where you want to begin typing text or text will be added to the end of the text in the frame.

If you have a completely blank page and start typing, MasterPublisher will automatically create a frame for you and place the text into it. The frame will fit to the margins on the page.

Related Topics


Importing text
To import text

1.	Select the frame you want to import text into.

2.	From the File menu, select Import Text. The Import Text dialog box appears.

3.	From the Files of type drop-down list box, select the format of the file you want to import.

4.	Select the disk drive and folder where the file was saved. A list of the files with the selected format in the folder you have selected is displayed in the Folders list box.

5.	Select the file that you want to import.

6.	Check the Autoflow Text check box if you want the text to automatically flow into frames in the document. If all the frames in the document are filled and there is still more text to place, MasterPublisher will create the frames for you.

7.	Click on Open.

Note:

If you do not have a frame selected when you import text, MasterPublisher will create one for you.

You can also import text by right-clicking on a frame and selecting Import Text from the shortcut menu that appears.

If you select All text types from the Files of type drop-down list box and MasterPublisher cannot interpret the file format, a dialog box will appear asking you to select the file format.

Tools:

Related Topics


Import text formats

The text file formats that you can import into MasterPublisher include:

“Word for Word”   1996 INSO Corporation. All rights reserved.

Related Topics


Exporting text
To export text

1.	Select the text you want to export or position the text insertion point in the piece of text you want to export.

2.	From the File menu, select Export Text. The Export Text dialog box appears.

3.	In the File name text box, type the name you want to give the text.

4.	From the Save in drop-down list box, select the disk drive and folder where you want to save the text file.

5.	From the Save as type drop-down list box, select a format for your text file.

6.	Click on Save.

Note:

If you type a filename that already exists, a message will appear asking if you want to overwrite the existing file. Click on Yes or No as appropriate.

Related Topics


Pasting text from another program
To paste text from another program

1.	Open the program that contains the text you want to paste. Cut or copy the text to the Clipboard.

2.	Exit the program and switch to MasterPublisher.

3.	Position the text insertion point where you want to paste the text or select the frame that you want to paste the text into.

4.	From the Edit menu, select Paste. The text is pasted at the text insertion point.

Note:

You can also paste text by right-clicking on the page, pasteboard, a frame or text and selecting Paste from the shortcut menu that appears.

If you have not selected a frame when you select Paste, MasterPublisher will create a frame for you.

Tools:

Related Topics


Dragging and dropping text into your document
To drag-and-drop text into your document

1.	Open the program containing the text you want to drag-and-drop into your document.

2.	Make sure that both MasterPublisher and the other program are visible on your screen.

3.	Select the text you want to drag-and-drop into your document.

4.	Press and hold down the mouse button as you drag the text over the MasterPublisher window.

5.	When the pointer has a + symbol below it, release the mouse button. The text is placed in your document.

Note:

You can also paste text by right-clicking on the page, pasteboard, a frame or text and selecting Paste from the shortcut menu that appears.

If you have not selected a frame when you select Paste, MasterPublisher will create a frame for you.

Related Topics


Selecting text
To select text

Do one of the following:

Drag the text cursor from one end of the block of text you want to select to the other.

Position the text insertion point at one end of the block of text you want to select, then press Shift and the arrow keys to select the text you want.

Double-click on a word to select it.

Press Shift Home to select a block of text from the text insertion point to the beginning of the current line.

Press Shift End to select a block of text from the text insertion point to the end of the current line.

Right-click on the text and select Select All Text from the shortcut menu that appears.

The selected text is highlighted.

Note:

To deselect a block of text, click anywhere in the work area.

Related Topics


Rotating text
To rotate text

1.	Select the frame containing the text you want to rotate.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Text Attributes. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Frame Text tab selected.

3.	In the Angle of Text group box, type the angle you want the text to be in the degrees spin box. The text is rotated and appears at the angle you specified within the frame.

Note:

You can also drag the radius of the degrees circle to specify the angle.

Use the up and down arrows on the degrees spin box to move the angle up and down by one degree.

If you rotate a frame containing text, the text will be rotated with the frame.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the text you are rotating, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

Tools:

Related Topics


Flowing text through frames
To flow text through frames

1.	Select the frame containing the text you want to flow into another frame.

2.	Click on the link tool at the bottom right-hand corner of the frame.

3.	Click on or draw the frame that you want to flow the text into. The text flows from the first frame into the second.

Note:

You can also flow text through frames by clicking on the frame you want to flow the text into and selecting the text name in the contents box.

To remove a frame from a flow text sequence, click on that frame’s link tool then click away from the frame. The frame is removed from the sequence and the frames on either side of it are linked together.

Related Topics


Hints and tips when flowing text through frames

Each frame has a link tool at its bottom right-hand corner. This link tool can be in one of two states.

If there is a T and a link chain, this means that the text in the frame either does not overflow the frame or it flows into another frame.

If there is a T and an arrow, this means that the text overflows the frame, but does not flow into another frame.

To insert a frame into a flow sequence, click on the link tool of the frame you want before the one you are about to insert into the sequence. Then click on the frame you want to insert. The text flows from the original frame, into the inserted frame and then into the frame the original frame was first linked to.

If you right-click on the link tool, a shortcut menu appears offering you the opportunity to either link or unlink the frame.

You can move through the frames in the flow sequence by clicking on the left and right arrows in the link tool.

Hold down Ctrl as you click on the left and right arrows of the link tool to move to the first or last frame in the flow sequence.

Related Topics


Autoflowing text through frames
To autoflow text through frames

1.	Select the last frame in the sequence of frames containing the text you want to autoflow.

2.	From the Text menu, select Autoflow Text. The text is flowed onto new pages and the frames and pages needed to hold the text will be created.

Note:

You can right-click on the link tool on the last frame and select Autoflow Text from the shortcut menu that appears.

If the frame containing the text fills the page, position the text cursor in the bottom line of text and use the arrow keys to move down past the bottom of the frame. The text is automatically autoflowed.


Hints and tips when flowing text through frames automatically

The frames are copied from the master page. If the master page does not contain any frames, the new frames are copied from the page in your document where you selected the Autoflow Text command. Only the frames containing the text on the original page will have the text flowed through them on the new pages.

When you select the Autoflow Text command on any page other than the last page of the document, the new pages are inserted into your document and all of the following pages are renumbered appropriately.

Related Topics


Renaming text
To rename text

1.	In the contents box, select the text you want to rename.

2.	Click on the Item Information tool. The Text Status dialog box appears.

3.	In the Name text box, type the new name for your text.

4.	Click on OK to confirm the new name.

Tools:

Related Topics


Removing named text
To remove named text

1.	In the contents box, select the text you want to remove.

2.	Click on the Delete Item tool. The text is removed from the document.

Note:

You can also remove text from your document by deleting any frame(s) containing the text.

Tools:

Related Topics


Deleting text
To delete text

To delete a block of text

Select the block of text you want to delete, then do one of the following:

From the Edit menu, select Delete.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard.

The block of text is removed from the page.

To delete a single character

Place the text insertion point next to the character you want to delete, then do one of the following:

To delete the character to the left of the text insertion point, press Backspace on your keyboard.

To delete the character to the right of the text insertion point, press Delete on your keyboard.

Related Topics


Cutting, copying and pasting text
To cut, copy and paste text

1.	Select the text you want to cut or copy.

2.	From the Edit menu, select either Cut or Copy. If you cut the text it is removed from the document.

3.	Place the text insertion point where you want to paste the text you have just cut or copied.

4.	From the Edit menu, select Paste. The text is pasted into the document at the text insertion point.

Note:

The Clipboard can only contain one item at a time, so when you cut or copy text onto the Clipboard, any previous item on the Clipboard is lost.

You can paste in as many copies of the text in as many documents as you like.

Tools:

Related Topics


Inserting symbols and special characters
To insert symbols and special characters

1.	Position the text cursor where you want to insert the character.

2.	From the Text menu, select Insert. The Insert submenu appears.

3.	From the Insert submenu, select Character, the Insert Character dialog box appears.

4.	Select one of the listed symbols or characters.

5.	Click on OK. The character is inserted at the text insertion point.

Note:

You can also insert characters from KeyPad into your MasterPublisher documents. For information about using KeyPad, refer to its online Help.

Related Topics


Inserting fields
To insert fields

1.	Position the text insertion point where you want to insert the field.

2.	From the Text menu, select Insert, the Insert submenu appears.

3.	From the Insert submenu, select Field. The Insert Field dialog box appears.

4.	From the Field to Insert list box, select the field you want to insert.

5.	Click on OK. The field is inserted into your document and will be updated automatically when the document changes.

Related Topics


Inserting a page break
To insert a page break

1.	Position the text insertion point where you want to insert the page break.

2.	From the Text menu, select Insert. The Insert submenu appears.

3.	From the Insert submenu, select Page Break. A page break is inserted into your document and any text after this point will appear in a linked frame on the following page.

Related Topics


Inserting a frame break
To insert a frame break

1.	Position the text insertion point where you want to insert the frame break.

2.	From the Text menu, select Insert. The Insert submenu appears.

3.	From the Insert submenu, select Frame Break. A frame break is inserted into your document and any text after this point will appear in the next linked frame.

Related Topics


Editing text


Searching for text
To search for text

1.	Position the text insertion point in the text.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Find. The Find dialog box appears.

3.	In the Find What text box, type the word(s) you want to search for.

Check the Match Case check box to make sure that words exactly matching the search word(s) will be found. If this option is not selected, words with the correct characters in any case will be found.

Check the Match Whole Word Only check box to make sure that words that are whole words and not part of longer words are found.

4.	Click on Find Next to start the search.

5.	When you have finished searching the text, click on Close to close the dialog box.

MasterPublisher starts searching from the text insertion point onwards. If found, the word is highlighted.

Related Topics


Searching for and replacing text
To search for and replace text

1.	Position the text insertion point in the text.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Find & Replace. The Replace dialog box appears.

3.	In the Find What text box, type the word that you want to replace.

4.	In the Replace With text box, type the word that you want to replace the original word with.

Check the Match Case check box to make sure that words exactly matching the search word(s) will be found. If this option is not selected, words with the correct characters in any case will be found.

Check the Match Whole Word Only check box to make sure that words that are whole words and not part of longer words are found.

5.	Click on Find Next to have MasterPublisher find each occurrence of the word and let you choose whether or not to replace it.

6.	Click on Replace to replace the word or click on Find Next again to skip that word and find the next occurrence.

Note:

Click on Replace All to replace all occurrences of the word.

Related Topics


Finding the meaning of a word using the thesaurus
To find the meaning of a word using the thesaurus

1.	From the Text menu, select Thesaurus. The Thesaurus dialog box appears.

2.	In the Look Up Word box, type the word you want to look up and click on Look Up.

3.	From the Language drop-down list box, select the language of the word you are looking up.

Possible meanings for the word are listed in the Meanings list box and alternative words and phrases are listed in the Synonyms list box.

4.	To look up a different word in the thesaurus, repeat the steps above or do one of the following:

To look up the word in the Replace Word box, click on Look Up

To look up a word in either the Meanings or Synonyms box, double-click on the word

To look up a word that you have previously looked up, select the word from the Look Up Word drop-down list box.

5.	When you have finished looking up words, click on Cancel.

Note:

If you have selected a word before you select Thesaurus, that word will be displayed in the Look Up Word box.

Related Topics


Replacing a word using the thesaurus
To replace a word using the thesaurus

1.	Position the text insertion point in the word you want to replace.

2.	From the Text menu, select Thesaurus. The Thesaurus dialog box appears.

Possible meanings for the word are listed in the Meanings list box and alternative words and phrases are listed in the Synonyms list box.

3.	If you are not happy with any of the alternatives, you can look up another word by doing one of the following:

To look up the word in the Replace Word box, click on Look Up

To look up a word in either the Meanings or Synonyms box, double-click on the word

To look up a word that you have previously looked up, select the word from the Look Up Word drop-down list box

To look up a word that is not listed, type the word in either the Look Up Word box or Replace Word box and click on Look Up.

4.	Click on a word in the Synonyms list box to put it in the Replace Word box.

5.	Click on Replace. The word in your document is replaced with the word in the Replace Word box.

Related Topics


Hints and tips when using the thesaurus

If you have not purchased a separate language pack, you will only be able to select an English language dictionary.

Related Topics


Hyphenating text
To hyphenate text

1.	Position the text insertion point in the paragraph you want to hyphenate.

2.	From the Text menu, select Spacing. The Override Paragraph Style dialog box appears with the Spacing tab selected.

3.	Check the Hyphenation check box.

4.	Drag the Raggedness slider to determine how ragged you want the right-hand edge of the text to be.

5.	Click on OK.

Related Topics


Checking the spelling of text
To check the spelling of text

1.	From the Text menu, select Check Spelling. MasterPublisher begins to check the document for spelling mistakes.

If MasterPublisher finds a word that is not in its dictionary, the Check Spelling dialog box appears. The word not found is displayed in a text box and alternative suggestions listed in the box below.

2.	To leave the word unchanged, choose to Ignore Word, Ignore All occurrences of the word or Add to Dictionary.

3.	To change the word, do one of the following:

Select the replacement word from the list of suggestions

Type the replacement word in the text box displaying the original word.

4.	Click on either Replace Word or Replace All. The spell checking continues.

Note:

The spelling checker will ignore text that has a neutral language applied to it.

Related Topics


Checking the spelling of text as you type
To check the spelling of text as you type

To turn on automatic spell checking

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Select the Spelling tab.

3.	From the Background Proofing group box, check the Highlight Misspelt Words check box.

4.	From the Spelling Checker group box, select the words you want the spell checker to ignore.

5.	Click on OK. When you type text, misspelt words will be underlined to draw your attention to them.

To correct misspelt words

1.	Right-click on the misspelt word. A shortcut menu appears.

2.	From this shortcut menu, select one of the following:

The word you want to replace the misspelt word with

To ignore the misspelt word

To ignore all instances of the misspelt word

To add the misspelt word to the dictionary.

Note:

You can specify the color of the underlining for misspelt words using the View tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Related Topics


Adding words to the user dictionary
To add words to the user dictionary

When the spell checker picks up the word you want to add to the dictionary, click on Add to Dictionary.

Note:

The dictionary is case-sensitive, so it is important to type the word in the appropriate case (lower case is the most useful) for future recognition by the spelling checker. The dictionary interprets as follows:

Lower case - the spelling checker recognizes all words entered into the dictionary in lower case as correct.

Upper case - the spelling checker recognizes a word entered into the dictionary as correct only in upper case.

Capitalized - the spelling checker recognizes capitalized words entered into the dictionary as correct in upper case and capitalized, but not in lower case.

Related Topics


Formatting text


Changing the text style
To change the text style

1.	Select the text you want to make changes to.

2.	From the Text menu, select Font. The Character Properties dialog box appears with the Font tab selected.

3.	Select the style(s) you want from those available.

4.	Click on OK. The changes are applied to the selected text.

Tools:

Related Topics


Setting the font, point size and color of text
To set the font, point size and color of text

1.	Select the text you want to make changes to.

2.	From the Text menu, select Font. The Character Properties dialog box appears with the Font tab selected.

3.	From the Font drop-down list box, select the font you want.

4.	From the Point Size drop-down list box, select the point size you want.

5.	From the drop-down color palette, select the color you want.

6.	Click on OK. The changes are applied to the selected text.

Shortcuts:

You can color selected text by left-clicking on the color in the color bar.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the case of text
To change the case of text

1.	Select the text you want to change the case of.

2.	From the Text menu, select Case. The Case submenu appears.

3.	From the Case submenu, select either:

Upper Case, to style your text in all CAPITALS

Lower Case, to style your text in all lower case

Capitalize, to have each word begin with a Capital Letter.

Related Topics


Numbering text
To number text

1.	Select the lines of text you want to number.

2.	From the Text menu, select Bullets & Numbers. The Override Paragraph Style dialog box appears with the Bullets & Numbering tab selected.

3.	From the Style group box, select either List Numbering or Heading Numbering.

4.	Select the number style you want.

5.	Type any text you want to appear before or after your number in the Text Before and Text After boxes.

6.	If you have chosen Heading Numbering, type the heading level you want the text to be in the Heading Level box.

7.	If you have chosen Heading Numbering, check the Include Previous Levels check box if you want the numbering to include any previous heading levels.

8.	Click on OK. The changes are applied to the selected text.

Tools:

Related Topics


Applying bullets to text
To apply bullets to text

1.	Select the text you want to bullet.

2.	From the Text menu, select Bullets & Numbers. The Override Paragraph Style dialog box appears with the Bullets & Numbering tab selected.

3.	From the Style group box, select Bullet.

4.	From the Font drop-down list box, select the font you want to style the bullet in.

5.	 If you want the Font list box to display only symbol fonts, check the Show Symbol Fonts Only check box.

5.	From the list of characters available, select the character you want to use as the bullet.

6.	If you want to change the color of the bullet, check the Custom Color check box and select the color you want the bullet to be from the drop-down color palette.

7.	Click on OK. The changes are applied to the selected text.

Tools:

Related Topics


Adding drop caps to text
To add drop caps to text

1.	Position the text insertion point in the paragraph you want to add drop caps to.

2.	From the Text menu, select Drop Caps. The Override Paragraph Style dialog box appears with the Drop Caps tab selected.

3.	Click on the style of drop caps that you want.

4.	Click on OK. The selected text is given the drop cap style you selected.

Related Topics


Setting the language of text
To set the language of text

1.	Select the text you want to set the language dictionary for.

2.	From the Text menu, select Font. The Character Properties dialog box appears with the Font tab selected.

3.	From the Language drop-down list box, select the language you want.

4.	Click on OK.

Note:

You need only select a language dictionary for a block of text if the text is in a different language from the rest of your document.

Text set with a neutral language will be ignored by the spelling checker.

If you have not purchased a separate language pack, you will only be able to select an English language pack.

Related Topics


Changing the alignment of text
To change the alignment of text

1.	Select the text you want to change the alignment of.

2.	From the Text menu, select Layout. The Override Paragraph Style dialog box appears with the Indents & Layout tab selected.

3.	Click on the Alignment button that corresponds to the alignment you want.

4.	Click on OK. The changes are applied to the selected text.

Tools:

Related Topics


Setting the tabs in text
To set the tabs in text

1.	Position the text insertion point in the paragraph you want to set the tab position for.

2.	Click somewhere in the tab bar. A tab marker appears.

3.	Right-click on the tab marker. A shortcut menu appears.

4.	From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Tab Stop dialog box appears.

5.	From the Type drop-down list box, select the type of tab stop you want.

6.	In the Tab Position box, type the position you want the tab stop to be, or use the up and down arrows to select the number.

7.	In the Leader Character box, type the character you want to use as a leader, if any.

8.	In the Leader Spacing box, type the spacing you want for the leader character.

9.	Click on OK. The tab stop is set.

Note:

You can also change the default tab spacing for selected text on the Spacing tab of the Override Paragraph Style dialog box.

Related Topics


Hints and tips about tabs in text

You can also change the default tab spacing for selected text on the Spacing tab of the Override Paragraph Style dialog box.

You can only set specific tab positions for selected text. You cannot set tab positions for paragraph styles.

Drag tab stops to the position you want them to be.

Drag a tab stop off the tab bar to remove it.

If you want to set tab positions for several paragraphs of text, select the paragraphs before setting the tab position.

You can specify the type of tab stop you want by clicking on the Tab Type button at the left-hand edge of the tab bar and selecting the tab type from the drop-down list that appears. When you then click on the tab bar a tab of that type is set.

Hold down Ctrl as you drag a tab marker to make sure the tab position does not snap to specific ruler divisions.

Hold down Shift as you drag a tab marker to move the tab markers on its right with it.

If you are having trouble organizing your text using tabs, why not try using a table instead.

Related Topics


 Work with tables


Creating a table
To create a table

1.	Select the frame that you want to insert the table into.

2.	Position the text insertion point where you want to start your table.

3.	From the Table menu, select Insert Table. The Insert Table dialog box appears.

4.	In the Number of Rows box, type the number of rows you want in your table.

5.	In the Number of Columns box, type the number of columns you want.

6.	From the preview area, select the style you want for the table.

7.	Click on OK. The table is inserted into your frame, ready for you to add to.

Note:

You can change the style of the table or part of the table using the Table Auto Style dialog box.

You can also insert a table by clicking on the Table tool in the Toolbox.

If you have not selected a frame when you click on the Table tool, MasterPublisher will create one for you.

Tools:

Related Topics


Selecting cells
To select cells

To select a single cell:

Drag the text cursor over the cell you want to select. You will need to go slightly too far so that two cells are selected and then move back slightly so that just the cell you want is selected.

To select more than one cell, do one of the following:

Drag the text cursor over the cells you want to select.

Hold down Shift and use the arrow keys to select consecutive cells.

To select a row or column of cells:

1.	Position the text insertion point in any cell on the row or column you want to select.

2.	From the Table menu, select either Select Row or Select Column.

The selected cells are marked by a highlighted box.

Note:

You can only select consecutive cells.

Related Topics


Changing the cell height and width
To change the cell height and width

To change the height or width of cells you need to drag the cell border to the position you want.

1.	Position the mouse pointer over the cell border until it changes shape to a two-headed arrow.

2.	Press and hold down the mouse button.

3.	Drag the border to the position you want.

4.	Release the mouse button.

Note:

This will also change the height or width of the row or column containing the cell.

When you create a table, the width of the whole table will automatically size to the width of the frame containing the table and the columns are equal widths across the table.

Related Topics


Changing the cell border
To change the cell border

1.	Select the cell(s) you want to change the border of.

2.	From the Table menu, select Borders & Background. The Table Cell Properties dialog box appears.

3.	Select the Border Styles tab.

4.	From the Sides list box, select the sides you want to apply the border to.

5.	From the Style list box, select the line style for the border.

6.	In the Width group box, specify the width of the border.

7.	From the drop-down color palette, select the color for the border.

8.	Click on Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep any changes you have made.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected cell(s) on the page.

Hold down Ctrl as you click on the sides in the Sides list box to select more than one side or side(s) and the grid.

Related Topics


Changing the cell background
To change the cell background

1.	Select the cell(s) you want to change the background of.

2.	From the Table menu, select Borders & Background. The Table Cell Properties dialog box appears.

3.	Select the Background tab.

4.	From the Style list box, select the background style you want.

5.	From the drop-down color palette(s), select the color for the background.

6.	In the Attributes group box, specify the attributes of the background style.

7.	Click on Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep any changes you have made.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected cell on the page.

Related Topics


Changing the table style
To change the table style

1.	Select the table or part of the table that you want to change the style of.

2.	From the Table menu, select Table Style. The Table Auto Style dialog box appears.

3.	From the preview area, select the table style you want to use.

4.	Click on OK. The table or part of the table is styled in the style you chose.

Related Topics


Inserting rows and columns
To insert rows and columns

To insert a row:

1.	Position the text insertion point in the row above the place you want to add a row.

2.	From the Table menu, select Insert Row. A row is inserted below the row where the text insertion point was placed.

To insert a column:

1.	Position the text insertion point in the column to the left of the place you want to add a column.

2.	From the Table menu, select Insert Column. A column is inserted to the right of the column where the text insertion point was placed.

Related Topics


Deleting rows and columns
To delete rows and columns

1.	Position the text insertion point in the row or column you want to delete.

2.	From the Table menu, select either Select Row or Select Column. The row or column is selected.

3.	Press Delete. The selected row or column and its content is deleted.

Related Topics


Clearing cells
To clear cells

1.	Select the cell(s) you want to empty.

2.	Right-click on the selected cells. A shortcut menu appears.

3.	From the shortcut menu, select Clear Cells. The cell(s) is cleared, ready for you to add to.

Note:

Deleting the contents of a cell does not affect the background and border style of that cell.

Related Topics


Merging cells
To merge cells

1.	Select the cells you want to merge into one cell.

2.	From the Table menu, select Merge Cells. The cells and their content are merged together.

Note:

You can only merge cells that are on the same row of the table.

Related Topics


Splitting cells
To split cells

1.	Select or position the text insertion point in the merged cell you want to split.

2.	From the Table menu, select Split Cells. The selected cell is split into its original cells.

Related Topics


Moving around a table
To move around a table

To move between cells in a table, do any of the following:

Press Tab to move to the next cell

Use the up and down arrow keys to move up and down either rows of text or rows in the table

use the right and left arrow keys to move right and left through the text in the cell and move to the previous/next cell when you reach the beginning/end of that text.

Related Topics


Adding up the figures in a column
To add up the figures in a column

1.	Position the text insertion point in the cell you want to put the sum of the figures in.

2.	from the Table menu, select Auto Sum. MasterPublisher automatically adds up the sum of the figures in the cells above the auto sum cell in the same column.

Note:

The auto sum figure will change if any of the figures in the cells above it change.

MasterPublisher will add up as far as another auto sum cell or the top of the table.

Related Topics


Converting tabulated text to a table
To convert tabulated text to a table

1.	Select the text that you want to convert to a table.

2.	From the Table menu, select Convert to Table. The Table Auto Style dialog box appears.

3.	From the preview area, select the style you want the table to be.

4.	Click on OK. The selected text is converted into a table with the tabs between words converted into cell divisions and each new paragraph converted to a row.

Related Topics


Work with mail merge documents


Creating a new mailing list
To create a new mailing list

When you open a mailing list in a new document, a default blank mailing list will appear. You can edit the column titles in this list and insert all the information you need.

1.	From the File menu, select Mail Merge. The Edit Mailing List dialog box appears, through which you can add records.

2.	Add the records you want.

3.	Click on Close to close the dialog box and save the mailing list.

Note:

When you save your document, the mailing list will be saved as “DOCUMENT NAME”.MDB in the same folder as the document. Do not move the .MDB file from this folder, because MasterPublisher will not be able to find it again.

Tools:

Related Topics


Using an existing mailing list
To use an existing mailing list

1.	From the File menu, select Mail Merge. The Edit Mailing List dialog box appears.

2.	Click on the Change List button. The Select Data Source dialog box appears.

If the mailing list you want to use is listed here, select it and click on OK to display it in the Edit Mailing List dialog box.

3.	If the mailing list is not listed here, select the database driver for the database you want to use as a mailing list.

4.	Click on OK. The ODBC 'Database' Setup dialog box appears.

This dialog box will differ according to the database driver you selected. We will use the Microsoft Text Driver (*.txt, *.csv) as an example here. The ODBC Text Setup dialog box appears.

5.	In the Data Source Name box, type a name for your mailing list.

6.	Clear the Use Current Directory check box.

7.	Click on Select Directory, the Select Directory dialog box appears.

8.	Select the folder where the database is stored.

9.	Click on OK to return to the ODBC Text Setup dialog box.

10.	Click on OK to return to the Select Data Source dialog box. The new mailing list is displayed here.

11.	Select the new mailing list, then click on OK. The Select Table dialog box appears.

12.	Select the file you want.

13.	Click on OK. The file is opened as a mailing list in the Edit Mailing List dialog box so that you can edit it if necessary.

14.	Click on Close to return to your document.

Note:

For more information about the ODBC 'Database' Setup dialog box for other database drivers, refer to the ODBC Help.

When you save your document, the mailing list will be saved as “DOCUMENT NAME”.MDB in the same folder as the document. Do not move the .MDB file from this folder, because MasterPublisher will not be able to find it again.

Tools:

Related Topics


Editing records in a mailing list
To edit records in a mailing list

1.	Open the mailing list you want to edit in the Edit Mailing List dialog box.

2.	Click the mouse pointer in the record you want to edit, the text cursor appears in the text.

3.	Edit the text in the normal way.

4.	Click on Close to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made.

Note:

When you save your document, the mailing list will be saved as “DOCUMENT NAME”.MDB in the same folder as the document. Do not move the .MDB file from this folder, because MasterPublisher will not be able to find it again.

Tools:

Related Topics


Renaming mailing list fields
To rename mailing list fields

1.	Open the mailing list you want to rename the field(s) of.

2.	Right-click on a column name. A shortcut menu appears.

3.	From the shortcut menu, select Rename Column. The Rename Column dialog box appears.

4.	In the New Name for Column text box, type a new name for the field.

5.	Click on OK to return to the Edit Mailing List dialog box.

6.	Click on Close to close the dialog box and keep the new name for the column.

Note:

The names of the columns correspond with the names of the mail merge fields.

Related Topics


Deleting mailing list fields
To delete mailing list fields

1.	Open the mailing list you want to delete the field from.

2.	Right-click on the column name you want to delete. A shortcut menu appears.

3.	From the shortcut menu, select Delete Column. A message box appears, asking if you are sure you want to delete the column.

4.	Click on Yes. The column and its contents are removed from the mailing list.

5.	Click on Close to close the Edit Mailing List dialog box and keep the changes you have made.

Related Topics


Adding mailing list fields
To add mailing list fields

1.	Open the mailing list you want to add a field to.

2.	Right -click on the name of the column you want to add the field next to. A shortcut menu appears.

3.	From the shortcut menu, select Add New Column. The Add New Column dialog box appears.

4.	In the New Column Name text box, type the name you want to give the field.

5.	In the Add New Column group box, specify whether you want to add the new field before or after the selected field.

6.	Click on OK to return to the Edit Mailing List dialog box.

7.	Click on Close to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made.

Related Topics


Adding records to a mailing list
To add records to a mailing list

1.	Open the mailing list you want to add records to.

2.	In the blank line at the bottom of the list of records, type your new records.

3.	Click on Close to close the Edit Mailing List dialog box and keep the changes you have made.

Related Topics


Deleting records from a mailing list
To delete records from a mailing list

1.	Open the mailing list you want to delete records from.

2.	Do one of the following:

To remove an individual entry, double-click on the record to select it and press Delete.

To remove a whole row, position the mouse pointer to the left of the row so it changes to a right-pointing arrow. Click the mouse button to select the row and press Delete.

3.	Click on Close to close the Edit Mailing List dialog box and keep the changes you have made.

Related Topics


Sorting records in a mailing list
To sort records in a mailing list

1.	Open the mailing list you want to sort the records in.

2.	Right-click on the column name of the records you want to sort. A shortcut menu appears.

3.	Select one of the following:

Sort Column Ascending - to sort the entries in that column in alphabetical order from A onwards.

Sort Column Descending - to sort the entries in that column in alphabetical order from Z backwards.

The records are re-ordered to correspond with that column.

4.	Click on Close to close the Edit Mailing List dialog box and keep the changes you have made. When you browse through the records in a field, they will appear in the order you specified.

Note:

When you print your mail merge document, it will be printed in the order you specified for the records in the mailing list.

Related Topics


Inserting mail merge fields into your documents
To insert mail merge fields into your documents

1.	Place the text insertion point where you want to insert your mail merge field.

2.	From the Text menu, select Insert. The Insert submenu appears.

3.	From the Insert submenu, select Mail Merge Field. The Insert Mail Merge Field dialog box appears.

4.	Select the field you want to insert.

5.	Click on OK. The mail merge field is inserted into your document and the first record in the mailing list is displayed.

Tools:

Related Topics


Browsing through records in a mail merge field
To browse through the records in a mail merge field

1.	Insert your mail merge field(s) in your document.

2.	In the Mail Merge Tools, click on one of the following arrows:

Move First - to move to the first record in the mailing list so that it is displayed in your mail merge fields.

Move Previous - to move to the previous record in the mailing list so that it is displayed in your mail merge fields.

Move Next - to move to the next record in the mailing list so that it is displayed in your mail merge fields.

Move Last - to move to the last record in the mailing list so that it is displayed in your mail merge fields.

Tools:

Related Topics


Printing a mail merge document
To print a mail merge document

1.	Create your mail merge document.

2.	From the File menu, select Mail Merge. The Edit Mailing List dialog box appears.

3.	If you want to print selected records, hold down Ctrl as you click on the records you want to print.

4.	Click on Print. The Print dialog box appears.

5.	Select the General tab.

6.	In the Mail Merge Selection group box, select whether you want to print only the record currently selected in the document, all records in the mailing list or the records selected in the Edit Mailing List dialog box.

7.	Make any other selections you want for printing.

8.	Click on Print.

Note:

If you want to print a document for all of the records or for only the current record, you may find it easier to go to the Print dialog box via the File menu and select either All Records or Current Record from the General tab.

Tools:

Related Topics


Selecting records from a mailing list
To select records from a mailing list

When you go to print your mail merge document, you can choose which records from the mailing list you want to include.

1.	From the General tab on the Print dialog box, click on Mailing List. The Edit Mailing List dialog box appears.

2.	Move the mouse pointer to the left of the record you want to select so that it changes shape to a right-pointing arrow.

3.	Hold down Ctrl and select the records you want to include. The records you select are highlighted.

4.	Click on Close to close the dialog box and return to the Print dialog box.

Related Topics


Work with pictures


Adding and removing pictures


Importing pictures
To import pictures

1.	From the File menu, select Import Picture. The Import Picture dialog box appears.

2.	In the Name box, type the path of the folder where the picture you want to import is stored.

If you cannot remember the path to the folder, drag the divider bar at the left-hand side of the preview are, so that you can view the list of drives and folders on your computer and select the folder from there.

3.	From the Files of type drop-down list box, select the file type of the picture you want to import. A preview of all the available pictures of that type in that folder appears.

4.	Click on the picture you want to import.

5.	Click on Open. The picture is imported into MasterPublisher.

Note:

If you do not have a frame selected when you import a picture, MasterPublisher will create a frame for it.

You can right-click on a frame and select Import Picture from the shortcut menu that appears.

Tools:

Related Topics


Hints and tips when importing pictures

If you select a frame before importing the picture, the picture is automatically displayed in it.

If you do not select a frame before importing the picture, a frame is created for it.

You do not have to wait for all the previews to appear in the Import Picture dialog box before you can import a picture.

Once a picture is listed in the contents box, you can use it over and over again in as many different frames and on as many different pages as you like. Simply select a frame and click on the picture in the contents box to place it in the frame.

Related Topics


Scanning pictures
To scan pictures

1.	From the File menu, select Scan Picture. The Scan Picture dialog box appears.

2.	The default scanner is listed in the Scanner box. Click on Select to see any other installed scanners and select the one you want.

3.	Click on Acquire to start scanning. Any further dialog boxes or instructions will be supplied by your scanner.

Note:

Every scanner works differently, and for detailed instructions you will need to refer to the documentation that came with your scanner. However, whichever scanner you are using, you start the process within MasterPublisher in the same way.

Related Topics


Hints and tips when scanning a picture

If you selected a frame before scanning the picture, the picture is placed in the frame.

If you did not select a frame before scanning the picture, MasterPublisher creates a frame for you.

Once a picture is listed in the contents box, you can use it over and over again in as many different frames and on as many different pages as you like. Simply select a frame and click on the picture in the contents list to place it in the frame.

Keep in mind:

When scanning, it is important to plan what you want to achieve before you begin the actual scanning process. Bear the following points in mind:

How do you want the scanned image to look?

Will the image be used in a document or saved in a file for future use?

What publishing software (such as MasterPublisher) or image-editing software (such as PhotoEditor) will you use, and what file formats does the software accept?

How will the image be reproduced - with what type of printer and what type of paper?

What is the original image type and what scanned image type will you select to achieve the best results?

Knowing your planned end result and the equipment and tools you need to use are an important part of the scanning process.

Types of images

There are three basic types of images: line-art, continuous-tone and halftone. Each of them has advantages and disadvantages when it comes to scanning them.

Line-art images are always black and white. Examples are text, architectural plans and sketches. The best line-art images for scanning have sharp edges and good contrast (i.e. the white is very white and the black is very black).

The most common example of a continuous-tone image is a photograph printed on photographic paper. These images are made up of gradient levels, shading from level to level. In a black and white photograph, the image shades from black to white. In a color photo, it shades from darker hues to light ones. The best continuous-tone images for scanning have a broad, even distribution of tones.

Examples of halftone images are photographs printed in books, magazines or newspapers. Through the halftoning printing process, various sized solid dots are used to simulate a continuous-tone effect. You can see these dots if you look closely at a halftone image. The best halftone images for scanning have a very fine dot pattern.

Related Topics


Pasting pictures
To paste pictures

1.	Open the program that contains the picture you want to paste into your document.

2.	Cut or copy the picture onto the Clipboard.

3.	In MasterPublisher, open the document you want to paste the picture into.

4.	Draw or select the frame you want to paste the picture into.

5.	From the Edit menu, select Paste. The picture is pasted into the frame and its name appears in the contents box.

Note:

Pictures from programs that support OLE are automatically pasted as OLE objects. This means that you can edit them from within MasterPublisher.

If you do not have a frame selected when you paste the picture, a frame is created for you.

You can also right-click on the page, pasteboard or a frame and select Paste from the shortcut menu that appears.

Tools:

Related Topics


Removing pictures
To remove pictures

To remove a picture from the document

1.	In the contents box, select the picture you want to remove.

2.	Click on the Delete Item tool. The picture is removed from your document.

To remove a picture from a frame

1.	Right-click on the frame you want to remove the picture from. A shortcut menu appears.

2.	From the shortcut menu, select Clear Picture. The picture is removed from the frame.

Note:

The picture is removed from your current document only. The original file remains on disk.

If you want to remove the picture file from disk, run Windows Explorer and use the Delete command in the File menu.

If you remove a picture from all the frames containing it and it has not been marked as kept in the contents list, the picture will also be removed from your document.

Tools:

Related Topics


Replacing pictures
To replace pictures

1.	Select the frame containing the picture you want to replace.

2.	Do one of the following:

Import the new picture into the frame

Paste the new picture into the frame

Click on the new picture’s name in the contents box.

The new picture appears in the frame, replacing the original picture.

Note:

If you replace the last instance of a picture in your document, the picture will also be removed from the contents list unless it has been marked as kept.

Tools:

Related Topics


Editing pictures


Re-coloring pictures
To re-color pictures

1.	Select the frame containing the picture you want to re-color.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Picture Attributes. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Frame Picture tab selected.

3.	Check the Custom Color check box.

4.	From the drop-down color palette, select the color you want.

5.	To make the white areas of the picture transparent, check the Make white transparent check box.

6.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected picture on the page.

You can also left-click on a color in the color bar to change the color of the picture in the selected frame or right-click on the color and select Picture from the shortcut menu that appears.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame containing the picture you are re-coloring, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

Tools:

Related Topics


Resizing pictures
To resize pictures

1.	Select the frame containing the picture you want to resize.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Picture Attributes. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Frame Picture tab selected.

3.	In the Resizing group box, select whether you want the picture to stretch to fit the frame, to center the picture in the frame, tile the picture or resize the frame to fit the picture.

4.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made.

Note:

To change the actual dimensions of the picture, change the size of the frame; either by dragging its handles until it is the size you want or by specifying its size on the Size & Position tab of the Frame Properties dialog box.

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected picture on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame containing the picture you want to resize, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

Tools:

Related Topics


Moving pictures
To move pictures

1.	Select the frame containing the picture you want to move.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the frame so that it changes shape to a four-headed arrow.

3.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

4.	Drag the mouse pointer to a new position, an outline of the frame follows the pointer as a guideline for positioning.

5.	When the frame is in the position you want, release the mouse button. The frame and picture are redrawn in the new location.

Note:

You can also use the Size & Position tab on the Frame Properties dialog box to position the frame and picture more accurately.

Tools:

Related Topics


Rotating pictures
To rotate pictures

1.	Select the frame containing the picture you want to rotate.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Picture Attributes. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Frame Picture tab selected.

3.	In the Picture Angle group box, type the angle you want the picture at in the degrees box.

4.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made.

Note:

You can also drag the radius of the degrees circle or use the up and down arrows on the degrees box to specify the angle of rotation.

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected picture on the page.

If you rotate a frame containing a picture, the picture will also be rotated with the frame.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame containing the picture you want to rotate, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

Tools:

Related Topics


Tiling pictures
To tile pictures

1.	Select the frame containing the picture you want to tile.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Picture Attributes. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Frame Picture tab selected.

3.	From the Resizing group box, select Tile.

4.	In the Tile Picture group box, specify the number of times you want the picture to tile across and down.

5.	Check the Mosaic Pattern check box to create a mosaic effect when the picture is tiled.

6.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected picture on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame containing the picture you want to tile, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

Tools:

Related Topics


Flipping pictures
To flip pictures

1.	Select the frame containing the picture you want to flip.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Picture Attributes. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Frame Picture tab selected.

3.	In the Flip Picture group box, select whether you want to flip the picture horizontally, vertically or both.

4.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected picture on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame containing the picture you want to flip, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

You can also flip the picture by dragging a side handle so that it is on the other side of its opposite handle.

Tools:

Related Topics


Editing pictures using PhotoEditor
To edit pictures using PhotoEditor

Double-click on the frame containing the picture you want to edit. PhotoEditor appears, ready for you to edit the picture.

Note:

With PhotoEditor you can change picture attributes such as the focus, texture and contrast.

For more information about using PhotoEditor, refer to its online Help.

Related Topics


Cropping pictures
To crop pictures

1.	Select the frame containing the picture you want to crop.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Crop Picture. The Picture Cropping dialog box appears with a preview of the picture in the preview window.

3.	In the preview window, do one of the following:

Drag the mouse pointer over the area of the picture you want to crop to. A box appears around the area you specified.

Drag the edges of the box around the picture to specify the area you want to crop to.

4.	Drag the Zoom slider to zoom in and out of the crop area you specified.

5.	If you want to specify the crop area again from scratch or want to restore the picture to its original state, click on the Reset button.

6.	Click on Close to close the dialog box.

Note:

The picture in your document is cropped as you work in the Picture Cropping dialog box, giving you a better idea of the effect of your changes.

Tools:

Related Topics


Ungrouping pictures
To ungroup pictures

1.	Select the frame containing the picture you want to ungroup.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Ungroup Metafile. A copy of the picture is created and ungrouped into its individual components.

3.	You can select each part of the picture to change its color.

4.	If you want to remove or edit the shape of any part of the picture, select Ungroup from the Frame menu. The picture is ungrouped again into its individual components, which are no longer linked together.

Note:

Although the picture is ungrouped when you select Ungroup Metafile, the components stay linked together in the same way as a set of grouped frames.

You can only ungroup metafile type pictures, such as those with the file extensions .WMF or .CGM.

Related Topics


Hiding pictures
To hide pictures

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences.

2.	Select the View tab.

3.	Clear the Show Graphics check box.

This check box is checked when pictures are displayed.

Note:

When pictures are not displayed they are replaced by a box with a cross through it and the picture name.

When you hide the pictures in your document you also hide any PowerText and OLE objects.

Related Topics


Viewing the status of pictures
To view the status of pictures

1.	In the contents box, select the picture you want to view the status of.

2.	Click on the Item information tool, the Picture Status dialog box appears.

3.	When you have read the information you want, click on OK.

Tools:

Related Topics


Renaming pictures
To rename pictures

1.	In the contents box, select the picture you want to change the name of.

2.	Click on the Item information tool, the Picture Status dialog box appears.

3.	In the Name box, type the new name of your picture.

4.	Click on OK. The picture is renamed.

Tools:

Related Topics


Editing pictures in PhotoEditor


Opening a picture in PhotoEditor
To open a picture in PhotoEditor

Double-click on the frame containing the picture you want to edit. PhotoEditor appears, with the picture displayed in both the Original and Preview windows.

Related Topics


Cropping a picture in PhotoEditor
To crop a picture in PhotoEditor

1.	Select the Crop tab.

2.	In the Original area, position the cursor over the original image so that the cursor changes shape to a pair of scissors.

3.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

4.	Drag the scissors so that they mark the area you want to crop.

5.	Release the mouse button. The cropped area appears in the Preview area.

Note:

To restrain the cropped area to a square, hold down Ctrl or Shift as you drag the scissors.

You can adjust the size of the cropped area by dragging the border edges on the original image.

You can also adjust the size of the cropped area using the arrow keys. Hold down Shift as you press the arrow keys to move the left and top edges of your cropped area, hold down Ctrl as you press the arrow keys to move the right and bottom edges of your cropped area.

Press the arrow keys on their own to move the cropped area over the original image.

Related Topics


Resizing a picture in PhotoEditor
To resize a picture in PhotoEditor

1.	Select the Size tab.

2.	From the Units group box, select the units you want to use. You have the choice of:

Centimeters

Inches

 	Pixels

3.	In the Width box, type the width you want the image to be, or use the up and down arrows on the right of the box to increase and decrease the amount.

4.	In the Height box, type the height you want the image to be, or use the up and down arrows on the right of the box to increase and decrease the amount.

The changes are made in the Preview area.

Note:

To maintain your image’s proportions, check the Preserve image proportions check box.

Related Topics


Changing the brightness and contrast in PhotoEditor
To change the brightness and contrast in PhotoEditor

1.	Select the Brightness and Contrast tab.

2.	In the Brightness group box, drag the slider to make the image lighter or darker.

3.	In the Contrast group box, drag the slider to increase and decrease the contrast of the image.

The changes are made in the Preview area.

Related Topics


Changing the focus and texture in PhotoEditor
To change the focus and texture in PhotoEditor

1.	Select the Focus and Texture tab.

2.	In the Focus group box, drag the slider to sharpen or soften the focus of the image.

3.	In the Texture group box, drag the slider to make the image smoother or more grainy.

The changes are made in the Preview area.

Related Topics


Rotating and flipping a picture in PhotoEditor
To rotate and flip a picture in PhotoEditor

1.	Select the Rotate and Flip tab.

2.	In the Rotate group box, type the angle of rotation in the degrees box, or use the up and down arrows on the right of the box to increase and decrease the angle.

You can also click on one of the rotate tools in the Rotate group box.

3.	In the Flip group box, click on either the Flip Vertically or Flip Horizontally tool.

The changes are made in the Preview area.

Related Topics


Changing the colors of a picture in PhotoEditor
To change the colors of a picture in PhotoEditor

1.	Select the Colors tab card.

2.	In the Format group box, select either Color or Black and White.

3.	In the Quality group box, drag the slider to select the number of colors you want.

The changes are made in the Preview area.

Note:

The number of colors available depends on the number of colors in the original image and the changes you have made to the image in PhotoEditor. You may find that after making some changes to the image, you can increase the number of colors in the image.

Related Topics


Undoing your changes in PhotoEditor
To undo your changes in PhotoEditor

To undo the changes on each tab:

click on the Undo tool. The changes you have made on that tab card are undone.

Related Topics


Exiting PhotoEditor and returning to MasterPublisher
To exit PhotoEditor and return to MasterPublisher

To exit PhotoEditor and return to MasterPublisher, do one of the following:

Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the window

From the Control menu, select Close

From the File menu, select Exit and Return to MasterPublisher

Double-click on the Control-menu icon.

Note:

When you return to MasterPublisher the original picture is changed according to the changes you made in PhotoEditor.

{button, Klink(pictures)}	Related Topics


Work with color


Hiding and displaying the color bar
To hide and display the color bar

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Select the Controls tab.

3.	From the Show Controls group box, select Color Bar. The Color Bar check box is checked when the color bar is displayed.

4.	Click on OK.

Related Topics


Applying color to your document
To apply color to your document

1.	Select the object you want to color.

2.	In the color bar, left-click on a color to change the color of the selected item.

Right-click on a color bar to display a shortcut menu, from which you can select the item you want to change the color of.

Note:

If you have selected a graduated fill style, you can change the ‘from’ and ‘to’ color using the color bar:

To change the ‘from’ color, left-click or Ctrl-click on the color in the color bar.

To change the ‘to’ color, Shift-click on the color in the color bar or right-click on the color and select Frame Grad Fill from the shortcut menu that appears.

Related Topics


Creating a new color
To create a new color

1.	From the Edit menu, select Edit Colors. The Colors dialog box appears.

2.	Click on Add to display the Add Color dialog box.

3.	You can mix colors using RGB, CMYK, or HLS color models or you can choose a Pantone color. Use the sliders to create the color you want. A preview of the color is shown on the right-hand side of the dialog box.

4.	Check the Spot Color check box if you want to define the color as a spot colour.

5.	When you have created the color you want and given it a name, click on OK. You are returned to the Colors dialog box.

6.	Click on OK. The color is added to the color bar.

Note:

If you have created a lot of custom colors to use in your documents, you can save them as a color palette that you can use in the future.

You cannot edit tints. The Add Color dialog box only shows colors at 100% tint.

Shortcut:

Click on the + button at the right-hand end of the color bar to display the Add Color dialog box.

Tools:

Related Topics


Editing an existing color
To edit an existing color

1.	From the Edit menu, click on Edit Colors. The Colors dialog box appears.

2.	Select the color you want to edit and click on Edit. The Edit Color dialog box appears.

3.	You can mix the colors using RGB, CMYK or HLS color models or you can choose a Pantone color. Use the sliders to create the color you want. A preview of the color is displayed on the right-hand side of the dialog box.

4.	Check the Spot Color check box if you want to define the color as a spot colour.

5.	When you have created the color you want, click on OK. You are returned to the Colors dialog box.

6.	Click on OK. The original color in the color bar is changed to the new color.

Note:

Anything in the document using the original color is redrawn in the new color.

If you have created a lot of custom colors to use in your documents, you can save them as a color palette that you can use in the future.

You cannot edit tints. The Edit Color dialog box only shows colors at 100% tint.

Shortcut:

In the color bar, right-click on the color you want to edit, then select Edit Color from the shortcut menu that appears. The Edit Color dialog box appears.

Tools:

Related Topics


Deleting a color
To delete a color

1.	From the Edit menu, click on Edit Colors. The Colors dialog box appears.

2.	Select the color you want to delete.

3.	Click on Delete. The color is removed from the color bar and anything in the document using that color is redrawn in black.

Tools:

Related Topics


Saving a color palette
To save a color palette

1.	Make sure that the selection of colors you want is displayed in the color bar.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Edit Colors. The Colors dialog box appears.

3.	Click on Save. The Save Colors dialog box appears.

4.	Select a disk drive and folder where you want to save the file to.

5.	In the File name text box, type a name for the palette. MasterPublisher automatically adds the extension .COL.

6.	Click on Save. The palette is saved, ready for you to use in future documents.

Tools:

Related Topics


Loading a color palette
To load a color palette

1.	From the Edit menu, select Edit Colors. The Colors dialog box appears.

2.	Click on Load. The Load Colors dialog box appears.

3.	Select the disk drive and folder where the palette you want to open is stored.

4.	From the Folders list box, select the palette you want to open.

5.	Click on Open. The color bar changes to show the color palette you have just loaded.

Tools:

Related Topics


Work with shapes and lines


Drawing basic shapes
To draw basic shapes

You can draw shapes in your documents using the frame shape tools. Every shape that you draw is also a frame that you can place objects into.

1.	From the Toolbox, select the shape you want to draw.

2.	Position the mouse pointer on the page where you want to start drawing your shape.

3.	Press and hold down the mouse button as you drag the mouse diagonally. An outline of the shape appears as a guideline.

4.	When the shape is the size you want, release the mouse button. The shape is drawn on the page.

Note:

The shapes available are: box, rounded box, ellipse and star.

Hold down Ctrl as you drag the mouse to keep the height and width of the shape the same.

Hold down Shift as you drag the mouse to draw the shape from the center.

You can ungroup and edit the basic shapes to make any other shape you want.

Related Topics


Editing a basic shape
To edit a basic shape

Any shape that you draw can also be used as a frame that you can place objects into. You can use the Frame Properties dialog box to change the properties of your shapes.

1.	Select the shape you want to edit.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Shape. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Shape tab selected.

3.	From the Style group box, click on the button for the shape you want.

If you chose the polygon, starburst or star, specify the number of points you want in the Number of Points box.

If you chose the polygon, starburst or star, you can check the Rotate check box to rotate the frame so that its base is changed to the next point or side.

If you chose the line, specify whether you want a closed or open path by checking the Closed Path check box. The path is closed when the box is checked.

If you chose the starburst or star, you can change the inner radius of the frame using the Inner Radius slider.

If you chose a starburst, you can change the length of the inner points using the Inner Points slider.

4.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made to the shape.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected shape on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the shape you are editing, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

Tools:

Related Topics


Drawing a straight line
To draw a straight line

1.	From the Toolbox, select the Line tool.

2.	Position the mouse pointer on the page where you want to start drawing the line.

3.	Click the left mouse button. A corner point is placed on the page.

4.	Move the pointer to the position you want your next point. An outline of the line follows the mouse pointer as a guide for positioning.

5.	Click the left mouse button. A line is drawn between the two points. Repeat steps 4 - 5 until the line is the shape you want.

6.	To end the path, do one of the following:

Double-click on the last point

Press Escape, the line is finished at the last point you placed

Press the Spacebar, the line is finished at the last point you placed.

Note:

If you make the final point close to the first point, the points will join to create a closed path and a shape you can apply fill styles to.

To draw a single line, select the Line tool then press and hold down the mouse button as you drag the pointer across the page. When you release the mouse button the line is drawn on the page.

Hold down Ctrl as you create a point to constrain the angle between that point and the one before it to multiples of 45 degrees.

Related Topics


Drawing a freehand line
To draw a freehand line

1.	From the Toolbox, select the Pencil tool.

2.	Position the mouse pointer on the page where you want to start the line.

3.	Press and hold down the mouse button as you draw the line on the page.

4.	When you have finished the line, release the mouse button.

Note:

If you make the final point close to the first point, the points will join to create a closed path and a shape you can apply fill styles to.

Related Topics


Drawing a curved line
To draw a curved line

1.	From the Toolbox, select the Curve tool.

2.	Position the mouse pointer on the page where you want to start the line.

3.	Click the left mouse button. A point is placed on the page.

4.	Move the pointer to the position you want your next point. An outline of the line follows the mouse pointer as a guide for positioning.

5.	Click the left mouse button, a curved line is drawn between the two points. Repeat steps 4 - 5 until the line is the shape you want.

6.	To end the path, do one of the following:

Double-click on the last point

Press Escape, the line is finished at the last point you placed

Press the Spacebar, the line is finished at the last point you placed.

Note:

The outline of the line that appears after the first point will appear as a straight line because the line cannot be curved until there are at least three points.

If you make the final point close to the first point, the points will join to create a closed path and a shape you can apply fill styles to.

If you drag the curve pointer rather than clicking, a straight line will be drawn.

Hold down Ctrl as you create a point to constrain the angle between that point and the one before it to multiples of 45 degrees.

Related Topics


Curve points and control points

Every curve point on a path has two control points on the end of control lines.

You can drag these control points to change the curvature of the path.

To move both control points the same amount, hold down Shift as you drag one of the points.

{button, Klink(lines;shapes)}	Related Topics


Manually editing shapes and lines
To manually edit shapes and lines

Shapes are formed from closed paths and can be converted back into these paths so that you can edit them. Lines are already open paths.

1.	Select the shape or line you want to edit.

2.	If you have selected a shape, select Ungroup from the Frame menu. The shape is ungrouped and converted to points and paths.

3.	Move the mouse pointer over a point so that it changes shape to an arrow with a four-headed arrow at its base.

4.	Press and hold down the mouse button as you drag the point to a new position.

5.	Add a point to a path by right-clicking on the point you want to add the point next to and selecting Add Point from the shortcut menu that appears.

6.	Delete a point from a path by right-clicking on the point and selecting Delete Point from the shortcut menu that appears or by holding down Ctrl as you click on the point.

7.	Change the type of point by right-clicking on the point and selecting the point type from the shortcut menu that appears.

8.	Close the path of a line by right-clicking on a point and selecting Close Path(s) from the shortcut menu that appears.

9.	Split a path by right-clicking on a point and selecting Open Path from the shortcut menu that appears.

Note:

You can group the line or shape again so that if you select or drag it, you will not accidentally change any of the points.

Related Topics


Sizing shapes and lines
To size shapes and lines

1.	Select the shape or line you want to size.

2.	If the shape or line is not grouped, select Group from the Frame menu. Eight handles appear around it to show that it is selected and grouped.

3.	Position the pointer over one of the handles so that it changes shape to a two-headed arrow.

4.	Press and hold down the mouse pointer as you drag the handle. An outline of the shape/line appears as a guideline.

5.	When the shape/line is the size you want, release the mouse button.

Note:

Hold down Ctrl as you resize the shape/line to maintain its aspect ratio.

Hold down Shift as you resize the shape/line to resize it from its center.

You can make more accurate changes to the position of the shape/line by using the Size and Position tab on the Frame Properties dialog box.

Tools:

Related Topics


Moving shapes and lines
To move shapes and lines

1.	Select the shape or line you want to move.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the shape or line so that it changes shape to a four-headed arrow.

3.	Press and hold down the mouse button.

4.	Drag the shape/line to its new position. As you drag the shape/line the outline of the shape/line follows your movements, making it easier to reposition.

5.	When the shape/line is in the position you want, release the mouse button. The shape/line is redrawn.

Note:

You can also move a group of shapes/lines in the same way.

You can make more accurate changes to the position of shape/line by using the Size and Position tab on the Frame Properties dialog box, the nudge control or the cursor keys on your keyboard.

Use Snap to Guides & Grid to help you move the shape/line accurately.

Hold down Ctrl as you drag the shape/line to make a copy of the shape/line.

Tools:

Related Topics


Rotating shapes and lines
To rotate shapes and lines

1.	Select the shape or line you want to rotate.

2.	If the shape or line is not grouped, select Group from the Frame menu. Eight handles appear around the shape/line.

The top right-hand handle is a different shape to the other seven handles. This is the rotate handle.

3.	Position the mouse pointer over the rotate handle so that it changes shape to a circular arrow.

4.	Press and hold down the mouse pointer as you drag the handle. An outline of the shape/line appears as a guide to show you how much you have rotated the shape/line.

5.	When the shape/line is at the angle you want, release the mouse button. The shape/line is redrawn at the angle you created.

Note:

Hold down Ctrl as you rotate the shape/line to constrain the angle of rotation to multiples of 45 degrees.

Hold down Shift as you rotate the shape/line to constrain the angle of rotation to multiples of 5 degrees.

Shortcut:

Hold down Ctrl and press the left or right arrow key to rotate the shape/line by 5 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise.

Hold down Ctrl and press the up or down arrow key to rotate the shape/line by 45 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise.

Tools:

Related Topics


Snapping shapes and lines to the grid
To snap shapes and lines to the grid

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears, with the Document tab selected.

2.	In the Grid group box, check the Snap to Guides & Grid check box.

3.	In the Grid Size text box, type the size that you want the grid divisions to be.

4.	Click on OK.

Note:

When Snap to Guides & Grid is turned on, any shapes or lines you draw or move will be forced to position themselves with the closest grid division or column guide.

You can also right-click on the page or pasteboard and select Snap to Guides and Grid from the shortcut menu that appears.

Tools:

Related Topics


Overlapping/stacking shapes and lines
To overlap/stack shapes and lines

1.	Select the shape or line whose stacking order you want to change.

2.	Do one of the following:

From the Frame menu, select Bring to Front. This moves the shape/line to the front of all the frames/shapes/lines on the page.

From the Frame menu, select Send to Back. This sends the shape/line behind all the frames/shapes/lines on the page.

From the Frame menu, select Nudge to Front. This moves the shape/line forward in front of the frame/shape/line that was previously in front of it.

From the Frame menu, select Nudge to Back. This moves the shape/line backwards behind the frame/shape/line that was previously behind it.

Note:

Shapes/lines are stacked in the order in which they were created until you change their stacking order.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the line style of shapes and lines
To change the line style of shapes and lines

Every shape and line that you draw is also a frame. you can edit them using the Frame Properties dialog box.

1.	Select the shape or line you want to change the line style of.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Border. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Border Styles tab selected.

3.	From the Style drop-down list box, select Lines.

4.	From the list box, select the line style you want.

5.	To change the width of the line style, select the units you want from the drop-down list box.

6.	Type the width in the Width box.

7.	To change the color of the line style, select a color from the drop-down color palette.

8.	If you have an open path you can select an arrowhead for the start and end of your line from the Start and End drop-down list boxes.

9.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes made to the selected shape or line.

Note:

You can change the color of the line style by right-clicking on the color in the color bar and selecting Frame Border from the shortcut menu that appears.

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected shape on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the shape you are editing, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the fill style of shapes
To change the fill style of shapes

Every shape and line that you draw is also a frame, you can edit them using the Frame Properties dialog box.

1.	Select the shape you want to change the fill style of.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Background. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Background tab selected.

3.	From the Style list box, select the fill style you want to apply to the selected shape.

4.	Select the color(s) for the fill style from the drop-down color palette(s) in the Attributes group box.

5.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made to the selected shape.

Note:

If you have selected a textured fill style, use the Attributes group box to edit the color, angle and size of the texture.

You can change the color of the fill style by left-clicking on the color in the color bar.

Change the ‘from’ color by left-clicking on the color in the color bar.

Change the ‘to’ color by Shift-clicking on the color in the color bar.

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected shape on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the shape you are editing, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

Tools:

Related Topics


Cutting, copying and pasting shapes and lines
To cut, copy and paste shapes and lines

To cut or copy shapes and lines:

1.	Select the shape or line you want to cut or copy.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Cut or Copy as appropriate.

To paste shapes and lines:

From the Edit menu, select Paste. The shape/line is pasted onto the page.

Note:

The Clipboard can only contain one item at a time, so when you cut or copy something onto the Clipboard, any previous item on the Clipboard is lost.

You can also right-click on a shape or line and select Cut or Copy from the shortcut menu that appears.

You can also right-click on the page or pasteboard and select Paste from the shortcut menu that appears.

Tools:

Related Topics


Deleting shapes and lines
To delete shapes and lines

Select the shape or line you want to delete, then do any of the following:

From the Edit menu, select Delete.

Press Delete on your keyboard.

Right-click on the shape or line and select Delete from the shortcut menu that appears.

The shape/line is deleted from the page.

Related Topics


Linking and embedding objects


Embedding an entire file
To embed an entire file

1.	From the Edit menu, select Insert Object, the Insert Object dialog box appears.

2.	Select Create From File.

3.	In the File box, type the path and filename of the file you want to embed.

If you do not know the path and filename, click on the Browse button to search for the file you want.

4.	Click on OK.

The entire file is embedded into your document and the object’s name is added to the list of OLE objects in the contents box.

Tools:

Related Topics


Embedding part of a file
To embed part of a file

1.	Open the source program and open the file that contains the object(s) you want to embed into your MasterPublisher document.

2.	Select the object(s) you want to embed and select Copy from the source program’s Edit menu.

3.	If it is not already running, start MasterPublisher and open the document you want to embed the object into.

4.	From the Edit menu, select Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box appears.

5.	Select Paste and in the As box, ensure that the item with the word ‘object’ in its name is selected. e.g. MasterDraw Picture Object.

6.	Click on OK.

The selected object is embedded into your document and its name is added to the list of OLE objects in the contents box.

Note:

Alternatively you can select Paste directly from the Edit menu to embed the object into your document (Paste will only embed the object when it has been placed on the Clipboard by an OLE server program).

Related Topics


Embedding a new object
To embed a new object

1.	From the Edit menu, select Insert Object. The Insert Object dialog box appears.

2.	Select Create New.

3.	From the Object Type list box, select the object type that you want to create, e.g. MasterDraw Picture.

The contents of the Object Type list box vary depending on which of your programs support OLE.

4.	Click on OK. Now one of two things will happen:

Either, the source program for the object type you have selected will open in a separate window

Or, some of the MasterPublisher toolbars will be temporarily replaced by those of the source program.

5.	Create the object, then do one of the following to resume work in MasterPublisher:

If the object was created in a separate program window, select Exit from the File menu of that program. If a message is displayed asking if you want to update the document, click on Yes.

If the object was created in-place, click anywhere outside the embedded object.

The new object is embedded into your MasterPublisher document and its name is added to the list of OLE objects in the contents box.

Tools:

Related Topics


Hints and tips when embedding files

When you embed an object into MasterPublisher, a copy of the object file is made and stored within the document. The original file is not altered in any way and remains available for future use.

Once an object is listed in the contents box you can use it over and over again in as many different frames and on as many different pages as you like. Simply select a frame and click on the object name in the contents list to place it in that frame.

You can scale, crop and hide an embedded object in the same way as an imported picture.

Related Topics


Linking to an entire file
To link to an entire file

1.	From the Edit menu, select Insert Object. The Insert Object dialog box appears.

2.	Select Create From File.

3.	In the File box, type the path and filename of the file that you want to link to.

If you do not know the path and filename, click on the Browse button to search for the file you want.

4.	Check the Link check box.

5.	Click on OK.

The entire file is linked to your MasterPublisher document and its name is added to the list of OLE objects in the contents box.

Note:

You can only create links to existing files that have been saved in an OLE source program.

Tools:

Related Topics


Linking to part of a file
To link to part of a file

1.	Open the source program and open the file you want to link to.

2.	Select the part of the file you want to display in MasterPublisher and select Copy from the source program’s Edit menu.

3.	If it is not already running, start MasterPublisher and open the document that you want to link the file into.

4.	From the Edit menu, select Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box appears.

5.	Select Paste Link and from the As list box, make sure that the item with the word ‘Link’ in its name is selected. E.g. MasterDraw Picture Link.

6.	Click on OK.

The entire file is linked to your MasterPublisher document, but only the part of the file you selected is displayed. The link’s name is added to the list of OLE objects in the contents box.

Related Topics


Hints and tips when linking files

Once a link is listed in the contents box you can use it over and over again in as many different frames and on as many different pages as you like. Simply select a frame and click on the link in the contents list to place it in the frame.

Related Topics


Dragging and dropping an object
To drag-and-drop an object

1.	Make sure that MasterPublisher and the program you want to drag-and-drop from are both open and visible on your screen.

2.	In the source program, create the object or open the file that contains the object you want to drag-and-drop.

3.	Select the object you want to drag-and-drop.

4.	Press and hold down the mouse button on the object and drag it over the MasterPublisher window. The mouse changes shape to an arrow with a rectangle at its base.

5.	Now do one of the following:

To embed the object in your MasterPublisher document, release the mouse button

To embed a copy of the object, hold down Ctrl and release the mouse button

To create a link to the object, hold down Ctrl and Shift and release the mouse button.

The object is linked or embedded in your document and its name is added to the list of OLE objects in the contents box.

Note:

If you select a frame before dropping an object, the object is placed in the frame.

Related Topics


Editing a linked or embedded object
To edit a linked or embedded object

1.	Double-click on the object.

Double-clicking on an object opens the source program, either in a separate window or temporarily replacing some of the MasterPublisher toolbars and menus allowing you to edit the object in-place.

2.	When you have finished editing the object, do one of the following to return to MasterPublisher:

If you edited the object in a separate window, select Exit from the File menu of that program. If a message is displayed asking if you want to update that object, click on Yes.

If you edited the object in-place, click anywhere outside the object.

Note:

You cannot edit a linked object in-place. The source file will always open in a separate program window.

Links are updated automatically unless you specify otherwise.

You can also do one of the following to edit an object:

Select the object, then select Edit Object from the Edit menu.

Right-click on the object, select the object type from the shortcut menu and select Edit from the submenu.

Related Topics


Hints and tips when editing a linked or embedded object

Some objects will perform a different command when you double-click them, e.g. double-clicking on a sound clip will cause it to ‘play’ instead of allowing you to edit it. To edit one of these objects you must do one of the following:

Select the object, then select Edit Object from the Edit menu

Right-click on the object, select the object type from the shortcut menu and select Edit from the submenu.

If you are then presented with the option of Open or Edit, select Open to edit the object in a separate window and select Edit to edit the object in-place.

Related Topics


Setting links to manual updating
To set links to manual updating

1.	From the Edit menu, select Object Links. The Links dialog box appears.

2.	From the Links list box, select the link you want to set to manual updating. To select multiple links, hold down Ctrl and click on each link.

3.	Select Manual.

4.	Click on Close.

Note:

When you edit a file that is linked to your MasterPublisher document, the document will be updated to reflect the changes in the linked file. Links will be updated automatically unless you specify otherwise by selecting manual updating for certain links.

To update any links that are set to manual updating, select the link(s) in the Links dialog box, then click on Update Now. For each selected link, your document will reflect any changes made to the source file since the last update.

Related Topics


Reconnecting a link
To reconnect a link

1.	From the Edit menu, select Object Links. The Links dialog box appears.

2.	From the Links list box, select the link you want to reconnect.

3.	Click on Change Source. The Change Source dialog box appears.

4.	Select the drive and folder where the source file is stored, then select the source file you want to reconnect the link to.

5.	Click on OK to return to the Links dialog box, then click on Close.

The link is reconnected and can now be edited and updated.

Note:

If you change the name or location of the source file the link breaks because it is connected to a folder path and/or filename that no longer exists.

You can also use the Change Source dialog box to redirect a link to a different file.

Related Topics


Displaying an object as an icon
To display an object as an icon

1.	From the Edit menu, select Insert Object. The Insert Object dialog box appears.

2.	Check the Display As Icon check box.

3.	Click on Change Icon. The Change Icon dialog box appears.

4.	In the From File box, type the path and filename of the file containing the icon you want to use.

If you do not know the path and filename, click on the Browse button to search for the file you want.

5.	The icons contained in the selected file are listed below the From File box. Scroll through the icons and select the one you want.

6.	The Label box contains the name of the source program; this will be displayed beneath the icon. If you want, change the label to a description that will make the object easier to identify.

7.	Click on OK to return to the Insert Object dialog box, then click on OK again.

Note:

This feature is useful when the document that the object is being linked or embedded into will be read on-screen and the object contains supplementary information.

When linking or embedding an object into your MasterPublisher document, check the Display As Icon check box on the Insert Object or Paste Special dialog box. The default icon will be displayed and a Change Icon button appears below it.

Tools:

Related Topics


Resizing an object
To resize an object

1.	Select the frame containing the picture object you want to resize.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Picture Attributes. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Frame Picture tab selected.

3.	In the Resizing group box, select whether you want the object to stretch to fit the frame, to center the object in the frame, tile the object or resize the frame to fit the object.

4.	Click on the close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made.

Note:

To change the actual dimensions of the object, change the size of the frame; either by dragging its handles until it is the size you want or by specifying its size on the Size and Position tab of the Frame Properties dialog box.

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected object on the page.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame containing the object you want to resize, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

Tools:

Related Topics


Moving an object
To move an object

1.	Select the frame containing the object you want to move.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the frame so that it changes shape to a four-headed arrow.

3.	Press and hold down the mouse button as you drag the frame and object to a new position. An outline of the frame acts as a guideline for positioning the frame.

4.	When the frame is in the position you want, release the mouse button. The frame and object are redrawn.

Note:

To move an object accurately, use the Size and Position tab of the Frame Properties dialog box.

Tools:

Related Topics


Cropping an object
To crop an object

1.	Select the frame containing the object you want to crop.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Crop Picture. The Picture Cropping dialog box appears with a preview of the object in the preview window.

3.	In the preview window, do one of the following:

Drag the mouse pointer over the area of the object you want to crop to. A box appears around the area you specified.

Drag the edges of the box around the object to specify the area you want to crop to.

4.	Drag the Zoom slider to zoom in and out of the crop area you specified.

5.	If you want to specify the crop area again from scratch or want to restore the object to its original state, click on the Reset button.

6.	Click on Close to close the dialog box.

Note:

The object in your document is cropped as you work in the Picture Cropping dialog box, giving you a better idea of the effect of your changes.

Tools:

Related Topics


Coloring an object
To color an object

1.	Select the frame containing the object you want to color.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Picture Attributes. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Frame Picture tab selected.

3.	Check the Custom Color check box.

4.	From the drop-down color palette, select the color you want.

5.	To make the white areas of the object transparent, check the Make white transparent check box.

6.	Click on Close to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made.

Note:

You can see the effect of your changes on the selected object on the page.

You can also left-click on a color in the color bar or right-click on the color and select Picture from the shortcut menu that appears.

If the Frame Properties dialog box obscures the frame containing the object you are coloring, you can move it by dragging its title bar to a new location.

Tools:

Related Topics


Renaming an object
To rename an object

You can change the name of a linked or embedded object in your document. You might want to do this to make the object easier to identify.

1.	From the contents box, select the object you want to rename.

2.	Click on the Item Information tool. The Object Status dialog box appears.

3.	In the Name box, type a new name for the object.

4.	Click on OK to confirm the new name.

Tools:

Related Topics


Removing an object
To remove an object

1.	From the contents box, select the object you want to remove.

2.	Click on the Delete Item tool. The object is removed from the contents list and the document.

Note:

The object is removed from your current document only. The original file remains on disk.

If you delete the last frame containing the object, the object is also removed from your document unless the object is marked as kept in the contents list.

If you want to remove the file from disk, run Windows Explorer and use the Delete command in the File menu.

Tools:

Related Topics


Printing


Displaying the printable page area
 To display the printable page area

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Select the View tab.

3.	In the View Markers group box, make sure the Printer Margins check box is checked.

4.	Click on OK. The printable area is marked by a blue dotted line.

To turn off the printer margins, clear the Printer Margins check box.

Related Topics


Previewing your document before printing
To preview your document before printing

1.	From the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box appears.

2.	Make all your choices for printing the document so that when you preview the printed document it will be completely accurate.

3.	Click on the Preview button. A preview of your printed document appears in the work area.

4.	In the Print Preview Tools, click on any of the following:

Print - to print the document.

Options - to return to the Print dialog box and change your print options.

Close - to return to the normal document view without printing the document.

Tools:

Related Topics


Setting up your printer
To set up your printer

1.	From the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box appears.

2.	On the General tab, click on Printer Setup. The Print Setup dialog box appears.

3.	From the Name drop-down list box, select the printer you want to setup.

4.	From the Size drop-down list box, specify the paper size you are using, and from the Source drop-down list box, choose the paper source.

5.	Click on Properties to display a dialog box providing various settings for the selected printer. The options on this dialog box vary depending on which printer you have selected. It is usually in this dialog box that you will set, for example, duplex printing and graphics quality.

6.	Select the appropriate options on this dialog box.

7.	Click on OK to confirm the new settings and return to the Print Setup dialog box.

8.	Click on OK to close this dialog box and return to the Print dialog box, making the printer that you have just set up the current printer.

Tools:

Related Topics


Hints and tips when setting up your printer

The default paper size depends on the country that is currently selected in your Microsoft Windows Regional Settings dialog box. For information about customizing Windows for international use, refer to your Microsoft Windows documentation.

Related Topics


Printing your document
To print your document

1.	From the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box appears.

2.	In the Printer group box, choose whether to print to file or to the selected printer.

Click on the Printer Setup button to display the Print Setup dialog box, from which you can choose a different printer and make changes to your printer setup.

3.	In the Copies group box, specify the number of copies you want to print and whether you want to collate the copies (1,2,3... 1,2,3... rather than 1,1... 2,2... 3,3 etc.).

4.	From the Page Selection group box, specify which pages you want to print.

If you are printing a mail merge document, select which records to print from the Mail Merge Selection group box.

5.	Select the Paper tab.

6.	From the Paper Mapping list box, select the way you want to print the document on the paper.

7.	From the Paper Sides group box, select whether you want to print on both sides of the paper and if you want to pause printing between sheets.

8.	Select the Options tab.

9.	In the Print group box, select which components you want to print, such as crop marks.

10.	In the Output group box, select how you want to output the document to the printer.

11.	Click on Print. The document is sent to the printer as you specified and a box appears to report the progress of the print job. To abandon printing the document, click on Cancel on this box.

Note:

The options in the Paper Mapping list box vary according to the document page type you specified on the Size & Orientation tab of the Page dialog box.

Tools:

Related Topics


Printing color separations
To print color separations

1.	From the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box appears.

2.	Select the Separations tab.

3.	Check the Print Separations check box.

4.	From the Type of Separations drop-down list box, select the type of separations you want to print.

Spot Separations - prints a separation for each spot colour defined in the current palette.

Process Separations - prints separations for cyan, magenta, yellow and black. Any spot colors in the document will be converted to their nearest process colour equivalent.

Spot & Process Separations - prints the four process color separations along with an additional separation for each spot color in the palette.

5.	From the Separations to Print list box, select the separations you want to print.

6.	If you have chosen spot separations, check the Knockout check box if you want to print items in colors other than solid black so that they knock out the colors underneath.

7.	Check the Overprint Black check box if you want to print solid black items over other colors.

8.	Check the Output Individual Separation Files check box to produce separate output files for each separation.

9.	Click on Halftone Screen Settings to set the frequency and angle for each type of separations you are using. Your imagesetting bureau can give you advice on this.

10.	Click on Print. The separations you have chosen are printed.

Note:

If you view a print preview of a document being printed as color separations, the preview will show each separation as a separate page.

Tools:

Related Topics


Printing to disk
To print to disk

1.	From the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box appears.

2.	On the General tab, check the Print to File check box.

3.	Make any other print selections you need.

4.	Click on Print. The Filename for disk output dialog box appears.

5.	Specify a folder and a name for the file.

6.	Click on Save. The file is printed to disk with the name you have chosen.

7.	You can then copy the file to a printer or give the files directly to your print bureau.

Tools:

Related Topics


Customizing MasterPublisher


Setting your preferences
To set your preferences

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Make all your preferences choices on the appropriate tab cards.

3.	Click on OK to close the dialog box and keep the changes you have made.

Related Topics


Hiding and displaying the toolbars
To hide and display the toolbars

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Select the Controls tab.

3.	In the Show Tools group box, check the appropriate check boxes. The toolbars are displayed when their check boxes are checked.

4.	Click on OK.

Note:

You can also hide and display a toolbar by selecting its name from the shortcut menu that appears when you right-click in the toolbar area.


Floating and docking the toolbars
To float and dock toolbars

You can move the toolbars so that they are attached to a different side of the desktop or even choose to have them floating freely on the desktop.

1.	Right-click on the toolbar you want to move. A shortcut menu appears.

2.	From this shortcut menu, select either Place at Bottom, Place at Top, Place at Right, Place at Left or Make Floating.

3.	The toolbar is moved to where you specified. If you floated the toolbar, it is given a title bar that you can drag to move it to a new position.

Note:

Some toolbars can only be moved to certain sides of the desktop.

You can drag a toolbar from one side to another or leave it over the work area to make it float.

To reset the toolbars to their default positions, select Reset Toolbars from the Options menu.

To arrange the toolbars according to their importance, select Auto Arrange Toolbars from the Options menu.

Related Topics


Changing the colors in MasterPublisher
To change the colors in MasterPublisher

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Select the View tab.

3.	From the list of items in the Colors group box, select which item you want to change the color of.

4.	From the drop-down color palette, select the color you want.

5.	Click on OK.

Related Topics


Showing tool tips
To show tool tips

From the Options menu, select Tool Tips. Tool tips are displayed when this menu command is checked.

Related Topics


Hiding and displaying the Help Assistant
To hide and display the Help Assistant

Do one of the following:

From the Help menu, select Show Help Assistant. The Help Assistant is displayed when this menu command is checked.

Or

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Select the Controls tab.

3.	The Help Assistant is displayed when the Help Assistant check box is checked.

4. Click on OK.

Related Topics


Hiding and displaying the controls
To hide and display the controls

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Select the Controls tab.

3.	Check the appropriate check boxes as required. The controls are shown when their check boxes are checked.

4. Click on OK.

Related Topics


Exiting MasterPublisher
To exit MasterPublisher

Do any one of the following:

From the File menu, select Exit MasterPublisher.

From the MasterPublisher Control menu, select Close.

Double-click on the MasterPublisher Control-menu icon.

Click on the Close button at the top right-hand corner of the MasterPublisher window.

If your document contains any unsaved changes you are asked whether you want to save the changes before exiting. Click on Yes or No as appropriate.

Related Topics


Keyboard shortcuts

If you are familiar with Windows, you will already know that there are many keyboard equivalents to using the mouse.

MasterPublisher provides its own additional equivalents and shortcuts, these are listed below.

Moving the text insertion point

Moving around the document

Editing keys

Menu shortcuts


Moving the text insertion point

Press	To

← →	Move the text insertion point left or right one character

↑ ↓	Move the text insertion point up or down one line

Home	Move to the beginning of the current line

End	Move to the end of the current line

Ctrl ←	Move the text insertion point to the beginning of the current word

Ctrl →	Move the text insertion point to the beginning of the next word

Ctrl ↑	Move the text insertion point to the start of the current paragraph

Ctrl ↓	Move the text insertion point to the start of the next paragraph

Ctrl Home	Move to the start of the text in the current frame

Ctrl End	Move to the end of the text in the current frame

Shift ←	Extend the text selection one character to the left

Shift →	Extend the text selection one character to the right

Shift ↑	Extend the text selection up one line

Shift ↓	Extend the text selection down one line

Shift Home	Extend the text selection to the start of the line

Shift End	Extend the text selection to the end of the line

Ctrl Shift ←	Extend the text selection to the start of the current word

Ctrl Shift →	Extend the text selection to the start of the next word

Ctrl Shift ↑	Extend the text selection to the start of the current paragraph

Ctrl Shift ↓	Extend the text selection to the end of the current paragraph


Moving around the document

Press	To

PgUp	Scroll the page up by one screen

PgDn	Scroll the page down by one screen

Alt 1	Display the document at 75% its actual size

Alt 2	Display the document at its actual size

Alt 3	Display the document at double its actual size

Alt 4	Display the document so that the whole page is visible

Alt 6	Display the document so that the width of the page fits the width of the MasterPublisher desktop

Alt 0	Display the document at half its actual size

Ctrl PgUp	Go to the first page of your document

Ctrl PgDn	Go to the last page of your document

Shift PgUp	Go to the previous page of your document or, with the right master page on screen, go to the left master page

Shift PgDn	Go to the next page of your document or, with the left master page on screen, go to the right master page. With the right (or only) master page on screen, go to the first page of your document

Note:

The function of the PgUp/PgDn and the Shift PgUp/Shift PgDn keyboard shortcuts can be reversed using the Preferences dialog box.


Editing keys

Press	To

Backspace	Delete the character to the left of the text insertion point. Also used to delete a selected frame, graphic or text selection

Delete	Delete the character to the right of the text insertion point. Also used to delete a selected frame, graphic or text selection

Alt <	Move to the previous mail merge record

Alt >	Move to the next mail merge record

Ctrl Backspace	Delete the word to the left of the text insertion point

Ctrl Delete	Delete the word to the right of the text insertion point

Ctrl B	Bold text on/off

Ctrl I	Italic text on/off

Ctrl K	Kern text

Ctrl N	Restore the font of the selected text

Ctrl U	Underlined text on/off

Ctrl Enter	Insert a line break at the text insertion point

Ctrl Space	Insert a hard space at the text insertion point

Ctrl [	Insert a single open quote at the text insertion point

Ctrl ]	Insert a single close quote at the text insertion point

Ctrl =	Insert an en dash at the text insertion point

Ctrl <	Insert a smaller < symbol

Ctrl >	Insert a smaller > symbol

Ctrl ↑	Rotate the selected frame by 45 degrees to the left

Ctrl ↓	Rotate the selected frame by 45 degrees to the right

Ctrl ←	Rotate the selected frame by 5 degrees to the left

Ctrl →	Rotate the selected frame by 5 degrees to the right

Ctrl Shift =	Insert an em dash at the text insertion point

Ctrl Shift [	Insert a double open quote at the text insertion point

Ctrl Shift ]	Insert a double close quote at the text insertion point

Ctrl Shift <	Insert left guillemets (<<) at the text insertion point

Ctrl Shift >	Insert right guillemets (>>) at the text insertion point

Ctrl Shift K	Remove any kerning from the text

Alt Ctrl Shift <	Move to the first mail merge record

Alt Ctrl Shift >	Move to the last mail merge record

Alt Ctrl Shift B	Insert a bullet point at the text insertion point

Alt Ctrl Shift C	Insert a copyright symbol at the text insertion point

Alt Ctrl Shift D	Insert a dagger (†) at the text insertion point

Alt Ctrl Shift E	Insert ellipses (…) at the text insertion point

Alt Ctrl Shift G	Insert a double dagger (‡) at the text insertion point

Alt Ctrl Shift M	Insert an em space at the text insertion point

Alt Ctrl Shift N	Insert and en space at the text insertion point

Alt Ctrl Shift O	Insert a degrees symbol at the text insertion point

Alt Ctrl Shift P	Insert a plus/minus (±) symbol at the text insertion point

Alt Ctrl Shift R	Insert a registered symbol at the text insertion point

Alt Ctrl Shift T	Insert a trademark symbol at the text insertion point

F12	Redraw the screen

Escape	If a dialog box is displayed, cancel it

Tab	When a frame is selected, select the next frame in the stacking order

Shift Tab	When a frame is selected, select the previous frame in the stacking order


Menu shortcuts

Press	To

Alt F4	Exit MasterPublisher; File menu

Alt Backspace	Undo the last command; Edit menu

Alt Enter	Display the Frame Properties dialog box; Frame menu

Alt -	Nudge the selected frame towards the back

Alt =	Nudge the selected frame towards the front

Alt #	Display the Bookmarks dialog box; Edit menu

Alt A	Select all frames on the pages that are visible (or partly visible) in the work area; Edit menu

Alt B	Select and display the Table menu

Alt E	Select and display the Edit menu

Alt F	Select and display the File menu

Alt G	Group the selected frame(s); Frame menu

Alt H	Select and display the Help menu

Alt I	Display the Align Frames dialog box; Frame menu

Alt L	Locks/unlocks the selected frame(s); Frame menu

Alt O	Select and display the Options menu

Alt P	Select and display the Page menu

Alt R	Select and display the Frame menu

Alt S	Turn Snap to Guides & Grid on/off; Document tab of Preferences dialog box

Alt T	Select and display the Text menu

Alt U	Ungroup the selected frame(s); Frame menu

Alt V	Select and display the View menu

Ctrl A	Redo the last Undo command; Edit menu

Ctrl C	Copy frame, text selection or graphic; Edit menu

Ctrl D	Display the Delete Pages dialog box; Page menu

Ctrl E	Show/hide frames and columns; View tab of Preferences dialog box

Ctrl F	Search for a word in the text; Edit menu

Ctrl G	Display the Go To Page dialog box; Page menu

Ctrl J	Show/hide rulers; Controls tab of Preferences dialog box

Ctrl M	Display the Add Pages dialog box; Page menu

Ctrl N	Restore font attributes; Restore submenu

Ctrl O	Open a MasterPublisher document; File menu

Ctrl P	Print a document; File menu

Ctrl R	Display the Replace dialog box; Edit menu

Ctrl S	Save your document; File menu

Ctrl T	Display the Character Properties dialog box; Text menu

Ctrl V	Paste in a frame, text selection or graphic; Edit menu

Ctrl W	Show/hide contents box; Controls tab of Preferences dialog box

Ctrl X	Cut a frame, text selection or graphic; Edit menu

Ctrl Y	Show/hide graphics; View tab of Preferences dialog box

Ctrl Z	Undo the last command; Edit menu

Ctrl /	Display the Insert Character dialog box; Text menu

Ctrl Alt Shift -	Send the selected frame to the back; Frame menu

Ctrl Alt Shift =	Send the selected frame to the front; Frame menu

Ctrl Shift A	Display the page at actual size; View menu

Ctrl Shift C	Display stacked pages; View menu

Ctrl Shift F	Display facing pages; View menu

Ctrl Shift I	Display at single page view; View menu

Ctrl Shift N	Restore paragraph style attributes; Restore submenu

Ctrl Shift P	Display the page at full page size; View menu

Ctrl Shift S	Display the current page scaled to fit the current selection

Ctrl Shift T	Display tiled pages; View menu

Ctrl Shift W	Display the current page scaled to fit the width of the window

F1	Start the Help facility; Help menu

Note:

When using any of the shortcuts that include numbers, use the numeric keys on the main keyboard, not those on the numeric keypad.


File menu

Click on the menu command for which you want help.

Hint:

When you a highlight a menu command the information line displays a prompt for how to use that command.


Edit menu

Click on the menu command for which you want help.

Hint:

When you highlight a command the information line displays a prompt for how to use that command.


View menu

Click on the menu command for which you want help.

Hint:

When you highlight a command the information line displays a prompt for how to use that command.


Page menu

Click on the menu command for which you want help.

Hint:

When you highlight a command the information line displays a prompt for how to use that command.


Frame menu

Click on the menu command for which you want help.

Hint:

When you highlight a command the information line displays a prompt for how to use that command.


Text menu

Click on the menu command for which you want help.

Hint:

When you highlight a command the information line displays a prompt for how to use that command.


Table menu

Click on the menu command for which you want help.

Hint:

When you highlight a command the information line displays a prompt for how to use that command.


Options menu

Click on the menu command for which you want help.

Hint:

When you highlight a command the information line displays a prompt for how to use that command.


Help menu

Click on the menu command for which you want help.

Hint:

When you highlight a command the information line displays a prompt for how to use that command.


FILE MENU


Click on this menu command to create a new document. The New dialog box appears, from which you can choose a blank page or an existing document to base your new one on.


Click on this menu command to open a document that you have previously saved. The Open dialog box appears.


Click on this menu command to save the active document with its current filename. If the document has not already been saved the Save Document As dialog box appears, where you can specify a name and location to save your document.


Click on this menu command to save a new unsaved document or to save an existing document with a different filename or in a different location. The Save Document As dialog box appears.

Choose a disk drive and folder to save the document to and type a filename.


Click on this menu command to insert a design snippet into your document. The Insert Design Snippet dialog box appears, from which you can choose the design snippet you want to insert.


Click on this menu command to save the selected frame(s) as a design snippet that you can later insert into other documents. The Save As Design Snippet dialog box appears, from which you can specify a name and location for your design snippet.


Click on this menu command to import a picture into your MasterPublisher document. The Import Picture dialog box appears, from which you can choose the picture you want to import.


Click on this menu command to scan a picture into MasterPublisher. The Scan Picture dialog box appears.

Select the scanner you want to use. Click on Acquire to display the scanner’s TWAIN dialog box and begin scanning.


Click on this menu command to import text that you have previously created and saved in another program. The Import Text dialog box appears. Select the format of the text file and select the file.

When you import the text the filename will appear in the contents box.


Click on this menu command to export text that you have created in MasterPublisher so that you can use it and edit it further in other programs. The Export Text dialog box appears. Choose a location and filename for your text.


Click on this menu command to enter or view information about the current document. The information you can save includes author’s name, the subject of the document and comments about the document.


Click on this menu command to display a submenu from which you can select a language dictionary for spell-checking and hyphenating your document.

You will only be able to select English unless you have purchased additional language packs.


Click on this menu command to print the current document. The Print dialog box appears, from which you can select all your printing options.


Click on this menu command to open the Edit Mailing List dialog box, with which you can select a mailing list to use in your document, create a new mailing list or edit a mailing list.


Click on this menu command to save the current document to a temporary file and start up your electronic mail program. Once your electronic mail program has opened, a new message will be opened and the temporary file will be attached to it.

In order for this command to be enabled you must have a MAPI-compatible electronic mail program installed e.g. Microsoft Exchange.


Click on this menu command to export your MasterPublisher document as a Web document that you can then open in an Internet browser.


These commands are the filenames of the most recently opened documents. Select the document you want to open, after a few moments it will appear in MasterPublisher.


Click on this menu command to close MasterPublisher. If the current document contains any unsaved changes a message box appears, giving you the opportunity to save or abandon those changes or cancel the exit command.


EDIT MENU


Click on this menu command to undo the last action performed.

You cannot undo commands that do not affect your document’s content, such as opening a document, scrolling a window or making selections in a dialog box.


Click on this menu command to abandon the previous Undo command.


Click on this menu command to remove selected frames, blocks of text and graphics from your document and place them on the Clipboard ready to be pasted into another location.


Click on this menu command to copy selected frames, blocks of text and graphics to the Clipboard, without removing the originals from the page.


Click on this menu command to paste the contents of the Clipboard into your current document. If the contents of the Clipboard comes from an OLE source application, the item will be embedded rather than pasted.


Click on this menu command to specify the format that the contents of the Clipboard are pasted, linked or embedded as. The Paste Special dialog box appears.


Click on this menu command to remove the selected object(s) from the page without placing it on the Clipboard. Any object(s) that you delete cannot be pasted back into the document.


Click on this menu command to remove the contents of the selected frame.


Click on this menu command to select all the frames on the visible or partly visible pages are selected.


Click on this menu command to search for a specific word(s) of text. The Find dialog box appears. When MasterPublisher finds the word(s), it is highlighted as a selected block.


Click on this menu command to search for a specific word(s) and replace it with another. The Find & Replace dialog box appears. Type in the word(s) you want to search for and the word(s) you want to replace it with.


Click on this menu command to add, edit or delete colors in the color palette or to load and save a color palette. The Colors dialog box appears.


Click on this menu command to make changes to the selected object, picture or PowerText object.


Click on this menu command to create a new object or insert an existing file into your document. The Insert Object dialog box appears.


Click on this menu command to specify either manual or automatic updating for each link, to open the source file of a selected link for editing or to reconnect a link to a new name and location. The Links dialog box appears.


Click on this menu command to add, edit and remove bookmarks in your document. The Bookmarks dialog box appears.


Click on this menu command to create, edit or remove Web hyperlinks in your document.


VIEW MENU


Click on this menu command to view your document at its actual size (100%).


Click on this menu command to view the full page of your document scaled to fit into the MasterPublisher window. The size will vary according to the size of the window and page.


Click on this menu command to make the page width of your document fit the width of the MasterPublisher window. The size will vary according to the size of the window and page.


Click on this menu command to fit the selected object to the MasterPublisher window. This is useful for working in fine detail.


Click on this menu command if you want to view one page of the document in the work area at a time.


Click on this menu command to view facing pages of your document in the work area. E.g. Pages 2 and 3 would be displayed at the same time.


Click on this menu command to stack the pages of your document in a column. Use the scroll bar to scroll up and down through the pages.


Click on this menu command to tile the pages of your document. MasterPublisher determines the best way to tile the pages for you.


PAGE MENU


Click on this menu command to specify the size and orientation of the pages in your document. The Page dialog box appears with the Size & Orientation tab selected.


Click on this menu command to specify the width of your margins, your column guides and the position of the headers and footers. The Page dialog box appears with the Margins & Columns tab selected.


Click on this menu command to add and edit page numbers in your document. The Page dialog box appears with the Page Numbers tab selected.


Click on this menu command to edit the headers in your document. The header frame is selected and the Header and Footer Tools appear. You can type directly into the frame or use the tools provided.


Click on this menu command to edit the footers in your document. The footer frame is selected and the Header and Footer Tools appear. You can type directly into the frame or use the tools provided.


Click on this menu command to add extra pages to your document. The Add Pages dialog box appears. You can add pages before or after the current page.


Click on this menu command to delete pages from your document. The Delete Pages dialog box appears.


Click on this menu command to go to a specific page in your document. The Go To Page dialog box appears.


FRAME MENU


Click on this menu command to specify the shape of the selected frame(s), if the frame(s) repel text and how much the frame(s) repels the text around it. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Shape tab selected.


Click on this menu command to specify the size, position and angle of rotation of the selected frame(s) and whether or not you want to lock the frame(s) in position. The Frame Properties dialog box appears with the Size and Position tab selected.


Click on this menu command to add, edit or remove a border from the selected frame(s). The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Border Styles tab selected.


Click on this menu command to change the background properties of the selected frame(s). The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Background tab selected.


Click on this menu command to change the way the picture(s) in the selected frame(s) is displayed. The Frame Properties dialog box appears, with the Frame Picture tab selected.


Click on this menu command to change the way text appears in the selected frame(s). The Frame Properties dialog box appears with the Frame Text tab selected.


Click on this menu command to align the selected frames to each other. The Align dialog box appears.


Click on this menu command to crop the picture in the selected frame. The Picture Cropping dialog box appears, with which you can specify how to crop the picture.


Click on this menu command to lock the selected frame(s) in their positions. The frame(s) cannot be moved, resized or rotated until they are unlocked.


Click on this menu command to repeat the selected frame(s) on other pages in your document. The Repeat on Pages dialog box appears, from which you can select which pages you want to repeat the frame(s) on.


Click on this menu command to move the selected frame(s) to the front of the other frames on the page.


Click on this menu command to move the selected frame(s) to the back of the other frames on the page.


Click on this menu command to move the selected frame(s) in front of the frame that was previously in front of it.


Click on this menu command to move the selected frame(s) behind the frame that was previously behind it.


Click on this menu command to group the selected frames together so that they act as one object.


Click on this menu command to ungroup a frame or group of frames.


Click on this menu command to ungroup the selected metafile graphic into its components, which you can then re-color and edit. The components of the metafile remain grouped together. You can ungroup this group so that the components are independent of each other.


TEXT MENU


Click on this menu command to select a font, point size and style for the selected text or text you are about to type. The Character Properties dialog box appears with the Font tab selected.


Click on this menu command to set the alignment and indents for the selected text or text you are about to type. The Override Paragraph Style dialog box appears with the Indents & Layout tab selected.


Click on this menu command to adjust the letter, line and character spacing of the selected text or text you are about to type. The Override Paragraph Style dialog box appears with the Spacing tab selected.


Click on this menu command to select a bullet or number style for the selected text or text you are about to type. The Override Paragraph Style dialog box appears with the Bullets & Numbering tab selected.


Click on this menu command to select a drop caps style for the selected text or text you are about to type. The Override Paragraph Style dialog box appears with the Drop Caps tab selected.


Click on this menu command to display the Restore submenu, from which you can choose to restore the font or paragraph style attributes to the selected text.


Click on this menu command to change the attributes of the current paragraph style to match the currently selected text.


Click on this menu command to add, delete or edit a paragraph style. The Paragraph Styles dialog box appears.


Click on this menu command to display the Case submenu, from which you can choose to have your selected text all upper case, all lower case or a combination of upper and lower case.


Click on this menu command to display the Insert submenu, from which you can choose to insert a field, mail merge field, character, page break or frame break.


Click on this menu command to automatically flow a whole piece of text into a document. MasterPublisher adds as many new pages and frames as are needed.


Click on this menu command to check through the text for spelling mistakes. When a spelling mistake is found it is highlighted and you are given the option of correcting it.


Click on this menu command to display a list of meanings and synonyms for a selected word. The Thesaurus dialog box appears. Select an alternative word if you prefer.


TABLE MENU


Click on this menu command to insert a table into your document. The Insert Table dialog box appears, from which you can specify the number of rows and columns you want and the style for the table.

If you have selected a block of tabulated text, this menu command changes to Convert to Table, which changes the selected text into a table.


Click on this menu command to add an extra row to the selected table. The new row is added below the currently selected row.


Click on this menu command to add an extra column to your table. The new column is added to the right-hand side of the currently selected column.


Click on this menu command to combine the selected cells so that the contents of each cell appear in one cell.


Click on this menu command to split cells that have been merged together back into their individual cells.


Click on this menu command to select every cell in the row that your cursor is currently positioned in.


Click on this menu command to select all the cells in the column that your cursor is currently positioned in.


Click on this menu command to select every cell in the selected table.


Click on this menu command to determine how you want the selected table to appear on the page. The Table Auto Style dialog box appears.


Click on this menu command to specify the borders and background style for the selected cell(s). The Table Cell Properties dialog box appears.


Click on this menu command to insert an auto sum field in the currently selected cell. MasterPublisher will automatically add up the figures in the cells directly above this cell and display the total in the auto sum field.


OPTIONS MENU


Click on this menu command to specify options for the way in which MasterPublisher works, including the way it starts, how it looks and how your spelling checker works. The Preferences dialog box appears.


Click on this menu command to reset the toolbars to their default positions and settings.


Click on this menu command to give each of the toolbars a ‘weighting’ or importance. When you drag them around, certain toolbars take priority and assume the most prominent positions.

This command is checked when the toolbars are ‘weighted'.


Click on this menu command to turn the display of small tool hints on and off.

This command is checked when tool tips are displayed.


Click on this menu command to make sure that the way the desktop is organized and the folder paths from which you last opened a document and imported text and pictures are remembered when you close down MasterPublisher and restored when you next open it.

This command is checked when your settings will be saved.


HELP MENU


Click on this menu command to display the Help Topics dialog box, from which you can view Help about using MasterPublisher or search for a specific topic.


Click on this menu command to turn the display of the Help Assistant on and off. This command is checked when the Help Assistant is displayed.


Click on this menu command to display the MasterPublisher billboard. This shows the version number of the program you are using and a copyright notice.


The text you are searching for has been found, but it cannot be shown because it has not been placed in a frame or overflows the last frame of the story.

You have a piece of text in your document that overflows the frames it has been placed into. The text that you are searching for has been found in a part of the text that is not placed in a frame on the page.

To display the text, flow the remainder of the text story into new frames so that it is all shown on the page.


DirectX has become corrupted. Please re-install DirectX

DirectX is needed to use PowerText effectively. To solve the problem, you need to re-install DirectX onto your PC.


An error has occurred in DirectX. PowerText will close. Please save any changes you wish to keep.

An error has occurred in DirectX which you need to run PowerText effectively. This will cause PowerText to close down. Any changes you have made will be lost unless you save them now.


 Unable to activate the object. The object's program cannot be located.

You are trying to edit an object whose source program is no longer available, i.e. it has been moved or deleted. You cannot edit the object until its source program is available again. Click on OK to close the message box then, depending on the problem, try one of the following:

Using Windows Explorer, search for the source program and, if located, move it back to its original location

Reinstall the source program in which you created the object.


 This document is already in use.

You are trying to open a document that another user already has open; you cannot open a document that is already being used.

Click on OK to close the message box, then ask the other user to close the document before trying again.


 Unable to lock this file for writing - check that you can access the folder.

You cannot save this document. Check that you have write access to the folder in which you are trying to save the file. If you do not have write access to that folder, try saving the document into another folder.


 There are too many documents in use.

MasterPublisher cannot open the document because there are too many documents already in use. Check to see if you have more than one copy of MasterPublisher running and close any that you don't need.


 File not found:

Path + *.HYP

Your document will not be hyphenated automatically; the hyphenation rules file cannot be found.

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to load the hyphenation rules file *.HYP. Click on OK to close the message box and then, depending on the problem, try one of the following:

The file is not in the \PUBLISH folder where MasterPublisher is installed; locate the file and place it in this folder using Windows Explorer

The file is corrupt; reinstall MasterPublisher then try again.


 Unable to complete OLE registration. The Type Library file is missing or corrupt.

MasterPublisher was unable to complete OLE registration of this file. The Type Library file is missing or corrupt. Reinstall MasterPublisher and try again.


Unable to complete OLE registration. Failed to register program successfully.

MasterPublisher was unable to complete OLE registration of this file. Reinstall MasterPublisher and try again.


 Do you want the unfinished Replace All commands to be completed?

Do you want any unfinished Replace All commands to be completed before the spell-check is cancelled?

Click on Yes to replace all remaining occurrences of the spelling mistake with the correction before the spell-check is cancelled; click on No to cancel the spell-check without making any further changes.


 Spelling check completed. None of the <language> text was checked; you do not have an appropriate language dictionary installed.

Spell-checking has been completed, but text of the above language was not checked; you do not have an appropriate language dictionary installed. For example, if you have not purchased a separate language pack, you will be able to spell-check English text only.

Click on OK to return to your document.


 Word not found in Thesaurus. Do you want to look up another word?

You are looking up a word that is not in the MasterPublisher Thesaurus. Do you want to look up another word?

Click on Yes to return to the Thesaurus dialog box, then enter the new word you want to look up; click on No to close the Thesaurus dialog box and return to your document.


 Word not found in Thesaurus

You are looking up a word that is not in the MasterPublisher Thesaurus.

Click on OK to return to your document.


 The thesaurus file for <language> is not available. Continue with Thesaurus?

The language in which this text is written does not have a thesaurus file, or the thesaurus file could not be loaded.

Not all language packs contain a thesaurus file.

Click on Yes to return to the Thesaurus dialog box; click on No to close the Thesaurus dialog box and return to your document.


 Cannot run <utility name>: <problem>

The utility you attempted to run cannot be opened, this could be due to insufficient memory or because the search path is invalid.

(a) If there is insufficient memory available to run this utility, click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some memory:

Close any programs you aren't using

Reduce Windows programs you are running in the background to icons

Clear the contents of the Clipboard

Remove any unnecessary fonts from your Windows Setup

If you are using ATM, reduce the size of its font cache

If you are using a desktop wallpaper, select Display from the Windows Control Panel, then set the Wallpaper option to None

Make sure you have enough hard disk space free for Windows to create and use swap files

Close and restart Windows.

If you regularly experience memory problems you should consider adding more memory to your computer. The more memory your computer has, the better your programs will perform. Contact your computer dealer for details of upgrading your memory.

(b) If the search path specified for this utility is no longer valid; the utility has probably been moved or deleted. Search paths are specified in the Windows 95 Registry under the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\GST\UTILITIES\GENERAL key. Click on OK to close the message box then, depending on the problem, do one of the following:

If the utility has been deleted, reinstall it then ensure that the registry key points to the new search path

If the utility has been moved, edit the Registry key to specify its new location.


Due to an unexpected shutdown this document contains unsaved changes. Would you like to recover these?

The document that has been selected for loading contains unsaved changes. Would you like to resume working on these changes?

Click on Yes to open the backup file and resume work on it; click on No to open the document at the last full save.


 Due to an unexpected shutdown the MasterPublisher file <filename> contains unsaved changes. Do you wish to recover these now?
Click on Yes to open the file and resume work on it;
Click on No to start MasterPublisher as usual.

When you last ran MasterPublisher it closed unexpectedly, e.g. your computer crashed. As a result this file contains unsaved changes. Do you want to open this file?

Click on Yes to open the file and resume work on it; click on No to start MasterPublisher as usual.


 Can't read/write file <filename>.

One of the files required for the spell checker or thesaurus cannot be opened. If this file is not available the spell checker or thesaurus may not work correctly. Reinstall MasterPublisher.


 There is insufficient memory to display the <name> dialog box.

There is insufficient memory available for MasterPublisher to display this dialog box. Click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some memory:

Close any programs you aren't using

Reduce Windows programs you are running in the background to icons

Remove any unnecessary fonts from your Windows Setup

If you are using ATM, reduce the size of its font cache

If you are using a desktop wallpaper, select Display from the Windows Control Panel, then set the Wallpaper option to None

Make sure you have enough hard disk space free for Windows to create and use swap files

Close and restart Windows.

If you regularly experience memory problems you should consider adding more memory to your computer. The more memory your computer has, the better your programs will perform. Contact your computer dealer for details of upgrading your memory.


 >The document cannot be saved; there is insufficient space on disk (*:).

The disk to which you are trying to save has insufficient disk space available. Click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some disk space:

Delete program files or documents that you no longer need or use

Use ScanDisk to search for and repair lost clusters that are taking up space on your hard disk.

If the disk still has insufficient space, try saving to a different disk.


 The document cannot be automatically backed up; there is insufficient space on disk (*:). A warning beep will remind you to save manually.

The disk to which MasterPublisher saves your document files has insufficient disk space available; your document cannot be been backed up. Until some disk space is made available, a warning beep will be issued to remind you to save your document. Click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some disk space:

Delete program files or documents that you no longer need or use

Use ScanDisk to search for and repair lost clusters that are taking up space on your hard disk.

If the disk still has insufficient space, try saving the document to a different disk; future backups of your document are also saved to this disk.


 The document cannot be saved; there is insufficient space on the disk that Windows uses for temporary files (*:).

When you save a document, MasterPublisher creates temporary files on your hard disk. These temporary files are stored in the folder specified in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file using the set temp= command. There is currently insufficient disk space available in which to store these temporary files. Click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some disk space:

Delete program files or documents that you no longer need or use

Use ScanDisk to search for and repair lost clusters that are taking up space on your hard disk.

Please ensure that your disk has at least three times as much space as the largest .DTP file you are likely to create. If you have more than one hard disk, you should specify that temporary files be stored on the fastest hard disk.


 The object cannot be inserted; there is insufficient space on the disk that Windows uses for temporary files (*:).

When you insert an object into your document, MasterPublisher creates temporary files on your hard disk. These temporary files are stored in the folder specified in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file using the set temp= command. There is currently insufficient disk space available in which to store these temporary files. Click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some disk space:

Delete program files or documents that you no longer need or use

Use ScanDisk to search for and repair lost clusters that are taking up space on your hard disk.

Please ensure that your disk has at least three times as much space as the largest .DTP file you are likely to create. If you have more than one hard disk, you should specify that temporary files be stored on the fastest hard disk.

Note: You are particularly likely to have problems if the set temp= command is set to your RAM drive. Making a RAM drive large enough for temporary files will probably take up too much memory, which could make your entire system slower, or even prevent Windows from running.


Unexpected end of file.

MasterPublisher could not finish reading the file.

Click on OK to close the message box, then re-start MasterPublisher and try the operation again. If this does not work, try opening the backup (.BAK) file or a previously saved version.


Error reading file.

MasterPublisher is unable to read the file, this could be because the file is corrupted.

Click on OK to close the message box, then re-start MasterPublisher and try the operation again. If this does not work, revert to a previously saved version.


Error writing file.

You cannot save this document. Check that you have write access to the folder in which you are trying to save the file. If you do not have write access to that folder, try saving the document into another folder.


Unable to open file.

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to open the document. Click on OK to close the message box and then try one of the following:

There is insufficient memory to open the document; free some memory by closing down other programs then try again.

Another user or program has the document open already; close the document then try again.

Check that the file has not been moved or deleted.

The document is corrupt; try opening the backup (.BAK) file or a previously saved version instead.


Unable to get data from Clipboard.

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to paste from the Clipboard. Click on OK to close the message box then try one of the following:

Free some memory by closing down other programs then try again.

Use Paste Special from the Edit menu to paste the item in a different format.

Copy the object onto the Clipboard again.


A file operation was attempted with no open file.

A file operation was attempted with no open file.


Tried to open file with invalid mode.

You have tried to open a file with an invalid mode.


Tried to read from a file opened for writing.

You have tried to read from a file opened for writing.


Tried to write to a file opened for reading.

You have tried to write to a file opened for reading.


The filter library cannot be loaded.

MasterPublisher cannot load the filter library needed to complete this operation.

The filter libraries are stored in: PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\SYSTEM\FILTERS and are named *00n.dll, where * is the filter type and n is a version number e.g. bmp001.dll.

Click on OK to close the message box, then check that these filters have not been moved or deleted.

If the filters are there, re-start MasterPublisher and try again.

If the filters are not there, re-install MasterPublisher.


The filter library is broken.

MasterPublisher cannot complete the operation because the filter library needed is broken.

The filter libraries are stored in: PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\SYSTEM\FILTERS and are named *00n.dll, where * is the filter type and n is a version number e.g. bmp001.dll.

Click on OK to close the message box, then re-install MasterPublisher.

If this does not work, contact Technical Support.


The filter library cannot be found.

MasterPublisher cannot find the filter library needed to complete this operation.

The filter libraries are stored in: PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\SYSTEM\FILTERS and are named *00n.dll, where * is the filter type and n is a version number e.g. bmp001.dll.

Click on OK to close the message box, then check that these filters have not been moved or deleted.

If the filters are there, re-start MasterPublisher and try again.

If the filters are not there, re-install MasterPublisher.


No filter libraries can be found.

MasterPublisher cannot find any filter libraries.

The filter libraries are stored in: PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\SYSTEM\FILTERS and are named *00n.dll, where * is the filter type and n is a version number e.g. bmp001.dll.

Click on OK to close the message box, then check that these filters have not been moved or deleted.

If the filters are there, re-start MasterPublisher and try again.

If the filters are not there, re-install MasterPublisher.


An unknown error has occurred.

An unknown error has occurred.

Re-start MasterPublisher and try again.


Not enough memory.

There is insufficient memory available for MasterPublisher to carry out your command. Click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some memory:

Close any programs you aren't using

Reduce Windows programs you are running in the background to icons

Clear the contents of the Clipboard

Remove any unnecessary fonts from your Windows Setup

If you are using ATM, reduce the size of its font cache

If you are using a desktop wallpaper, select Display from the Windows Control Panel, then set the Wallpaper option to None

Make sure you have enough hard disk space free for Windows to create and use swap files

Close and restart Windows.

If you regularly experience memory problems you should consider adding more memory to your computer. The more memory your computer has, the better your programs will perform. Contact your computer dealer for details of upgrading your memory.


Not enough virtual memory.

You do not have enough virtual memory to execute this command.

1.	Open the Control Panel.

2.	Double-click on the System icon. The System Properties dialog box appears.

3.	Select the Performance tab. The Performance tab card is brought to the front.

4.	Click on the Virtual Memory button. The Virtual Memory dialog box appears.

5.	In the Virtual memory group box, select Let Windows manage my virtual memory settings or increase the maximum amount of virtual memory.

You cannot make the maximum more than the amount of free space on your disk.

7.	Click on OK to close the Virtual Memory dialog box and return to the System Properties dialog box.

8.	Click on OK to close the System Properties dialog box and return to the Control Panel.

9.	Close the Control Panel.

Try the operation again.


This picture is too big to be imported.

You are attempting to import a picture that has a large file size and there is not enough memory to execute the command.

Click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some memory:

Close any programs you aren't using

Reduce Windows programs you are running in the background to icons

Clear the contents of the Clipboard

Remove any unnecessary fonts from your Windows Setup

If you are using ATM, reduce the size of its font cache

If you are using a desktop wallpaper, select Display from the Windows Control Panel, then set the Wallpaper option to None

Make sure you have enough hard disk space free for Windows to create and use swap files

Close and restart Windows.

If you regularly experience memory problems you should consider adding more memory to your computer. The more memory your computer has, the better your programs will perform. Contact your computer dealer for details of upgrading your memory.


Internal filter error.

MasterPublisher cannot complete the operation because the filter library needed has incurred an error.

The filter libraries are stored in: PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\SYSTEM\FILTERS and are named *00n.dll, where * is the filter type and n is a version number e.g. bmp001.dll.

Click on OK to close the message box, then try one of the following:

Re-install MasterPublisher

If that does not work, contact Technical Support.


This text cannot be interpreted.

You are trying to open a piece of text that MasterPublisher cannot interpret.

Is it a file type that is recognized by MasterPublisher? If not, take it to WordPad or another text editing program and save it as a different type.

If this does not work, re-install MasterPublisher and try again.


Unable to store text.

MasterPublisher cannot export the text you are trying to export. This could be because you do not have write access to the folder you are attempting to export to, MasterPublisher cannot interpret the file type you are attempting to export it as or the appropriate filter library has been lost or corrupted.

Click on OK to close the message box, then check the following:

Do you have write access to the folder you are attempting to export to?

Re-install MasterPublisher and try again.


The file operation was cancelled.

The command you are trying to execute has been cancelled.

Click on OK to close the message box, then re-start MasterPublisher and try again.


To use a MasterDraw picture, either copy and paste it via the Clipboard, export it from MasterDraw in GEM Artline 2 format or insert it as a MasterDraw OLE object.

If you want to include a MasterDraw picture in your MasterPublisher document, do one of the following:

Copy the picture onto the Clipboard and paste it into your document.

Export the picture from MasterDraw in GEM Artline 2 format then import it into your MasterPublisher document.

Insert the picture into your document as a MasterDraw OLE object.


This file contains badly compressed information.

You are trying to access a file that has not been compressed properly. This could be because the file has become corrupted.

Click on OK to close the message box.

Do you have a previously saved version of the image? If so, use this and try again.


This RTF file cannot be interpreted.

You are trying to open an RTF file that MasterPublisher cannot interpret.

Is it a file type that is recognized by MasterPublisher? If not, take it to WordPad or another text editing program and save it as a different type.


 Some of the files could be imported.

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to import the file (including using the drag & drop technique). Click on OK to close the message box and then, depending on the problem, try one of the following:

There is insufficient memory to import the file; free some memory then try again.

Another user has the file open; ask them to close the file then try again.

The file is of a file format unknown to MasterPublisher; open the program in which the file was created and save it to a file format that MasterPublisher recognizes.

The file has been saved with an incorrect file extension, e.g. its file format might be .TXT but it has the .RTF file extension. Make sure the file extension reflects the true format of the file.

The file is corrupt; if available try importing a backup file instead.


Badly structured field in DCA/RFT file.

You are trying to open a DCA/RFT file that MasterPublisher cannot interpret.

Is it a file type that is recognized by MasterPublisher? If not, take it to WordPad or another text editing program and save it as a different type.


This is not a valid DTP file.

You are trying to open a file that is not a valid MasterPublisher DTP file or is a MasterPublisher file has become corrupted.

Click on OK to close the message box.

Do you have a previously saved version of the MasterPublisher DTP? If so, use this and try again.


Incompatible document format.

You are trying to open a document whose format MasterPublisher does not recognize.


 Do you want to save your changes?

The current document contains unsaved changes. Do you want to save these changes before you continue?

Click on Yes to save the changes to your document. If the document is untitled, MasterPublisher prompts you to specify a name for the document by displaying the Save Document As dialog box. Click on No to abandon the unsaved changes; click on Cancel to cancel the command you selected and continue working on your document.


 Thesaurus error.

The thesaurus has encountered an error and will not work correctly. We suggest you try the following remedies in the order presented:

Quit and restart MasterPublisher

Quit MasterPublisher and Windows, then restart both

Re-install MasterPublisher.

If the thesaurus still doesn't work after trying all these options, contact our technical support service.


 Word not found in Thesaurus; you do not have an appropriate language dictionary installed. Do you want to select a different language dictionary?

The language dictionary you have specified on the Thesaurus dialog box is not installed; you cannot look up words of this language. For example, if you have not purchased a separate language pack, you will be able to look up English words only. Do you want to choose a different language dictionary?

Click on Yes to return to the Thesaurus dialog box, then specify the language of the word you want to look up; click on No to close the Thesaurus dialog box and return to your document.


 <filename> cannot be saved.

The file you are trying to save cannot be saved. Click on OK to close the message box and then check the following:

That the full file path and name is correct

That you have the rights to save this document

That the disk you are trying to save on is not corrupt, full or damaged.


 There is insufficient memory to load the default font table.

There is insufficient memory available for MasterPublisher to load the default font table. Click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some memory:

Close any programs you aren't using

Reduce Windows programs you are running in the background to icons

Clear the contents of the Clipboard

Remove any unnecessary fonts from your Windows Setup

If you are using ATM, reduce the size of its font cache

If you are using a desktop wallpaper, select Display from the Control Panel, then set the Wallpaper option to None

Make sure you have enough hard disk space free for Windows to create and use swap files

Close and restart Windows.

If you regularly experience memory problems you should consider adding more memory to your computer. The more memory your computer has, the better your programs will perform. Contact your computer dealer for details of upgrading your memory.


 You have reached the limit of graphics per frame.

You are trying to draw a graphic in a frame that already contains the maximum number of graphics. Click on OK to return to your document, then do any of the following:

Delete one or more of the existing graphics from the frame

Draw the graphic in a different frame.


 Are you sure you want to abandon printing?

Do you really want to abandon printing your document?

Click on Yes to abandon printing; click on No to continue printing.


 No timers available for automatic backup.

Windows has run out of timers and has none free to allocate for the automatic backup command. If you are running lots of Windows programs or have lots of files open, close any that you don't need. This will free up some timers and the automatic backup should be able to happen.


 Spelling checker error.

The spell checker has encountered an error and will not work correctly. We suggest you try the following remedies in the order presented:

Quit and restart MasterPublisher

Quit MasterPublisher and Windows then restart both

Re-install MasterPublisher.

If the spell checker still doesn't work after trying all these options, contact our technical support service.


 The Select dialog box cannot be displayed.

There is insufficient memory for this dialog box to be displayed.

Click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some memory:

Close any programs you aren't using

Reduce Windows programs you are running in the background to icons

Clear the contents of the Clipboard.


 Unable to scan from this device.

MasterPublisher cannot scan from the selected driver. This may be because of a memory shortage or because your scanner installation has become corrupted.

Click on OK to close the message box, then reinstall your TWAIN device driver and try again.

For information that is specific to the operation of your scanner, please refer to your scanner documentation or contact your scanner manufacturer.


There is insufficient memory to execute this command.

There is insufficient memory available for MasterPublisher to carry out your command. Click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some memory:

Close any programs you aren't using

Reduce Windows programs you are running in the background to icons

Clear the contents of the Clipboard

Remove any unnecessary fonts from your Windows Setup

If you are using ATM, reduce the size of its font cache

If you are using a desktop wallpaper, select Display from the Windows Control Panel, then set the Wallpaper option to None

Make sure you have enough hard disk space free for Windows to create and use swap files

Close and restart Windows.

If you regularly experience memory problems you should consider adding more memory to your computer. The more memory your computer has, the better your programs will perform. Contact your computer dealer for details of upgrading your memory.


 The scanned image cannot be copied.

Your TWAIN device driver has produced an error, probably because it has become corrupted.

Click on OK to close the message box, then reinstall your TWAIN device driver and try again.

For information that is specific to the operation of your scanner, please refer to your scanner documentation or contact your scanner manufacturer.

Alternatively, it could be that there is insufficient memory for this image to be scanned.

Click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some memory:

Close any programs you aren't using

Reduce Windows programs you are running in the background to icons

Clear the contents of the Clipboard.


 The text could not be found.

The word or phrase you are searching for cannot be found.

Click on OK to close the message box.


 You do not have a default printer selected; use the Windows Control Panel to select one.

This message appears when you start MasterPublisher without having a default printer selected in your Windows setup. Until you select a default printer you will have the following problems when using MasterPublisher:

The print border will not appear, i.e. the printable area of the page will not be indicated

The text within your document will be formatted using screen fonts only

You will not be able to print your document.

Click on OK to close the message box then, using the Windows Control Panel, check that you have installed at least one printer and that one is set up as the default printer.


 You have not selected any text to be spell-checked.

Your document has not been spell-checked; you haven't selected any text. Click on OK to return to your document, then do any of the following to select the text to be spell-checked:

To spell-check your whole document, ensure that no frames or blocks of text are selected

To spell-check a piece of text, select a frame containing all or part of the text. The whole text will be spell-checked, even if it continues into another frame

To spell-check unnamed text that you have entered directly into a frame, select the frame. Only the text in that frame will be spell-checked.

To spell-check a block of text, select the text.


 Autoflow has been interrupted; part of your text may be unplaced.

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to autoflow the text. Click on OK to close the message box then, depending on the problem, try one of the following:

There is insufficient memory to autoflow the text; free some memory then try again.

The text has filled the maximum number of pages; part of the text is still unplaced.

If each page has more room through which you can flow the text, delete the pages that autoflow created and then, on page 1 of your document, enlarge the existing frames and/or draw some new ones. Reflow the text through these additional frames, then autoflow again. The text may now fit within the page limit.

If part of the text is still unplaced, remove it from your document. Open the program in which the text was created, then divide it in two and save it as two separate files. Import and autoflow each file into a separate MasterPublisher document.


 The text cannot be placed on two successive pages; autoflow has been abandoned.

MasterPublisher has been unable to carry out the autoflow command. This is probably because the frame to be copied is too small to contain any text, so creating another page with the same frame isn't going to help.

Check that the frame you are trying to autoflow the text into is larger than the point size of the text.


 >Unable to generate frame outline.

There is insufficient memory for the frame outline to be generated.

Click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some memory:

Close any programs you aren't using

Reduce Windows programs you are running in the background to icons

Clear the contents of the Clipboard.


 Could not start virtual memory manager.

MasterPublisher has encountered a memory error; save your document, then restart Windows.

If the message persists, note what you did before the problem occurred, then contact technical support service. State that you are using MasterPublisher and give the version number; you can find this by selecting About MasterPublisher from the Help menu.


 Decorative borders cannot be displayed in rotated frames.

You have either rotated a PowerText frame that has a decorative border, or you have applied a decorative border to a rotated PowerText frame.

Decorative borders cannot be applied to frames that have been rotated.


 You have reached the limit of 64 points per frame edge.

You are trying to add a point to a frame edge that already contains 64 points; you cannot add more than 64 points to any one frame edge.

Click on OK to return to your document, then delete one or more of the existing points from the frame edge before trying to add another one.


 Your document cannot be saved. Either the folder does not exist, you do not have sufficient rights to the folder, the document is read-only or there is a file sharing violation.

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to save your document. Click on OK to close the message box then, depending on the problem, try one of the following:

The folder you specified does not exist; create the folder using Windows Explorer then try again. Alternatively, save the document to a different folder.

You do not have sufficient rights to the folder you specified, e.g. if the folder is on a network drive you may not have rights to save files to it. Speak to your network supervisor for assistance, or save the document to a different folder.

The document is read-only, e.g. because it is on a network, or because you have set it to be read-only by mistake. If you have the appropriate rights to the document, you can change it from being read-only using Windows Explorer. Alternatively, save the document under a different file name.


 You have reached the limit of the number of frames per page.

You are trying to draw a frame on a page that already contains the maximum number of frames. Click on OK to return to your document, then do any of the following:

Delete one or more of the existing frames from the page

Move one or more of the existing frames onto the pasteboard

Draw the frame on the pasteboard

Draw the frame on a different page.


 You have reached the limit of frames per document.

You are trying to draw a frame in a document that already contains the maximum number of frames. Click on OK to return to your document, then do any of the following:

Delete one or more of the existing frames from the document

Move one or more of the existing frames onto the pasteboard

Draw the frame on the pasteboard.


 MasterPublisher is not compatible with this version of OLE.

MasterPublisher cannot be used with the version of OLE installed on your system. The correct version of OLE is installed when you install MasterPublisher. If your system has been changed since you installed MasterPublisher, install MasterPublisher again.


 Wait until the printer has printed all of your booklet pages. Replace the printed pages in the paper feed tray so that the unprinted side of the paper will be printed. Do not change the order of the pages.

If you are printing in booklet format and have selected the Pause Between Pages print option, the first side of each page is printed, then this message is displayed to prompt you to turn the paper over so that MasterPublisher can print the second side of each page.


 You have not named the paragraph style.

You have not entered a name for the new paragraph style; you cannot create a new paragraph style without giving it a name.

Click on OK to return to the Create New Paragraph Style dialog box, then enter a name for the paragraph style before clicking on OK.


A paragraph style with this name already exists; enter a different name.

You have entered a name for the new paragraph style that is already being used by another paragraph style in your document or template. You cannot give two paragraph styles the same name.

Click on OK to return to the Create New Paragraph Style dialog box, then enter a different name.


 You have selected a paper size for your printer that is too small for your document. Are you sure you want to print on this paper?

You are printing a document whose paper size is larger than that of the selected printer, e.g. your document is A4, but you are printing to letter sized paper. This might cause your printout to be incomplete.

Click on OK to continue printing your document without changing the printer's paper size; click on Cancel to change the printer's paper size before printing your document.

To change the printer's paper size, select Print Setup from the File menu to display the Print Setup dialog box, then select the correct paper size from the Paper group box.


 Printing has been paused.

You have chosen to pause between pages when printing your document, e.g. to print on both sides of the paper or to change the paper type during printing.

Change the paper as required, then click on OK to resume printing.


 Are you sure you want to remove this (text/picture) file from your document?

Removing a file from your document will delete it from any frames in which it is contained. Do you really want to remove this file from your document?

Click on Yes to remove the file from your document; click on No to return to your document without removing the file.

Removing files from your document does not delete them from your hard disk. If you want to delete a file from your hard disk, use the Delete command in Windows Explorer.

Text that has been typed within MasterPublisher is not saved on your hard disk unless you export it. If you want to use the text at a later date you must export it before removing it from your document.


The full path of this file is too long. Choose a shorter path.

You have entered a path name for your file that is too long, you must choose a shorter path. A path name includes the drive (e.g. C:\), the folder (e.g. \PRESSWK) and the file name and extension (e.g. MYFILE.DTP).

Click on OK, then enter a shorter path name.


This is not a valid MasterPublisher color palette file.

The color palette file you are attempting to open is not a valid MasterPublisher color palette file. A valid color palette file must have the extension .COL and must have been saved as a color palette in MasterPublisher.


Not used any more?


 Are you sure you want to abandon your changes?

Do you really want to abandon all the changes you have made to your document since you last saved it?

Click on Yes to abandon all the changes made since you last saved your document; click on No to return to your document without abandoning any changes.

If you click on Yes you will return to your file as it was at the last full save.


 The document cannot be opened.

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to open the document. The problem could be that: The file isn't a DTP file; it's a corrupt DTP file; or it's a DTP file that was created in a later version of MasterPublisher which is not supported in the version you're running.

Click on OK to close the message box then, depending on the problem, try one of the following:

Check that the document actually is a DTP file and that you are not trying to 'open' a text or picture file.

Try opening a backup copy of the file.

Find out which version of MasterPublisher it was created in, then try opening it in that version.


The frame is too small for whole pixel scaling.

The frame is too small to allow whole pixel scaling for the bitmap it contains, i.e. each pixel in the original bitmap cannot be represented by a whole number of printer pixels. This may result in a tartan or moiré-type pattern occurring in the printed bitmap.

Click on OK to return to your document. You must then choose between having the bitmap exactly the size you want, and the best reproduction without unwanted pattern effects.


 Do you want to add a new page?

You are trying to turn to the next page of your document, but the last page is already displayed. Do you want to add a new page to your document?

Click on Yes to add a new page and display it the MasterPublisher window; click on No to continue working with the current number of pages.


 Text export failed.

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to export the text. Click on OK to close the message box then, depending on the problem, try one of the following:

There is insufficient memory to export the text; free some memory then try again.

There is insufficient disk space to export the text; free some disk space then try again.


 The item on the Clipboard cannot be pasted. (...)

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to paste from the Clipboard. Click on OK to close the message box then, depending on the problem, try one of the following:

There is insufficient memory to paste from the Clipboard; free some memory then try again.

Use Paste Special from the Edit menu to paste the item in a different format.


 The text cannot be imported. (...)

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to import the text. Click on OK to close the message box then, depending on the problem, try one of the following:

There is insufficient memory to import the text; free some memory then try again.

Another user or program has the text file open; ask them to close the file then try again.

The text file is of a format unknown to MasterPublisher; open the program in which the text was created and save it to a file format that MasterPublisher recognizes.

The text file is corrupt; if available, try importing a backup file instead.


 The picture cannot be imported.

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to import the picture. Click on OK to close the message box then, depending on the problem, try one of the following:

There is insufficient memory to import the picture; free some memory then try again.

Another user or program has the picture file open; ask them to close the file then try again.

The picture file is of a file format unknown to MasterPublisher; open the program in which the picture was created and save it to a file format that MasterPublisher recognizes.

The picture file is corrupt; if available, try importing a backup file instead.


 This group includes frames containing unnamed text or drawn graphics. Are you sure you want to delete all the frames in the group?

One or more of the frames you are trying to delete contains text that you have entered directly (unnamed text), or graphics that you have drawn. Do you still want to delete the frames?

Click on Yes to delete the frames and their contents from the page; click on No to return to your document without deleting the frames.

If the frames you are trying to delete appear empty, one or more of the frames has previously contained text or graphics that you have since deleted; deleting items from within a frame does not clear the frame completely.


 This group includes frames containing unnamed text or drawn graphics. Are you sure you want to clear all the frames in the group?

One or more of the frames you are trying to clear contains text that you have entered directly (unnamed text), or graphics that you have drawn. Do you still want to clear the frames?

Click on Yes to clear the contents of the frames; click on No to return to your document without clearing the frames.


 This frame contains unnamed text or drawn graphics. Are you sure you want to delete it?

The frame you are trying to delete contains text that you have entered directly (unnamed text), or graphics that you have drawn. Do you still want to delete the frame?

Click on Yes to delete the frame and its contents from the page. Click on No to return to your document without deleting the frame.

If the frame you are trying to delete appears empty, it has previously contained text or graphics that you have since deleted; deleting items from within a frame does not clear the frame.


 This frame contains unnamed text or drawn graphics. Are you sure you want to clear it?

The frame you are trying to clear contains text that you have entered directly (unnamed text), or graphics that you have drawn. Do you still want to clear the frame?

Click on Yes to clear the contents of the frame. Click on No to return to your document without clearing the frame.


 Are you sure you want to delete page(s) <n> to <n> inclusive?

Do you really want to delete the specified page(s) from your document?

Click on Yes to delete them; click on No to return to your document without deleting the page(s).

If you delete an odd number of pages when using separate left and right master pages, any following page(s) will change sides and frames may need to be realigned as a result.

If you delete a page that contains part of a piece of text, the text is flowed onto the following page.


 The document cannot be automatically backed up. Either the folder does not exist, you do not have sufficient rights to the folder, the existing auto-backup file is read-only or there is a file sharing violation.

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to automatically backup your document; a backup was not saved. Click on OK to close the message box then, depending on the problem, try one of the following:

The folder containing the document no longer exists; recreate the folder using Windows Explorer then try again. Alternatively, save the document to a different folder; future auto-backups of the document are also saved to this folder.

You do not have sufficient rights to the folder containing the document, e.g. if the folder is on a network drive you may not have rights to save files to it. Speak to your network supervisor for assistance, or save the document to a different folder; future auto-backups of the document are also saved to this folder.

The existing auto-backup (.ATB) file for the document is read-only and cannot be overwritten, e.g. because it is on a network, or because you have set it to be read-only by mistake. If you have the appropriate rights to the file, you can change it from being read-only using Windows Explorer. Alternatively, save the document under a different file name; future auto-backups of the document are also saved under this file name.

Another user has the existing auto-backup (.ATB) file open; ask them to close the file so that future auto-backups can be saved. Alternatively, save the document under a different file name; future auto-backup of the document are also saved under this file name.


 You cannot delete the Body text paragraph style.

You are trying to delete the Body text paragraph style; you cannot delete this paragraph style, but you can edit and rename it instead.

Click on OK to return to your document. If you want to edit and/or rename Body text, double-click on its name in the contents list.


 You have reached the limit of 112 paragraph styles per document.

You are trying to create a new paragraph style for a document that already contains 112 paragraph styles; you cannot create more than 112 paragraph styles for any one document. Click on OK to return to your document, then do any of the following:

Delete one or more of the existing paragraph styles from the document

Edit one of the existing paragraph styles instead of creating a new one.


 You have reached the maximum number of pages per document.

You are trying to create a new page for a document that already contains the maximum number of pages. Click on OK to return to your document, then do any of the following:

Delete one or more of the existing pages from the document

Continue work in a new document.


 This will cause the alignment to change from Justified to Flushed Left.

You have turned monospacing on for a paragraph style with a justified alignment. You cannot prevent the space between letters and words from being stretched when a paragraph style is justified.

Click on OK to change the alignment of the paragraph style to flushed left; click on Cancel to turn monospacing off and leave the alignment of the paragraph style as justified.


 This will cause Monospacing to be turned off.

The current paragraph style has monospacing turned on and you are trying to change its alignment to justified.

You cannot choose this for a paragraph style without turning monospacing off.

Click on OK to turn monospacing off and change the alignment to justified. Click on Cancel to cancel the operation and leave monospacing turned on.


 Are you sure you want to delete <paragraph style>?

Do you really want to delete this paragraph style from your document?

Click on Yes to delete the selected paragraph style; click on No to return to your document without deleting the paragraph style.

If you click on Yes, the style name is removed from the contents list and any paragraphs tagged with the style revert to Body text.


 Invalid header in PowerText file.

The PowerText file you have tried to load is either corrupt, or it is not a PowerText file.


 Incorrect version in PowerText file.

The PowerText file you have tried to open was created in a version of MasterPublisher later than the version you are running. Run the very latest version of MasterPublisher, then try loading this PowerText file into it.


 Do you want to replace this word?

The word or phrase for which you are searching has been found and is highlighted in your document. Do you want to replace this occurrence of the word or phrase with the string you specified on the Find & Replace dialog box?

Click on Yes to replace the word and then search for the next occurrence; click on No to leave the word as it is and search for the next occurrence; click on Cancel to leave the word as it is and stop searching.


 Insufficient timers available. Please close some other programs.

Windows has run out of timers and has none free to allocate for the command you tried to perform. If you are running lots of Windows programs or have lots of files open, close any that you don't need. This will free up some timers, making them available to MasterPublisher.


 Unable to set printer orientation.

MasterPublisher is not able to set the orientation of your printer (whether the page is in portrait or landscape format). This may be because you are using an old printer driver. Contact your printer dealer for the latest driver.


 This copy of MasterPublisher can only be used by one network user at a time.

You are trying to run MasterPublisher from the network when it is already being run by another user; this copy of MasterPublisher has not had a Network License Pack installed and cannot be run by more than one network user at any one time. If you would like a Network License Pack, contact Customer Services.

If you do have a MasterPublisher Network License Pack installed, its installation was probably unsuccessful, or a component of it has been erased. Reinstall the Network License Pack, then try again.


 You have not entered any text.

You have not entered any text for the PowerText object; you cannot create a PowerText object without entering some text.

Click on OK to return to the PowerText dialog box, then enter some text in the text box before clicking on OK.


 <fontname> does not exist. Continue with a new font?

The font used in the original PowerText object is not available on your Windows setup. You can edit it and MasterPublisher will substitute another font for the original.


 File not found:

Path + FNTALIAS.INI

No default font table.

Part of your MasterPublisher installation has become corrupt. You must reinstall the MasterPublisher program.


 Unexpected end of dtp file whilst loading font table.

The dtp file you have tried to load is corrupt.


 Spell-checking completed.

Spell-checking has been completed, i.e. all of the selected text has been spell-checked.

Click on OK to return to your document.


 There is insufficient memory to generate this PowerText item.

The PowerText object you're trying to create is too complicated. If you are using a detailed decorative font, select something simpler such as Arial and try again.

Alternatively your system is running low on memory. Try the following to free some memory, then try again.

close any programs you aren't using

reduce Windows programs you are running in the background to icons

clear the contents of the Clipboard


 A frame on this page is too small for whole pixel scaling.

One or more of the frames on this page is too small to allow whole pixel scaling for the bitmap it contains, i.e. each pixel in the original bitmap will not be represented by a whole number of printer pixels. This may result in a tartan or moiré-type pattern occurring in the printed bitmap.

Click on OK to cancel the message box. You must then choose between having the bitmap exactly the size you want, and the best reproduction without unwanted pattern effects.


 The full path name of the print-to-disk file must not exceed 31 characters.

You have entered a path name for your print-to-disk file that is too long; you must enter a path name that does not exceed the 31 characters allowed by Windows' printer drivers. A path name includes the drive (e.g. C:\), the folder (e.g. \PRESSWK) and the file name and extension (e.g. MYFILE.DTP).

Click on OK to return to the Filename for Disk Output dialog box, then enter a path name that contains 31 characters or less.


 The default printer does not have any fonts associated to it; use the Windows Control Panel to check that you have the correct printer-driver selected.

You do not have any fonts associated to your default printer. Until you select a default printer that has fonts you will have the following problems:

The text within your document will be formatted using screen fonts only

You will not be able to print your document.

Click on OK to close the message box then, using the Windows Control Panel, check that you have the correct printer-driver selected for your printer.

For information that is specific to the operation of your printer, please refer to your printer documentation or contact your printer manufacturer.


 All the Network Licenses are being used; you cannot run another copy of MasterPublisher.

You are trying to run MasterPublisher when all the licenses are already in use. Contact your network supervisor about having a license assigned specifically to you giving you priority access to MasterPublisher, or suggest that more network licenses are purchased.

For details of purchasing more licenses, contact Customer Services.


 Unable to check user license.

An error has occurred when MasterPublisher tried to check for a Network License. If you are using MasterPublisher on a network, contact your network supervisor. MasterPublisher, or it's license pack, may not be installed correctly.


 This document is read-only.

You are opening a document that is read-only; any changes that you make cannot be saved under the same file name. The document may be read-only because it is on a network, or because you have set it to read-only.

If you have appropriate rights to the document, you can change it from being read-only by using the Windows Explorer. Alternatively, save any changes to the document under a different file name.


 The document cannot be opened.

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to open the document. Click on OK to close the message box and then, depending on the problem, try one of the following:

There is insufficient memory to open the document; free some memory then try again.

Another user has the document open already; ask them to close the document then try again.

The document is corrupt; try opening a backup file instead.


 There are no TrueType or ATM fonts available for use by PowerText.

You are trying to create a PowerText object when there are no TrueType or ATM fonts available; you cannot create PowerText without these fonts. Click on OK to close the message box, then check that TrueType and/or ATM fonts are turned on.

to turn on ATM fonts, select the ATM Control Panel from the Start menu, then select On from the ATM group box.

Once you have turned TrueType and/or ATM fonts on you must restart Windows; you will not be able to use the fonts until you do this.


 Your personal configuration files cannot be located. You must run the user setup program before you can run MasterPublisher. See your Network Administrator for details.

MasterPublisher is unable to find the path in which your personal configuration files are stored. This is either because you have not yet run the user setup program, or because the path that you specified for your personal files is no longer valid.

Click on OK to close the message box, then run the user setup program again.


 A template with this name already exists. Do you want to overwrite this template?

You have entered a name for the new template that is already being used by an existing template. Do you want to overwrite the existing template?

Click on Yes to overwrite the existing template; click on No to return to the Save Template dialog box, then enter a different name.


 Are you sure you want to remove this object from your document?

Do you really want to remove the OLE object from your document? Removing an object from your document will delete it from any frames in which it is contained.

Click on Yes to remove the object from your document; click on No to return to your document without removing the object.


 The frame is full. Do you want to flow the text onto the next page?

The text that you are editing no longer fits into the existing frames. Do you want the text to autoflow onto the next page? This will create new pages and frames automatically for you to contain the text.

Click on Yes to autoflow the text onto the next page; click on No if you want to draw more frames on the current page .


 The file cannot be imported.

MasterPublisher has encountered a problem while trying to import the file (including using the drag & drop technique). Click on OK to close the message box and then, depending on the problem, try one of the following:

There is insufficient memory to import the file; free some memory then try again.

Another user has the file open; ask them to close the file then try again.

The file is of a file format unknown to MasterPublisher; open the program in which the file was created and save it to a file format that MasterPublisher recognizes.

The file has been saved with an incorrect file extension, e.g. its file format might be .TXT but it has the .RTF file extension. Make sure the file extension reflects the true format of the file.

The file is corrupt; if available try importing a backup file instead.


 Unable to complete complex region fill operation.

MasterPublisher cannot handle the picture you have imported. This may be because the picture is very large or that you are zoomed in very closely. Reduce the zoom level or try importing the picture in a different file format.


 Unable to display picture within a user defined frame.

The shape of the selected frame is too complex or you are zoomed in too closely. Reduce the zoom level or simplify the frame shape by selecting a regular shape or defining a less complex shape manually.


 This PowerText item uses an effect which is not available in MasterPublisher. Continue with a new effect?

The PowerText object you are editing was created in a previous version of MasterPublisher which did not contain quite the same effects as PowerText in the current version of MasterPublisher. If you edit this PowerText object, you will not get exactly the same result.


 This printer may not print bitmaps; use the Windows Control Panel to check that it is the correct printer driver for your printer.

The printer-driver that is selected for the current printer may not be able to print bitmaps correctly. This can lead to poor quality results when you print a document containing color bitmaps.

Click on OK to close the message box then, using the Windows Control Panel, check that you have the correct printer-driver selected for your printer.

If you are using the correct driver, check with your supplier to see if a more up-to-date version is available.

For information that is specific to the operation of your printer, please refer to your printer documentation or contact your printer manufacturer.


 >The document cannot be automatically backed up; there is insufficient space on disk (*:) or (*:). A warning beep will remind you to save manually.

There is insufficient space to make an automatic backup copy of the file you are working on.

Click on OK to close the message box, then try any of the following to free some memory:

Close any programs you aren't using

Reduce Windows programs you are running in the background to icons

Clear the contents of the Clipboard.


 This image is too large; try again with a smaller image.

You have scanned in an image that is too large for MasterPublisher to handle.

Click on OK to close the message box, then try scanning it in again at a lower resolution and color depth.


 The current frame contains {untitled text/PowerText/an OLE object/a picture/named text}. Are you sure you want to replace it?

You are trying to replace the contents of a frame with a different type of item (such as a picture with text, or PowerText with named text).

Click on Yes to replace the contents of the frame as specified; click on No to cancel the operation.


 This PowerText item was created by an earlier version of PowerText. You may not be able to achieve exactly the same effect when you edit it.

The PowerText object that you are trying to edit was created in a previous version of PowerText. Due to the enhancements added to this version of PowerText, it may not be 100% compatible with objects created in previous versions.

When you edit the PowerText object, the effect achieved may be slightly different than that produced by your previous version of PowerText.


 The current frame contains untitled text. Are you sure you want to replace it?

The frame you are trying to delete contains text that you have entered directly (unnamed text). Do you still want to delete the frame?

Click on Yes to delete the frame and its contents from the page. Click on No to return to your document without deleting the frame.

If the frame you are trying to delete appears empty, it has previously contained text that you have since deleted; deleting items from within a frame does not clear the frame. To clear a frame, select Clear Frame from the Edit menu.


 The current frame contains PowerText. Are you sure you want to replace it?

The frame you are trying to delete contains PowerText. Do you still want to delete the frame?

Click on Yes to delete the frame and its contents from the page. Click on No to return to your document without deleting the frame.


 The current frame contains an OLE object. Are you sure you want to replace it?

The frame you are trying to delete contains an OLE object. Do you still want to delete the frame?

Click on Yes to delete the frame and its contents from the page. Click on No to return to your document without deleting the frame.


 The current frame contains a picture. Are you sure you want to replace it?

The frame you are trying to delete contains a picture. Do you still want to delete the frame?

Click on Yes to delete the frame and its contents from the page. Click on No to return to your document without deleting the frame.


 The current frame contains named text. Are you sure you want to replace it?

The frame you are trying to delete contains a named text file. Do you still want to delete the frame?

Click on Yes to delete the frame and its contents from the page. Click on No to return to your document without deleting the frame.


 >Are you sure you want to delete this template?

Do you really want to delete the selected template?

Click on Yes to delete the template from your hard disk; click on No to return to MasterPublisher without deleting the template.


MasterPublisher cannot display this dialog box, the menu command is disabled. Check the steps before opening the dialog box in the Help.

You have attempted to open a dialog box via the Help, but the appropriate menu command is not enabled.

Make sure that you have followed the steps in the Help carefully before you tried to open the dialog box.


MasterPublisher cannot display this dialog box because a dialog box is already being displayed. Close the existing dialog box before proceeding.

You have attempted to open a dialog box, but another dialog box is already open. Close the dialog box that is open and then continue.


This picture cannot be interpreted.

You are trying to open a picture that MasterPublisher cannot interpret.

Is it a file type that is recognized by MasterPublisher? If not, take it to Paint or another image editing program and save it as a different type.

Check that the appropriate filter library is still available. The filter libraries are stored in: IMSI\SYSTEM\FILTERS and are named *001.dll, where * is the filter type e.g. bmp001.dll.

If the filter library is not available, re-install MasterPublisher and try again.


This image contains badly compressed information.

You are trying to access an image that has not been compressed properly. This could be because the file has become corrupted.

Click on OK to close the message box.

Do you have a previously saved version of the image? If so, use this and try again.


Working with PowerText


Creating a new PowerText effect (PowerText)
To create a new PowerText effect

1.	Do one of the following:

If you are in MasterPublisher, click on the PowerText tool in the Toolbox.

If you are working on a PowerText effect, save any changes you want to keep. Delete all of the layers, then click on the Gallery button.

The PowerText Gallery appears.

2.	Select the layer you want for your new PowerText effect.

3.	Click on Open. The selected layer appears in the preview window ready for you to begin work.

Tools:

Related Topics


Opening an existing PowerText effect (PowerText)
To open an existing PowerText effect

If you are in PowerText:

1.	Click on the Gallery button. The PowerText Gallery appears.

2.	In the Name box, type the path to the folder where the PowerText effect is stored.

3.	Select the PowerText effect.

4.	Click on Open. The PowerText effect opens in the preview window ready for you to edit or use in your documents.

If you are using the document containing the PowerText effect:

Double-click on the PowerText effect. The PowerText effect opens in PowerText.

Note:

If you can’t remember the path, click on the Browse button to display the drives and folders available.

You may need to delete any existing and unwanted layers using the Delete button.

Click on the Home button to return to the default PowerText folder.

Tools:

Related Topics


Inserting a layer (PowerText)
To insert a layer

1.	Click on the Gallery button. The PowerText Gallery appears.

2.	Select the layer you want.

3.	Click on Open. The selected layer appears in the preview window ready for you to begin work.

Tools:

Related Topics


Deleting a layer (PowerText)
To delete a layer

1.	Select the layer you want to delete.

2.	Click on the Delete button. The layer is deleted from the PowerText effect.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the position of a layer (PowerText)
To change the position of a layer

1.	Select the layer whose position you want to change.

2.	Click on either the Move layer forward or Move layer back button.

Tools:

Related Topics


Saving your PowerText effect (PowerText)
To save your PowerText effect

1.	Click on the Save To Gallery button. The Save As dialog box appears.

2.	From the Save in drop-down list box, select the drive where you want to save the PowerText effect.

3.	From the folder list box, select the folder where you want to save the PowerText effect.

4.	In the File name text box, type a name for the PowerText effect.

5.	Click on Save. The PowerText effect is saved and can be opened again to edit further or to use in your documents.

Related Topics


Exiting PowerText (PowerText)
To exit PowerText

Do any of the following:

Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the PowerText window.

From the PowerText Control menu, select Close.

Double-click on the PowerText Control-menu icon.

Hold down the Alt key on your keyboard and press F4.

Note:

If your PowerText effect contains any unsaved changes, a message box appears enabling you to save the unsaved changes before exiting.

Related Topics


Working with Text


Entering text (PowerText)
To enter text in PowerText

1.	If you do not have a text layer, insert a 2D or 3D text layer.

2.	From above the preview window, select the Text tab. You are now in Text control.

3.	Delete the default text from the Text box.

4.	Type in your text.

Note:

You can have up to 10 lines of text.

Related Topics


Changing the font (PowerText)
To change the font of your PowerText effect

1.	From above the preview window, select the Text tab. You are now in Text control.

2.	Click on the Font tab.

3.	From the Font list box, select a font. The text now appears in the preview window in the selected font.

Note:

The font names are displayed in their respective fonts.

Related Topics


Changing the font size (PowerText)
To change the font size of your PowerText effect

1.	From above the preview window, select the Text tab. You are now in Text control.

2.	Click on the Font tab.

3.	In the Size spin box, type the point size you want your text to be.

Note:

You can also change the size of the font by using the up and down arrows on the Size spin box.

Related Topics


Changing the alignment of the text (PowerText)
To change the alignment of the text in your PowerText effect

1.	From above the preview window, select the Text tab. You are now in Text control.

2.	Click on the Font tab.

3.	Select one of the Position tools. The text changes accordingly in the preview window.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the style of the text (PowerText)
To change the style of the text in your PowerText effect

1.	From above the preview window, select the Text tab. You are now in Text control.

2.	Click on the Font tab.

3.	Select one of the Style tools. The text changes accordingly in the preview window.

Tools:

Related Topics


Skewing the text (PowerText)
To skew the text of your PowerText effect

1.	From above the preview window, select the Text tab. You are now in Text control.

2.	Click on the Font tab.

3.	In the Skew spin box, type the angle you want to skew your text at.

Note:

You can also change the angle by using the up and down arrows on the Skew spin box, or by dragging the radius of the Skew circle to the angle you want.

Related Topics


Changing the way the text sits on the baseline (PowerText)
To change the way the text of your PowerText effect sits on the baseline

1.	From above the preview window, select the Text tab. You are now in Text control.

2.	Click on the Font tab.

3.	Select a Baseline tool. The text changes accordingly.

Note:

The option to change the way the text sits on the baseline only occurs with certain text effects.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the letter spacing (PowerText)
To change the letter spacing of your PowerText effect

1.	From above the preview window, select the Text tab. You are now in Text control.

2.	Click on the Spacing tab.

3.	From the Letter Spacing group box, select one of the Spacing tools.

Note:

Finer adjustments can be made using the Percentage spin box.

Related Topics


Changing the line spacing (PowerText)
To change the line spacing of your PowerText effect

1.	From above the preview window, select the Text tab. You are now in Text control.

2.	Click on the Spacing tab.

3.	From the Line Spacing group box, select one of the Spacing tools.

Note:

Finer adjustments can be made using the Percentage spin box.

Related Topics


Overlapping the text (PowerText)
To overlap the text of your PowerText effect

1.	From above the preview window, select the Text tab. You are now in Text control.

2.	Click on the Spacing tab.

3.	In the Letter Spacing group box, select the Overlap tool.

4.	From the Overlap group box, select an overlapping style by clicking on the radio buttons. The text changes accordingly.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the text effect (PowerText)
To change the text effect of your PowerText effect

1.	From above the preview window, select the Text tab. You are now in Text control.

2.	Click on the Text Effect tab.

3.	From the Choose an effect box, select an effect. Use the scroll bar along the bottom to view the range of effects available.

4.	In the Degree Of Effect group box, move the slider to create the degree of distortion you want.

Related Topics


Working with 2D text


Changing the pattern of the 2D text (PowerText)
To change the pattern of the 2D text

1.	From above the preview window, select the 2D Text tab. You are now in 2D Text control.

2.	Click on the Color tab.

3.	From the Fill list box, select a fill style. Use the scroll bar along the side to view the range of fill styles available.

4.	From the drop-down color palette in the Fill group box, select a color. The selected style and color are applied to the text in the preview window.

Note:

If you select a graduated fill style, two drop-down color palettes will appear. The top palette is the ‘from’ color and the bottom palette is the ‘to’ color.

With the LOGARITHMIC and LINEAR fill styles you have the option of changing the direction of the graduation by dragging the arrow in the preview box.

Related Topics


Changing the outline of the 2D text (PowerText)
To change the outline of the 2D text

1.	From above the preview window, select the 2D Text tab. You are now in 2D Text control.

2.	Click on the Color tab.

3.	From the Outline list box, select an outline. Use the scroll bar along the side to view the range of outlines available.

4.	From the drop-down color palette, in the Outline group box, select a color. The selected outline and color are applied to the text in the preview window.

Related Topics


Adding a shadow to the 2D text (PowerText)
To add a shadow to the 2D text

1.	From above the preview window, select the 2D Text tab. You are now in 2D Text control.

2.	Click on the Shadow tab.

3.	Select a shadow type.

Related Topics


Changing the position of the 2D text shadow (PowerText)
To change the position of the 2D text shadow

1.	From above the preview window, select the 2D Text tab. You are now in 2D Text control.

2.	Click on the Shadow tab.

3.	In the Direction spin box, type the angle you want the shadow to be at.

4.	Drag the Offset slider to change the length of the shadow.

Note:

You can also change the direction by using the up and down arrows on the Direction spin box, or by dragging the radius of the Direction circle to the angle you want.

Related Topics


Changing the color of the 2D text shadow (PowerText)
To change the color of the 2D text shadow

1.	From above the preview window, select the 2D Text tab. You are now in 2D Text control.

2.	Click on the Shadow tab.

3.	From the Outline drop-down list box, select an outline.

4.	From the drop-down color palette, select a color.

5.	From the Fill drop-down list box, select a fill style.

6.	From the drop-down color palette, select a color.

Note:

If you select a graduated fill style, two drop-down color palettes will appear. The top palette is the ‘from’ color and the bottom palette is the ‘to’ color.

With the LOGARITHMIC and LINEAR fill styles you have the option of changing the direction of the graduation by dragging the arrow in the preview box.

Related Topics


Rotating the 2D text (PowerText)
To rotate the 2D text

1.	From above the preview window, select the 2D Text tab. You are now in 2D Text control.

2.	Click on the Rotate tab.

3.	In the degrees spin box, type the angle you want the text to be at.

Note:

You can also change the angle by:

Using the up and down arrows on the degrees spin box

Dragging the radius of the circle next to the degrees spin box to the angle you want.

Tools:

Related Topics


Flipping the 2D text (PowerText)
To flip the 2D text

1.	From the top of the preview window, select the 2D Text tab. You are now in 2D Text control.

2.	Click on the Rotate tab.

3.	From the Flip group box, select one of the tools.

Tools:

Related Topics


Working with 3D Text


Changing the 3D effect (PowerText)
To change the 3D effect

1.	From above the preview window, select the 3D Text tab. You are now in 3D Text control.

2.	Click on the 3D Effects tab.

3.	From the 3D Effect box, select the effect you want to use.

Related Topics


Changing the character depth of 3D text (PowerText)
To change the character depth of 3D text

1.	From above the preview window, select the 3D Text tab. You are now in 3D Text control.

2.	Click on the 3D Effects tab.

3.	In the Character Depth group box, drag the slider to create the required depth of text.

Related Topics


Changing the color of 3D text (PowerText)
To change the 3D text color

1.	From above the preview window, select the 3D Text tab. You are now in 3D Text control.

2.	Click on the Lighting tab.

3.	In the Text Color group box, select a color from the Color drop-down palette.

4.	Drag the Brightness slider to determine how dim or bright you want the color to be.

Related Topics


Changing the direction of the spotlight on 3D text (PowerText)
To change the direction of the spotlight on 3D text

1.	From above the preview window, select the 3D Text tab. You are now in 3D Text control.

2.	Click on the Lighting tab.

3.	In the Spotlight group box, select a color from the Color drop-down palette.

4.	Drag the Brightness slider to determine how dim or bright you want the light to be.

5.	Drag the Direction arcball to control the direction of the spotlight.

Note:

To return the direction of the spotlight to its default position, select the Straight On tool.

Tools:

Related Topics


Changing the orientation of 3D text (PowerText)
To change the orientation of 3D text

1.	From above the preview window, select the 3D Text tab. You are now in 3D Text control.

2.	Click on the Orientation tab.

3.	Drag the Orientation arcball to control the orientation of the text.

Note:

To return the text to its default position, click on the Home button.

Related Topics


Changing the perspective of 3D text (PowerText)
To change the perspective of 3D text

1.	From above the preview window, select the 3D Text tab. You are now in 3D Text control.

2.	Click on the Orientation tab.

3.	Drag the slider to determine how high or low you want the perspective to be.

Related Topics


Working with Backgrounds


Changing the background shape (PowerText)
To change the background shape

1.	From above the preview window, select the Background tab. You are now in Background control.

2.	Click on the Shape tab.

3.	From the Choose A Shape group box, select a shape for your background.

4.	If you have selected a star or a diamond shape, check the Text Inside check box if you want to display your text inside the shape.

5.	If you have selected a star shape:

In the No. Of Points box, type the number of points you want the star to have, or use the up and down arrows to select the number.

Check the Inner Points check box to add inner points to the star.

Use the slider to choose how fat you want the star to be.

Note:

If you have more than one text layer, the text immediately in front of the background will be placed inside the shape.

Related Topics


Changing the background color (PowerText)
To change the background color

1.	From above the preview window, select the Background tab. You are now in Background control.

2.	Click on the Color tab.

3.	From the Outline list box, select an outline.

4.	From the drop-down color palette in the Outline group box, select a color.

5.	From the Fill list box, select a fill style.

6.	From the drop-down color palette in the Fill group box, select a color.

Note:

If you select a graduated fill style, two drop-down color palettes will appear. The top palette is the ‘from’ color and the bottom palette is the ‘to’ color.

With the LOGARITHMIC and LINEAR fill styles you have the option of changing the direction of the graduation by dragging the arrow in the preview box.

Related Topics


Adding a shadow to the background (PowerText)
To add a shadow to the background

1.	From above the preview window, select the Background tab. You are now in Background control.

2.	Click on the Shadow tab.

3.	Select a shadow type by clicking on the radio button or on the text beside it.

Related Topics


Changing the position of the background shadow (PowerText)
To change the position of the background shadow

1.	From above the preview window, select the Background tab. You are now in Background control.

2.	Click on the Shadow tab.

3.	In the Direction spin box, type the angle you want the shadow to be at.

4.	Drag the Offset slider to change the length of the shadow.

Note:

You can also change the direction by using the up and down arrows on the Direction spin box, or by dragging the radius on the Direction circle to the angle you want.

Related Topics


Changing the color of the background shadow (PowerText)
To change the color of the background shadow

1.	From above the preview window, select the Background tab. You are now in Background control.

2.	Click on the Shadow tab.

3.	From the Outline drop-down list box, select an outline.

4.	From the drop-down color palette in the Outline group box, select a color.

5.	From the Fill drop-down list box, select a fill style.

6.	From the drop-down color palette in the Fill group box, select a color.

Note:

If you select a graduated fill style, two drop-down color palettes will appear. The top palette is the ‘from’ color and the bottom palette is the ‘to’ color.

With the LOGARITHMIC and LINEAR fill styles you have the option of changing the direction of the graduation by dragging the arrow in the preview box.

Related Topics


Rotating the background (PowerText)
To rotate the background

1.	From above the preview window, select the Background tab. You are now in Background control.

2.	Click on the Rotate tab.

3.	In the degrees spin box, type the angle you want the background to be at.

Note:

You can also change the angle by:

Using the up and down arrows on the degrees spin box

Dragging the radius of the circle next to the degrees spin box to the angle you want.

Tools:

Related Topics


Flipping the background (PowerText)
To flip the background

1.	From above the preview window, select the Background tab. You are now in Background control.

2.	Click on the Rotate tab.

3.	From the Flip group box, select a tool.

Tools:

Related Topics


 @Click on this to make your text bold.


Click on this to change your text to italics.


Click on this to toggle your text between small caps and lower case.


Click on this to direct the spotlight from the top left-hand corner.


Click on this to rotate your 2D text or background 45 degrees to the left.


Click on this to rotate your 2D text or background 90 degrees to the left.


Click on this to align your text to the right.


Click on this to flip your 2D text or background horizontally over a vertical axis.


Click on this to flip your 2D text or background vertically over a horizontal axis.


Click on this to rotate your 2D text or background 45 degrees to the right.


Click on this to rotate your 2D text or background 90 degrees to the right.


Click on this to align your text to the left.


Click on this to direct the spotlight straight on to your text. This is also the default spotlight position.


Click on this to justify your text.


Click on this to center your text.


Click on this to stretch your text to fit the frame.


Click on this to direct the spotlight from the top right-hand corner.


Click on this to skew the baseline of your text.


Click on this to rotate the baseline of your text.


Click on this to render the baseline of your text upright.


Click on the radio button to the left of this to select an overlapping style, where the letter on the left overlaps the letter on the right.


Click on the radio button to the left of this to select an overlapping style, where the letter on the right overlaps the letter on the left.


Click on this to display the PowerText Gallery, from which you can select a PowerText layer or existing PowerText effect to open in PowerText.


Click on this to delete the currently selected PowerText layer.


Click on this to move the selected layer so that it is in front of the layer that was previously in front of it.


Click on this to move the selected layer behind the layer that was previously behind it.


A bar that appears at the bottom and/or right edge of a window whose contents are not entirely visible.


A list of available commands and actions in PowerText.

Menu names are displayed in the menu bar near the top of the PowerText window.


A temporary holding place for a picture that has been cut or copied.


A window used to supply information to PowerText

When a dialog box is displayed, all interaction with PowerText must be through the dialog box.


Part of a structure for organizing your files on a disk. A folder can contain files and other folders called subfolders.


A file stored on hard or floppy disk, or other media.


A key or key combination that you press to carry out a command or action.

If a menu command has a keyboard shortcut, the key combination is listed to the right of the command name in the menu.


To save a picture onto the Clipboard without removing it from the PowerText window, so that it can be transferred to another location.


To insert the contents of the Clipboard into PowerText.


The horizontal bar displaying the names of PowerText menus.

It is displayed below the title bar.


You are in text control when any text tab above the preview window is selected. All the tabs to the right of the preview window are text related.


A standard windows menu displayed by clicking on the icon at the top left of a window. By using Control menu commands you can restore, move, size, minimize, maximize and close the window.


This is used in PowerText to mean the style of type, for example Sans, Serif, or Courier.

Elsewhere this may be called a typeface, with the term font reserved for a particular weight, size and style of a typeface.


An area where files and folders are stored. This could be a floppy disk drive, a CD-ROM drive, your hard disk drive or a network drive.


A small box with up and down arrows on its right-hand side that allow you to increase or decrease the value in the box.

You can also type directly into the box.


A fill style which is made up of two colors that blend into each other.


The line on which the text sits. The option to change the baseline only occurs with certain text effects.


You are in Background control when the background tab above the preview window is selected. All the tabs to the right of the preview window are background related.


You are in 3D Text control when a 3D text tab above the preview window is selected All the tabs to the right are 3D Text related.


A dialog box from which you can choose from a wide range of layers to insert into your PowerText effect. The layers you can choose from are 2D text, 3D text and a background shape. You can also choose from a selection of predefined PowerText effects or any PowerText effects you have created and saved.


A window in which you can view your PowerText effect and all the changes you make. It updates automatically.


A set of colors available to PowerText.


A box that you can drag to change the effect of the control, e.g. to change the degree of brightness or the tint of a color from a color palette.


A ball that you can drag to change the direction of the 3D text or its lighting.


These are what your PowerText effects are made up of. You can have layers of 2D or 3D text or background shapes.


These are white circles that have a black dot inside them when they are selected.


You are in 2D Text control when the 2D text tab above the preview window is selected. All the tabs to the right of the preview window are 2D text related.


Save your PowerText effect by clicking on the Save to Gallery button.


Editing the hyphenation exceptions dictionary

You can specify words that you want never to be hyphenated, or that you want to be hyphenated in a special way, in the exceptions dictionary.

Make a backup copy of the exceptions dictionary file - HYUS.TXT - before you edit it. You can then revert to the original exceptions dictionary if you have any difficulties with the new one.

How to edit the exceptions dictionary

1.	Start up any text editor that can save files in ASCII format, for example Windows WordPad.

2.	Open the file called HYUS.TXT in the \PUBLISH folder.

3.	The list of words is in alphabetical order. Insert your word into the list in the correct place. The list must remain in alphabetical order.

4.	Insert a hyphen wherever you want the word to be hyphenated. For instance, you might want the word ‘MasterClips' to be hyphenated in the middle, so you would type it as ‘Master-Clips'. If a word can be hyphenated in more than one place, you can insert more than one hyphen, for example ‘Or-ganiz-ation'.

5.	If you do not want a word to be hyphenated at all (for instance, a company or product name), add the word to the list without a hyphen.

6.	When you have completed your edits, save the file in ASCII format.

If you have an upgraded version of MasterPublisher, you may have edited your earlier hyphenation exceptions dictionary. If you want to use your old exceptions dictionary, do the following:

If you have upgraded from an earlier version of MasterPublisher, the exceptions dictionary is called HYUS.TXT and is in the folder of your original installation. Copy it into the folder in which you have installed your upgraded version.

  Related Topics


Editing the spelling checker user dictionary

When you use MasterPublisher's spelling checker, the spelling in your document is checked against the dictionary supplied with the program. There is also a user dictionary to which you can add words that you do not want to be picked out as spelling mistakes, such as "proper" names or technical terms.

Once you have added a word to the user dictionary (by selecting Add to Dictionary on the Check Spelling dialog box), you cannot change or delete the word except by editing the user dictionary itself, which is in an ASCII file called SPUS.TXT.

How to edit the user dictionary

1.	Start up any text editor that can save files in ASCII, for example Windows Wordpad.

2.	Open the file called SPUS.TXT in the \PUBLISH folder.

3.	Make the changes you want and save the edited file in ASCII (*.txt) format.

When editing the user dictionary, remember the following points:

A word in the user dictionary must be a single string of characters. If you try to add a string containing a space, only the characters up to the space will be retained in the dictionary.

The user dictionary lists words in phonetic order, so you do not have to take care to place words in alphabetical order. When you save the file and later reopen it, you may find that words that you have added or deleted are now in a different order.

The dictionary is case-sensitive. If the word is in lowercase, the spelling checker will interpret future occurrences of that word in lowercase, uppercase and capitalized as being correct. If the word is capitalized, the spelling checker will interpret future occurrences of that word in uppercase and capitalized text but not lowercase as being correct. If the word is in uppercase, the spelling checker will interpret future occurrences of that word in uppercase but not capitalized and lowercase as being correct.

If you have upgraded to MasterPublisher from an earlier version and want to use the user dictionary that you have compiled using that program, copy it into the \PUBLISH folder.

  Related Topics


Dragging-and-dropping files

Windows Explorer provides an alternative way for you to open .DTP files and import text and picture files into MasterPublisher. This alternative method is known as "dragging-and-dropping" because you "drag" the document or file from Explorer, and "drop" it into the MasterPublisher window.

How to use Windows "dragging-and-dropping"

1.	From the Start menu, select Windows Explorer.

2.	Make sure that MasterPublisher is running as a window.

3.	Arrange the windows on your screen so that both Explorer and the MasterPublisher window are visible.

4.	Open the folder containing the document that you want to open or the file you want to import.

5.	Select the document or file, then holding down the mouse button, drag the item onto the MasterPublisher window and release the mouse button.

The document will then open in MasterPublisher and the name of the imported file will be listed in the contents list.

If you select a frame before "dragging-and-dropping", the file will automatically be placed in the frame.

If you move the mouse pointer over a frame while you are dragging it not MasterPublisher, the frame will be selected and you can drop the file into it.

If you do not select a frame, MasterPublisher will create a new frame and place the file in it.

When importing into MasterPublisher, you can drag-and-drop more than one file.

  Related Topics


Considering your audience

The first step towards effective page design is a clear understanding of your audience. Some of the points you should consider before beginning your page design are listed below:

Where will my document be read?

Physical environment is an important consideration; e.g. natural or artificial lighting, in a factory, at a desk in front of a computer with limited space. These factors should influence your choice of page and print size, binding, and the use of matte or glossy paper.

Who is my reader?

Try to write in a style that is appropriate for your audience and be careful not to use words or pictures that may cause offense.

What is the age of my typical reader?

Small print is difficult for the young or elderly to read. You should avoid it when choosing the size of text intended for these audiences.

How motivated is my reader?

The less motivated your audience, the more visual appeal is necessary to capture their attention.

How easily can my reader pick out the relevant information?

What is the best way to structure the document and present the different levels of headings? Less important headings should be smaller than main headings.

What sort of image do I want to convey?

The image your document conveys, e.g. fun or serious, formal or casual, could make the difference between whether people read it or not.

Take a look at page design in books and magazines to see how the above factors have influenced the design of the different pages.

  Related Topics


Considering practical issues

When designing a document, there are certain practical issues you should consider. Some of these are suggested below:

Is there a limit to the number of pages in my document?

The density of text on the page will affect the number of pages in a document. Density of text is in turn influenced by point size, leading, column width, the number of illustrations and the amount of white space on each page.

What kind of information will the document contain?

Will there be a lot of reference material, tables and diagrams? How will you produce any tables and diagrams that you require?

Does this document have to conform to a company style?

Will it be filed with other company literature and have to fit into a standard-sized folder?

How will my document be bound?

Will it be stapled in the corner, folded and stapled in the middle, spiral-bound, glued or bound in some other way? You need to allow sufficient margin space for binding.

Is the document to be printed on one or both sides of the paper?

If the document is to be printed on one side of the paper only, you should base your design around a single master page

If the document is to be printed on both sides of the paper, you will require left and right master pages, as the binding margin needs to be swapped around on alternate pages. You will need to bear in mind that the left and right hand pages are going to be seen at the same time so they should balance and complement each other.

What is my budget?

Your budget for the task will influence your decision on paper size and type, binding, the number of illustrations, the use of color, and the time you can spend working on the document.

When you are aware of all the practical issues involved in the design of your document, you can begin to consider the details of its layout.

  Related Topics


 Deciding the number and width of columns

The number and width of columns is important to the overall look of the page. Professional designers usually start with a page grid, showing the number and width of columns, and the position of different features on the page. When deciding how many columns to have on the page, consider the following issues:

What is the page size, and what proportion of the page is devoted to text?

There is a physical limit to the number of columns you can fit into the available space. Unless your page is very wide, you probably do not want to have more than three columns on the page. A three column layout is most popular for newsletters.

Are all the columns to be equal in width?

Generally, make all the columns to be filled with the same piece of text equal in width.

How large is the body text?

The larger the body text, the wider the column should be. A line of body text should usually be no more than 65 characters long. The optimal line length for body text is considered to be between 40 and 60 characters.

Are headings meant to fit the column?

If your headings are expected to fit the column, is the column wide enough, or will any headings have to be hyphenated or split over several lines?

Where will pictures be placed in relation to the columns?

Will the pictures be at the top or bottom of the columns and will they overlap more than one column?

How much space do you need between the columns?

The column spacing should be sufficient to prevent the reader's eye running horizontally between the columns, but not so large that it makes the text look fragmented.

MasterPublisher lets you choose how many columns to have on a page, and how much space to leave around and between them. Use Column Guides in the Page menu to set the number of columns and the space to be left between the column guides.

  Related Topics


Choosing fonts, point sizes and text styles

Choosing fonts

The look of your text gives your document an immediate feel, which may invite or deter your reader from reading beyond the first page. The choice of font is a major part of this effect, and can be the most important decision you make when designing your document.

Some fonts such as Copper Black and Brushwood are ideal for producing posters and other material that has to be eye-catching. Serif fonts such as Toujours are suitable for large blocks of body text. The serifs help to guide the reader's eye horizontally along the line of text and reduce the reflection of light around the letters. Serif is particularly suitable where space is limited or columns are narrow. Sans serif fonts are more appropriate for headings, or if you are typesetting large blocks of text in very small point sizes.

Be selective in your choice of fonts. Generally, use just one font for body text and one other for the headings and subheadings.

Choosing point sizes and text styles

You may find it helpful to start by deciding what point size to use for the bulk of the text (body text). Next, think about the point sizes to use for the different heading levels. Headings should guide the reader through your document by providing sufficient visual contrast (visual cues) to mark the conclusion of one section or article and the start of another. If they are too small, they may be insignificant, and if they are too large, they may be overwhelming.

Think about the point size of other types of text, such as picture captions and headers and footers.

A change in font or style can be just as effective in providing visual contrast as a change in point size.

The more fonts you use in a document, the longer it will take to load and print.

  Related Topics


Aligning your text

The alignment of your text is another factor influencing its appearance. The alignments available in MasterPublisher are:

Centered and flushed right alignments are used for short lines of text such as headings, invitations, posters and special effects.

Flushed left and justified alignments are mostly used for body text.

Body text

Body text is usually flushed left with a ragged right margin, or justified. Some people feel that flushed left text is more readable because the spacing between words is more even and the ragged right margin adds visual interest to the page. On the other hand, a fully justified alignment is often adopted for long documents, where the unsurprising look of the text on the page is considered to be more restful to the eye. Take care, however, that a document is not so unsurprising that the reader loses interest.

Fully justified text needs careful control over the spacing between words to avoid unsightly gaps. These gaps distract the reader from the content of the document, giving it a fractured appearance. They can also line up in successive lines, giving the effect of a white river flowing down the column. A river is particularly likely to arise if the column is narrow.

  Related Topics


Setting the leading (line spacing)

The leading or line spacing, can make all the difference between text that is clear and legible and text that looks cramped.

Generally, the leading should be proportional to the point size of the text and the size of the lower case letters.

A good guideline is to make leading 20% greater than the point size, e.g. choose 12 point leading for 10 point text.

Text in very small point sizes or styled in a Sans font such as Autumn requires rather more leading to ensure legibility.

If you are using long lines of text, you may find that you need a larger leading to make sure that your readers can follow the lines easily.

Fonts with a large x-height (such as the curve on a letter d) may also need a larger leading to balance the text and space evenly.

  Related Topics


Using margins and white space

Using margins

Use margins to frame the page, making the features on the page stand out. It is more interesting to have uneven margins. The following ratios are suggested to achieve a balanced page:

Top	-  4 units, e.g. 1.00 inch (2.54 cm)

Bottom	-  8 units, e.g. 2.00 inches (5.08 cm)

Left	-  6 units, e.g. 1.50 inches (3.81 cm)

Right	-  3 units, e.g. 0.75 inch (1.91 cm)

Using white space

You don't have to fill your page with text and pictures. White space can be used as a design feature in its own right. Use white space to:

Draw the reader's attention to certain features on the page

Throw a piece of design into relief

Form the background to the text and features on the page.

  Related Topics


Balancing the page

Pages that are too evenly balanced with text and graphics are unexciting. Try to have one main visual feature such as a picture, graph or tinted frame to act as the focal point of the page. Use enough white space around the main feature to make sure that it stands out from the page.

To make a page containing only text more readable:

Make white space the main visual feature on the page

Use frame borders, shadowed boxes or tinted frames to divide the text into more readable chunks

Use effects to highlight the important points.

  Related Topics


Using MasterPublisher to achieve good page design

This Help gives you some advice about how to create good page designs using MasterPublisher.

Before starting work

Decide on your page size before you start designing your document, as this will determine the amount of space you have for text and graphics. Although you can alter the page size later, it will mean resizing all the frames on all the pages.

Before you start your work with MasterPublisher, use the program to draw a rough sketch of your document, to get a feel for the relative size of the different features on the page (e.g. text, pictures, logo); draw empty boxes to represent these features. Allow borders of white space around the features and the whole page.

Your printer may have a limited print area; bear this in mind when arranging the features on the page.

Tips to help your page design

Put items which need to be repeated, such as a company logo or a surrounding border, onto the master page.

Use frame borders to put ruling lines in your document. A vertical ruling line can be used to separate columns of unjustified text.

Position page numbers on the outer edge of the page (left on left pages and right on right pages), particularly in long documents. This helps the reader flick through the document quickly without having to open it fully.

Avoid unsightly gaps between words by using the Spacing dialog box to control the minimum and maximum space allowed.

Design a distinctive cover page and save it as part of the document.

Include graphics, boxes or tinted panels of text to liven up pages.

To create an alternative frame background for a small item of text, draw a graphics box and give it a fill style. Place the frame containing the text on top of the graphics box. The frame must have a clear frame tint so that the graphic fill style shows through the text frame.

Print the document at the best quality available to you.

Scanned illustrations often have a grainy look. If you are producing camera-ready artwork for printing at a professional bureau, consider pasting the original illustration (or photograph) onto the page.

Remember...

Don't be afraid to experiment. If you see a page layout that appeals to you, think about why you find it attractive, and how you might reproduce or adapt it with MasterPublisher.

Don't be afraid to use professional designers if you require their help, and the work is too important or complicated for you to handle. Desktop publishing is an excellent tool that lets you produce good results, but it is not a substitute for experience.

  Related Topics


Time-saving techniques

There are several ways in which you can save time when designing or working with your documents.

Documents

Create paragraph styles for the styles that you use frequently.

Shortcut menus

All objects in MasterPublisher have a shortcut menu available by right-clicking on the object. This menu contains many of the most common menu commands for that object.

Buttons

Use the shortcut buttons to gain quick access to many of the menu commands.

To turn to the first or last page of a document, use the First Page and Last Page tools, instead of scrolling through the document one page at a time.

Paragraph styles

When working on a document with several paragraph styles, set up a following paragraph style to speed up the process of styling your text. For example, set Body Text to always follow Subhead. Use the Next Style option on the Edit Paragraph Style dialog box to specify the following paragraph style.

Assign function keys to frequently used paragraph styles so that you can style your text without using the tools and menus.

Style your text by choosing a style from the paragraph style drop-down list box.

Color palette

Modify the color of text, frames and graphics by clicking on the color palette at the bottom of the MasterPublisher window, instead of using the dialog boxes.

Hiding pictures

When working on a document with several pictures, PowerText objects or OLE objects, hide them to speed up the rate at which the screen is redisplayed. Use Show Graphics on the View tab of the Preferences dialog box to turn the display of pictures, PowerText, OLE objects and decorative borders on and off.

Shortcut:

Ctrl Y turns the display of pictures or objects on or off.

Graphics

If you want to use drawn graphics within the text, wait until the text is finalized before putting them in. Otherwise, you may find that the relative position of the text to the graphics changes during text editing and reformatting, and you may then have to spend time repositioning the graphics.

Remember that when you resize a frame, any graphics objects it contains are rescaled to fit the new frame size. You can resize a frame without rescaling the graphics objects by holding down Ctrl while dragging on the frame handle to resize it.

PowerText

To edit PowerText, double-click on the PowerText to display the PowerText dialog box. Remember that you can always save frequently-used PowerText for use again and again.

Keyboard shortcuts

Learn the keyboard shortcuts. Many people find they can work faster using the keyboard, once they are familiar with the software.

Clipboard

Don't forget that you can cut, copy and paste between your documents.

Use the Clipboard and the Paste Special command from the Edit menu to paste information created in other OLE supporting programs into your MasterPublisher documents. You will then gain fast access to the features of another application without having to leave MasterPublisher.


Solving common queries

This topic lists the most common questions asked of our technical support staff. Check the MasterPublisher guide and Help before contacting our technical support department for advice.

To find the answer to your question, click on the button next to the question.

I have imported a piece of text and some characters appear that are not in the text file.

When importing text into MasterPublisher, all the tabs that I have created in the text file are lost.

I have set up some tabs but they do not position the text where I intended.

How do I put some text on the master page?

I have drawn a frame but cannot type any text into it.

Can I change my document's orientation?

The Add Pages and Delete Pages options are disabled in the Page menu.  Why can't I add or delete pages?

I am trying to delete some text. I deleted the frame containing the text but seem to have lost the text at the end instead.

PowerText objects are not displaying in my document.

I want to rescale a PowerText object, but when I resize the frame, the object doesn't change size.

I have created a PowerText object, but some of the characters have not displayed on the screen.

Can I prevent graphics objects being rescaled when I size frames?

My printer is not responding.

The edges of the page are not being printed.


Error messages

Most , if not all, of the MasterPublisher error messages now have Help buttons. If a message box appears and you don't understand what it says, click on the Help button for an explanation of why the message has appeared, and what you should do to avoid it appearing in future.

The Help for some message boxes may advise you to contact our technical support department.


Contacting technical support

You can contact our technical support department if you experience difficulties when using MasterPublisher. Before you contact us, please:

Check the MasterPublisher guide, Help, and the README file provided for information enabling you to resolve the problem yourself.

Note what you did before the problem occurred.

If you are getting an error message, or MasterPublisher is crashing, can you repeat the problem to produce the same result?

When you contact us, please:

Give your name or membership number

State that you are using MasterPublisher for Windows 95 and give the version number; you can find this by selecting About MasterPublisher in the Help menu

Know the computer, mouse, printer and any extras such as Expanded or Extended Memory that you are using. Please also mention, if possible, the size of your swap file and memory, and the amount of space you have on your hard disk.

Details for contacting technical support are provided on the registration card.


 If a text file has any formatting, MasterPublisher attempts to interpret the format characters, e.g. end of paragraph markers. If MasterPublisher cannot interpret the formatting, unexpected characters may appear when the text is imported. Additional characters may also appear if you attempt to import text using the wrong file format.


You need to set up your tab settings in MasterPublisher to the same dimensions as those in the text file. The text will then tabulate across the page. When importing text in ASCII format, all tab settings (and any other formatting) will be lost.


Tabs are calculated from the left-hand edge of the frame, not the edge of the page. To calculate the required tab position, subtract the left margin of the frame from the ruler measurement. For example, if your frame has a left margin of 1 inch and you want to set a tab at 6 inches according to the ruler measurement, the tab position would be five inches. Alternatively, set the tabs by width instead of position.


You can type or import text into frames on the master page. Text on the master page will be copied onto every new page in the document.


You have probably selected a point size that is too large to fit into the frame. Either increase the size of the frame or choose a smaller point size.


Yes. You can switch the orientation of your document by using the Page Size & Orientation command in the Page menu. You will need to adjust the frames in your document to fit on the new page layout.


The master page is probably displayed on the screen. To add or delete pages, you must not be viewing the master page.


The text is part of an imported piece of text and has been moved into the next frame, pushing the text at the end of the text out of its frame. To delete text that is part of an imported piece of text, you must select it and use the Cut command.


MasterPublisher must be set to hide pictures, which will also hide any PowerText objects. Check the Show Graphics check box on the View tab of the Preferences dialog box to turn the display of pictures and PowerText objects on.


The PowerText object has been given a fixed point size. To rescale the PowerText object so that it fills the new frame, change the point size on the Font tab in PowerText.


When the PowerText frame is not large enough to contain the whole PowerText object (for example, if you have selected a large point size), the frame will clip the characters that cannot be fitted inside the frame. To display the whole PowerText object either increase the size of the frame, or select a smaller point size.


Yes, hold down the Ctrl key as you select the frame handle, then release Ctrl and drag the frame handle until the frame is the size you want.


Check that your printer is connected to your computer, switched on, on-line and correctly set up on the Windows Control Panel. Make sure that it has not run out of paper and then try to print again. If you are still unable to print, check that you did not select an incompatible printer during the installation procedure.


 You need to adjust your printer offsets. When adjusting the printer offsets for a landscape page, remember that the Vertical and Horizontal positions (on the Page Setup dialog box) refer to the page as it comes out of the printer. Hold the page in portrait orientation when measuring by how much you need to adjust the offsets.


The MasterPublisher Tools

There are a wide range of toolbar shortcuts for the most commonly used procedures and actions in MasterPublisher. These tools are all organized into appropriate toolbars according to their use. In all there are eleven toolbars, including the Nudge Control.

Toolbox

General Tools

Frame Tools

Paragraph Tools

Text Tools

Contents Box

Frame Border Tools

Mail Merge Tools

Web Document Tools

Header and Footer Tools

You can choose whether or not the toolbars are displayed by selecting the ones you want from the Controls tab of the Preferences dialog box or from the shortcut menu that appears when you right-click on the toolbar area.

Related Topics


Toolbox

The following are available in the Toolbox. Click on a tool to pop up a description of its function.

Note:

The full selection of tools is available only when the toolbar is fully expanded. Click on the down Change Toolbar Size button to expand the toolbar.

Related Topics


General Tools

The following are available in the General Tools. Click on a tool to pop up a description of its function.

Note:

The full selection of tools is available only when the toolbar is fully expanded. Click on the right Change Toolbar Size button to expand the toolbar.

Related Topics


Frame Tools

The following are available in the Frame Tools. Click on a tool to pop up a description of its function.

Note:

The full selection of tools is available only when the toolbar is fully expanded. Click on the right Change Toolbar Size button to expand the toolbar.

Related Topics


Paragraph Tools

The following are available in the Paragraph Tools. Click on a tool to pop up a description of its function.

Note:

The full selection of tools is available only when the toolbar is fully expanded. Click on the right Change Toolbar Size button to expand the toolbar.

Related Topics


Text Tools

The following are available in the Text Tools. Click on a tool to pop up a description of its function.

Note:

The full selection of tools is available only when the toolbar is fully expanded. Click on the right Change Toolbar Size button to expand the toolbar.

Related Topics


Contents Box

The following are available in the Contents Box tools. Click on a tool to pop up a description of its function.

Note:

The full selection of tools is available only when the toolbar is fully expanded. Click on the right Change Toolbar Size button to expand the toolbar.

Related Topics


Border Tools
Frame Border Tools

The following are available in the Border Tools. Click on a tool to pop up a description of its function.

Related Topics


Mail Merge Tools

The following are available in the Mail Merge Tools. Click on a tool to pop up a description of its function.

Related Topics


Web Document Tools

The following are available in the Web Document Tools. Click on a tool to pop up a description of its function.

Related Topics


Header and Footer Tools

The following are available in the Header and Footer Tools. Click on a tool to pop up a description of its function.

Related Topics


General Tools


This is the toolbar shortcut for the New command in the File menu.

Click on it to display the New Document dialog box.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Open command in the File menu.

Click on it to display the Open Document dialog box, and open a previously saved document.

Keyboard shortcut:  Ctrl O


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Save command in the File menu.

Click on it to save any changes you have made to the document on which you are currently working. If you have not yet given the document a name, the Save Document As dialog box appears.

Keyboard shortcut:  Ctrl S


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Print command in the File menu.

Click on it to display the Print dialog box and print your document to paper or to disk.

Keyboard shortcut:  Ctrl P


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Cut command in the Edit menu.

Click on it to remove selected items from your page and place them on the Windows Clipboard.

Keyboard shortcut:  Ctrl X


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Copy command in the Edit menu.

Click on it to copy selected items from your page and place them on the Windows Clipboard.

Keyboard shortcut:  Ctrl C


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Paste command in the Edit menu.

Click on it to paste the contents of the Windows Clipboard onto your page.

Keyboard shortcut:  Ctrl V


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Undo command in the Edit menu.

Click on it to undo the last edit you made to your document.

Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl Z


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Redo command in the Edit menu.

Click on it to redo the last undone command.

Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl A


This tool toggles between whole page view and the view size that is currently selected in the View menu.

When Fit Page view is selected in the View menu, this tool toggles between whole page view and actual view size.


This tool toggles between showing the markers selected in the Preferences dialog box and showing no markers at all.

Keyboard Shortcut: Ctrl E


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Edit Colors command in the Edit menu.

Click on it to display the Colors dialog box, and then click on the Edit button to edit the colors in the color palette.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Snap to Guides & Grid check box on the Document tab of the Preferences dialog box.

When snapping is turned on, frames jump to align themselves with the column guides and grid.  Toggle this tool to turn snapping on and off.


Contents Box


In the contents box, this tool is the toolbar shortcut for the Import Picture command in the File menu.

Click on it to display the Import Picture dialog box and import a picture into your document.


In the contents box, this tool is the toolbar shortcut for the Import Text command in the File menu.

Click on it to display the Import Text dialog box and import a piece of text into your document.


In the contents box, this tool displays the Picture Status or Text Status dialog box, depending on the item highlighted in the contents list.


In the contents box, this tool deletes the item selected in the contents list from the document.


Lists the text, bitmaps, line-art and OLE objects used in the current document. Click on an item in the list to place it in the selected frame.


In the contents box, this tool marks the item selected in the contents list to be kept, even if you delete the frame containing the item from the document.

To remove the 'kept' marker, click on this button again.


Paragraph Tools


Use the Paragraph Style drop-down list box to select a different paragraph style for the paragraph containing the text insertion point.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Paragraph Style command in the Restore submenu of the Text menu.

Click on it to reset the attributes of the paragraph containing the text insertion point back to those of the underlying paragraph style.

Keyboard shortcut:  Ctrl Shift N


Click on this tool to display the Edit Paragraph Style tabbed dialog box and define the font, layout, spacing, bullets and tabs for the selected paragraph style.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Update Paragraph Style command in the Text menu. Click on it to update the current paragraph style to match the attributes of the selected text.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Flushed Left option in the Indents & Layout dialog box.

Click on it to make the paragraph containing the text insertion point left-aligned.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Centered option in the Indents & Layout dialog box.

Click on it to make the paragraph containing the text insertion point centered.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Justified option in the Indents & Layout dialog box.

Click on it to make the paragraph containing the text insertion point justified.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Flushed Right option in the Indents & Layout dialog box.

Click on it to make the paragraph containing the text insertion point right-aligned.


Click on this tool to apply the default bullet to the paragraph containing the text insertion point. You use this tool to toggle between a paragraph with or without a bullet point.


Click on this tool to apply the default numbering style to the paragraph containing the text insertion point. You use this tool to toggle between a paragraph with or without numbering.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the tight line spacing button in the Spacing dialog box.

Click on it to apply tight line spacing (i.e. 100% leading) to the paragraph containing the text insertion point.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the standard line spacing button in the Spacing dialog box.

Click on it to apply standard line spacing (i.e. 120% leading) to the paragraph containing the text insertion point.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the loose line spacing button in the Spacing dialog box.

Click on it to apply loose line spacing (i.e. 150% leading) to the paragraph containing the text insertion point.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Space Between Paragraphs settings in the Indents & Layout tab of the Edit Paragraph Style dialog box.

This option takes away any space before the chosen paragraph.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Space Between Paragraphs settings in the Indents & Layout tab of the Edit Paragraph Style dialog box.

This option puts a small space before the chosen paragraph.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Space Between Paragraphs settings in the Indents & Layout tab of the Edit Paragraph Style dialog box.

This option puts a large space before the chosen paragraph.


Text Tools


Use the Font drop-down list box to choose a different font for a selected block of text, or to pre-set the font before typing text.


Use the Point Size drop-down list box to choose a different point size for a selected block of text, or to pre-set the point size before typing text.


Use the Width control to set a different width for a selected block of text, or to pre-set the width before typing text.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Bold style option from the Font tab.

Click on this tool to apply bold styling to selected text or text you are about to type.

Keyboard shortcut:  Ctrl B


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Italic style option from the Font tab.

Click on this tool to apply italic styling to selected text or text you are about to type.

Keyboard shortcut:  Ctrl I


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Single underline style option from the Font tab.

Click on this tool to apply single underlining to selected text or text you are about to type.

Keyboard shortcut:  Ctrl U


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Subscript style option from the Font tab.

Click on this tool to move selected text or text you are about to type down half a line and reduce its point size.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Superscript style option from the Font tab.

Click on this tool to move selected text or text you are about to type up half a line and reduce its point size.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Font command in the Restore submenu of the Text menu.

Click on it to reset the font attributes of the selected text, or text you are about to type, to those of the underlying paragraph style.

Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl N


Mail Merge Tools


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Mail Merge command in the File menu.

Click on it to display the Edit Mailing List dialog box, from which you can add, edit or open a mailing list.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Mail Merge Field command in the Insert submenu of the Text menu.

Click on it to display the Insert Mail Merge Field dialog box, from which you can insert a mail merge field.


Click on this tool to move to the first item in your mailing list.


Click on this tool to move to the previous item in your mailing list.


Click on this tool to move to the next item in your mailing list.


Click on this tool to move to the last item in your mailing list.


Toolbox


Click on this to draw a rectangular frame. This shape remains selected until you choose a different shape frame tool from the Toolbox.


Click on this to draw a rounded box frame. This shape remains selected until you choose a different shape frame tool from the Toolbox.


Click on this to draw a round or oval frame. This shape remains selected until you choose a different shape frame tool from the Toolbox.


Click on this to draw a star frame. This shape remains selected until you choose a different shape frame tool from the Toolbox.


Click on this to draw a straight line.

If you finish the line close to the starting point, the points will be joined and the line becomes a frame.


Click on this to draw a curved line.

If you finish the line close to the starting point, the points will be joined and the line becomes a frame.


Click on this to draw a freehand line.

If you finish the line close to the starting point, the points will be joined and the line becomes a frame.


Click on this to insert a design snippet into your document.

The Insert Design Snippet dialog box appears, from which you can select and insert a design snippet.


Click on this to insert a table into your document.

The Insert Table dialog box appears, from which you can choose the number of rows and columns for your table and a table style.


Click on this to import a picture into your document.

The Import Picture dialog box appears, from which you can select and import a picture.


Click on this to add a PowerText effect or edit the selected PowerText effect.


Click on this to add or edit a MasterDraw object in your document.

The MasterDraw window appears, in which you can create or edit the MasterDraw picture.


Click on this tool to insert an object into your document or to edit the selected object.


Nudge Tools


Use the nudge control to ‘nudge’ the selected frame(s) by a small amount.


Click on this to rotate the selected frame ? degrees to the right.


Click on this to rotate the selected frame ? degrees to the left.


Page Controls


Click on this to move to the first page of your document.


Click on this to move to the page immediately before the page you are currently on.


This displays the number of the page you are currently working on. Click on it to display the Go To Page dialog box and specify a page to go to.


Click on this to go to the page immediately after the page you are on.


Click on this to move to the last page of your document.


Click on this to add a page after the current page.


View Size Controls


Click on this to reduce the view size of your document to the next available view size.


This displays the percentage view size of your document. Click on it to display a shortcut menu, from which you can choose a specific view size.


Click on this to increase the view size of your document to the next available view size.


Color bar and buttons


Left-click on this to remove the fill style or color from the selected frame, picture or text. Right-click to display a shortcut menu, from which you can select which item you want to remove the color from.


Click on this to scroll the color bar and view more of the color available in the current palette.


Left-click on a color in to color the fill style of the selected frame, picture or text. If the fill color is a graduated fill style, left-click changes the ‘from’ color and Shift-click changes the ‘to’ color.

Right-click on a color to display a shortcut menu, from which you can select the item to color.


Click on this to scroll the color bar and view more of the colors available in the selected palette.


Click on this to display the Add Color dialog box, from which you can create and add a new color to the selected palette.


Frame Tools


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Shape, Size, Position & Angle, Border, Background, Picture Attributes and Text Attributes commands in the Frame menu.

Click on it to display the Frame Properties dialog box, and select the tab you want.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt Enter


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Nudge to Front command in the Frame menu.

Click on it to move the selected frame in front of the frame that was previously in front of it.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt =


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Nudge to Back command in the Frame menu.

Click on it to move the selected frame behind the frame that was previously behind it.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt -


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Align command in the Frame menu.

Click on it to display the Align Frames dialog box and align the selected group of frames relative to each other.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt I


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Crop Picture command in the Frame menu.

Click on it to display the Picture Cropping dialog box, from which you can select the area you want to crop the picture to.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Group and Ungroup commands in the Frame menu.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt G, Alt U


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Lock Frame command in the Frame menu.

When this tool is selected, the selected frame cannot be moved, resized, rotated or deleted.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt L


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Frame Repels Text button on the Shape tab of the Frame Properties dialog box.

When this tool is selected, text in frames beneath the selected frame(s) is repelled around the border of the selected frame(s). When the tool is not selected, text runs underneath the border of the frame.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Fit button on the Frame Picture tab of the Frame Properties dialog box.

Click on this tool to resize the frame so that it matches the size of the picture it contains.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Stretch button on the Frame Picture tab of the Frame Properties dialog box.

Click on this tool to resize the picture so that it matches the size of its frame.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Center button on the Frame Picture tab of the Frame Properties dialog box.

Click on this tool to reposition the picture so that it is in the center of its frame.


Header and Footer Tools


Click on this to insert a page number into the selected header or footer.

If the page order changes, this will be updated automatically.


Click on this to insert the number of pages in the document into the selected header or footer.

If the number of pages changes, this will be updated automatically.


Click on this to insert the current date into the selected header or footer.

If the date changes, this will be updated automatically.


Select whether you want to apply the header or footer to just the current page or the whole document.


Click on this to restore the currently selected header or footer to whatever the default for the whole document is.

This tool is only enabled when you have made a change to the header or footer that only applies to the current page.


Click on this to remove the contents of the current header or footer frame.


Border Tools


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Table Style command in the Table menu.

Click on it to display the Table Auto Style dialog box, from which you can select and apply a new table style to the selected table.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the top edge only option from the Border Styles tab of the Frame Properties dialog box.

Click on this tool to give the frame a top border.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the left edge only option from the Border Styles tab of the Frame Properties dialog box.

Click on this tool to give the frame a left border.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the right edge only option from the Border Styles tab of the Frame Properties dialog box.

Click on this tool to give the frame a right border.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the bottom edge only option from the Border Styles tab of the Frame Properties dialog box.

Click on this tool to give the frame a bottom border.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the all edges option from the Border Styles tab of the Frame Properties dialog box.

Click on this tool to give the frame all four borders.


Use the border category drop-down list box to select which type of border styles you want to be displayed in the border style drop-down list box.


Use the border style drop-down list box to choose a style for the border(s) of the selected frame.

The list shows the top edge of the border style. If the top edge is empty, either the bottom or side edge will be used to give you some idea of the style.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Grid option on the Border Styles tab of the Table Cell Properties dialog box.

Click on it to apply the selected border style to the grid lines of the selected table.


Web Document Tools


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Bookmarks command in the Edit menu.

Click on it to display the Bookmarks dialog box, from which you can add and edit bookmarks in your document.

Keyboard shortcut: Alt #


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Add/Edit Web Links command in the Edit menu.

Click on it to display the Add/Edit Web Link dialog box, from which you can add and edit Web links in your document.


Click on this to go to the bookmark that the selected item is linked to.


This is the toolbar shortcut for the Export Web Document command in the File menu.

Click on it to export your MasterPublisher document as a Web document.


These tools are used to change the size of the toolbar.

Click on the right-facing arrow to expand the toolbar. When the toolbar is at its largest size, this button is disabled.

Click on the left-facing arrow to collapse the toolbar. When the toolbar is at its smallest size, this button is disabled.


These tools are used to change the size of the toolbar.

Click on the down-facing arrow to expand the toolbar. When the toolbar is at its largest size, this button is disabled.

Click on the up-facing arrow to collapse the toolbar. When the toolbar is at its smallest size, this button is disabled.


Tutorial one


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Welcome to the MasterPublisher Tutorials! This is the first of eight tutorials we have put online to make them easier to work through. To move on to the next page, just click on the Next (>>) button.

While creating your standard memo, you will learn how to:

Create and set up column guides

Draw frames

Copy and paste frames

Drag and resize frames

Type in text

Format text.

Working with frames is a vital part of MasterPublisher, as frames contain everything that makes up the finished document.

 Where this icon appears, click on it to display a popup hint.

If you click on a tool name, a popup will appear containing its picture.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Setting up the page

1.	From the View menu, select Fit Window. The width of the page now fits the width of the work area.

2.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

3.	Click on the View tab.

4.	In the View Markers group box, make sure the Frames & Margins check box is checked.

5.	Click on OK.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Setting the column guides

1.	From the Page menu, select Margins & Column Guides. The Page dialog box appears with the Margins & Columns tab selected.

2.	In the Column Guides group box, type 2 in the Number of Columns box.

3.	In the Columns Gap box, type 0.5.

4.	Click on OK. The column guides change on the page.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Headers and Footers

Headers and footers can contain information about your document such as the name of the author or page numbers.

Adding headers and footers

1.	From the Page menu, select Edit Header. The Header and Footer Tools appear and the text insertion point appears in the header frame at the top of the page.

2.	In the Header and Footer Tools, click on the Insert Date tool. The date appears in the header frame.

3.	Click outside the header frame to close the Header and Footer tools.

4.	From the Page menu, select Edit Footer. The text insertion point appears in the footer frame at the bottom of the page.

5.	Type Documentation.

6.	Click outside the footer frame to close the Header and Footer Tools.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Using frames to create a page layout

To turn on frame snapping:

1.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	In the Grid group box, make sure the Snap to Guides & Grid check box is checked.

3.	In the Grid Size box, make sure 0.04 is selected.

4.	Click on OK.

5.	Use the scroll bar at the right-hand side of the desktop to scroll up so that the top of the page is visible.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Drawing frame one

To draw your first frame:

1.	From the extended Toolbox, make sure the Box tool is selected.

2.	Position the frame cursor in the top left-hand corner of the left column guide.

3.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

4.	Drag the frame cursor diagonally down and to the right, so that the frame reaches the left edges of the TO: and FROM: frames and the bottom of the frame reaches the top of the DATE: frame.

5.	Release the mouse button. A frame is drawn on the page with eight handles around it, showing that it is selected.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Drawing frame two

You now need to draw another frame alongside the TO: frame:

1.	Position the frame cursor on the page at the top right-hand corner of the TO: frame, inside the right-hand column guide.

2.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

3.	Drag the frame cursor diagonally down and to the right, until the frame is the same height as the TO: frame and reaches to the right-hand edge of the right column guide.

4.	Release the mouse button. A frame is drawn on the page with eight handles around it, showing that it is selected.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Adding a border

You are now going to add a border to the frame you have just drawn:

1.	From the Frame menu, select Border. The Frame Properties dialog box appears with the Border Styles tab selected.

2.	From the Style drop-down list box, select Traditional.

3.	Click on the border style at the top of the list. The border appears around the selected frame.

4.	Make sure that the Custom Width check box is cleared.

5.	In the Sides group box, clear the top, right and left check boxes, so that only the bottom one is checked. The border appears along the bottom of the selected frame.

6.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Copying and pasting frames

1.	Make sure that the second frame you drew is still selected.

2.	In the General Tools, click on the Copy tool to make a copy of the frame.

3.	In the General Tools, click on the Paste tool. A copy of the frame is pasted on top of the original.

4.	Click on the Paste tool once more. The two copies are stacked on top of the original frame with the top frame selected.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Dragging frames

To move the frames that you have copied and pasted:

1.	Position the mouse pointer over the selected frame. The frame cursor changes to a four-headed arrow.

2.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

3.	Drag the frame down so that it is below the original frame and level with the FROM: frame.

4.	Release the mouse button. The selected frame now appears in its new position.

5.	Select the other pasted frame on top of the original. The frame cursor changes to a four-headed arrow.

6.	Drag this pasted frame next to the RE: frame, so that the left-hand edge of the pasted frame is level with the right-hand edge of the RE: frame.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Resizing frames

To resize your frame:

1.	Make sure the frame next to the RE: frame is still selected.

2.	Position the frame cursor over the middle right-hand frame handle. The frame cursor changes to a horizontal double-headed arrow.

3.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

4.	Drag the arrow to the right until the frame extends to the right-hand edge of the right column guide.

5.	Release the mouse button. The frame is now resized.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Typing text into frames

1.	Select the empty frame in the top left-hand corner of the page.

2.	Make sure that Caps Lock is selected on your keyboard.

3.	Type MEMO.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Formatting text

You are now going to format the text you have just typed:

1.	Double-click on MEMO to select it.

2.	From the Font drop-down list box in the Text Tools, select Copper Black. The text changes font.

3.	From the Point Size drop-down list box in the Text Tools, select 72.

4.	In the Paragraph Tools, click on the Centered tool. The text is now centered in the frame.

5.	In the color bar at the bottom of the desktop, click on 100% Dark Blue. The text changes color.

6.	In the Text Tools, click on the Underline tool. The text is now underlined.

7.	Click away from the page to make sure nothing is selected.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial One: Creating a memo
Creating a memo

Hiding frames and margins

For a better view of the finished memo, you are going to hide the frames and column guides:

1.	From the View menu, select Fit Page. The whole page is now displayed in the work area.

2.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

3.	Click on the View tab.

4.	In the View Markers group box, make sure the Frames & Margins and Printer Margins check boxes are cleared.

5.	Click on OK. This gives you a better idea of what the finished document would look like if it were printed out.

This tutorial has explained how to work with frames and text. You can now go on to create similar documents of your own using the skills you have learnt from this tutorial.


Tutorial two


Tutorial Two: Creating a Halloween poster
Creating a Halloween poster

Welcome to the MasterPublisher Tutorials! This is the second of eight tutorials we have put online to make them easier to work through. To move on to the next page, just click on the Next (>>) button.

While creating your Halloween poster, you will learn how to:

Draw a round frame

Size and align frames

Add color to frames

Edit a border

Import a picture.

Working with frames is a vital part of MasterPublisher, as frames contain everything that makes up the finished document.

 Where this icon appears, click on it to display a popup hint.

If you click on a tool name, a popup will appear containing its picture.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Two: Creating a Halloween poster
Creating a Halloween poster

Setting up the page

1.	In the extended General Tools, click on the Fit Page tool. The whole page is now visible in the work area.

2.	Right-click on the pasteboard. A shortcut menu appears.

3.	From the shortcut menu, make sure the Show Frames and Guides option is checked.

4.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

5.	In the Startup group box, clear the Frames Repel Text check box.

6.	Click on OK.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Two: Creating a Halloween poster
Creating a Halloween poster

Drawing a round frame

1.	From the extended Toolbox, select the Ellipse tool.

2.	Position the frame cursor just below the bottom left-hand corner of the top frame.

3.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

4.	Drag the frame cursor down and to the right, towards the top right-hand corner of the bottom frame.

5.	Release the mouse button. A round frame is drawn roughly in the middle of the page.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Two: Creating a Halloween poster
Creating a Halloween poster

Sizing frames

1.	Make sure the round frame is selected.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Size, Position & Angle. The Frame Properties dialog box appears with the Size and Position tab selected.

3.	In the Width box, type 6.

4.	In the Height box, type 6.

5.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Two: Creating a Halloween poster
Creating a Halloween poster

Aligning frames

To make sure the frame you have drawn is in the correct place, you can align it with another frame:

1.	Make sure the round frame you have just drawn is still selected.

2.	Hold down Ctrl and select the frame with the ‘witch’ border.

3.	Release Ctrl.

3.	From the Frame menu, select Align. The Align Frames dialog box appears.

4.	In the Vertical group box, select Middle.

5.	In the Horizontal group box, select Center.

6.	Click on OK. The round frame is now positioned directly in the center of the large bordered frame.

7.	Deselect both frames by clicking anywhere outside the page.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Two: Creating a Halloween poster
Creating a Halloween poster

Adding color to frames

You are now going to add some color to the frame with the ‘witch’ border:

1.	Select the frame with the ‘witch’ border.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Background. The Frame Properties dialog box appears with the Background tab selected.

3.	Select the fourth fill style on the bottom row.

4.	From the top drop-down color palette, select Fuchsia.

5.	Drag the tint slider to the left until it displays a 50% tint. The changes are shown in the preview window.

6.	From the bottom drop-down color palette, select Dark Blue.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Two: Creating a Halloween poster
Creating a Halloween poster

Editing a border

You now need to change the color of the border:

1.	On the Frame Properties dialog box, click on the Border Styles tab.

2.	Check the Color check box above the drop-down color palette.

3.	From the drop-down color palette, select Orange. The border changes to orange.

4.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Two: Creating a Halloween poster
Creating a Halloween poster

Clearing a background color

An easy way to make sure that two overlapping frames appear the same color is to clear the color of the frame in front:

1.	Select the frame at the bottom of the page.

2.	Right-click on the Clear Color button (X) at the left of the color bar. A shortcut menu appears.

3.	Select Frame background. This clears the frame of color, so you can see through to the frame behind.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Two: Creating a Halloween poster
Creating a Halloween poster

Importing a picture

To add a picture to your Halloween poster:

1.	Select the round frame.

2.	Insert the MasterClips Publisher CD into your CD-ROM drive.

3.	From the File menu, select Import Picture. The Import Picture dialog box appears.

4.	In the Name box, type C:\PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER\DOCUMENTS where C: is the drive you installed MasterPublisher onto.

5.	Double-click on TUTORIALS. Previews of all the pictures in this folder are shown in the preview area.

6.	Select Castle5.

7.	Click on Open. The picture is now imported into the selected frame.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Two: Creating a Halloween poster
Creating a Halloween poster

Editing a picture

1.	Make sure the frame is still selected.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Picture Attributes. The Frame Properties dialog box appears with the Frame Picture tab selected.

3.	In the Resizing group box, click on the Stretch button. The picture stretches to fit the frame.

4.	In the Flip Picture group box, check the Horizontally check box. The picture now flips horizontally over a vertical axis.

5.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar.

Your poster is now finished. This tutorial has explained how to work with color and how to import a picture into your document.


Tutorial three


Tutorial Three: Editing a multi-page flier
Adding to a multi-page flier

Welcome to the MasterPublisher Tutorials! This is the third of eight tutorials we have put online to make them easier to work through. To move on to the next page, just click on the Next (>>) button.

While editing your multi-page flier, you will learn how to:

Rotate frames

Add a border

Import text

Format text.

 Where this icon appears, click on it to display a popup hint.

If you click on a tool name, a popup will appear containing its picture.

Click on the Next button (>>).


Tutorial Three: Editing a multi-page flier
Adding to a multi-page flier

Setting up your page

1.	On your keyboard press down Ctrl, Shift and P. The whole page is now visible in the work area.

2.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

3.	Click on the View tab.

4.	In the View Markers group box, make sure the Frames & Margins check box is checked.

5.	Click on OK.

6.	Click on the First Page button to the left of the page indicator, to make sure that Page 1 is displayed in the work area.

You will now go on to add the finishing touches to the flier.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Three: Editing a multi-page flier
Adding to a multi-page flier

Ungrouping a frame

You can change the shape of a frame by ungrouping it and altering the individual frame points:

1.	Select the frame containing the blue flower.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Ungroup. The frame handles change to frame points.

3.	Position the mouse pointer over the top right-hand frame point. The mouse pointer changes to a pointer with a four-headed arrow at its base.

4.	Right-click on the point. The point shortcut menu appears.

5.	From the shortcut menu, select Make Curve. The corner of the frame becomes curved.

6.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 with the bottom left-hand frame point. The frame now has two curved corners.

7.	From the Frame menu, select Group. The frame is now grouped again.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Three: Editing a multi-page flier
Adding to a multi-page flier

Rotating frames

You are now going to rotate the frame containing the rose:

1.	Select the frame containing the rose.

2.	Move the mouse pointer over the top right-hand frame handle. The mouse pointer changes to a circular arrow.

3.	Hold down Ctrl on your keyboard.

4.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

5.	Drag the frame handle down. You will notice an outline of the frame appears as a guideline.

6.	When the frame is rotated 45 degrees, release the mouse button and the Ctrl key.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Three: Editing a multi-page flier
Adding to a multi-page flier

Adding a border

You are now going to add a border to the document:

1.	Select the large green frame on the right-hand side of the page.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Border. The Frame Properties dialog box appears with the Border Styles tab selected.

3.	From the Style drop-down list box, select Miscellaneous.

4.	Scroll through the border styles and select the green vine border.

The border appears around the frame.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Three: Editing a multi-page flier
Adding to a multi-page flier

Changing the width of a border

You are now going to change the width of the border:

1.	Check the Custom Width check box.

2.	In the Width box, type 0.5. The border changes size accordingly.

3.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Three: Editing a multi-page flier
Adding to a multi-page flier

Changing text color

1.	Select the frame at the bottom of the page with the red text.

2.	Position the mouse pointer at the beginning of MORE INSIDE...... The mouse pointer changes to an I-beam.

3.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

4.	Drag the mouse pointer along to the right until all of the text is highlighted.

5.	In the color bar at the bottom of the desktop, click on 100% Dark Blue.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Three: Editing a multi-page flier
Adding to a multi-page flier

Formatting text

1.	Select the frame with the text EXCITING SPECIAL OFFERS!.

2.	Position the mouse pointer at the beginning of the text. The mouse pointer changes to an I-beam.

3.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

4.	Drag the mouse diagonally down and to the right until all the text in the frame is highlighted.

5.	In the Paragraph Tools, click on the Centered tool. The text is now centered in the frame.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Three: Editing a multi-page flier
Adding to a multi-page flier

Using the line tool

You are going to draw an arrow on the map between the N and the traffic circle:

1.	From the extended Toolbox, select the Line tool.

2.	Position the line cursor just below the N on the map.

3.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

4.	Drag the line cursor down, keeping the line straight, so it is positioned just above the traffic circle.

5.	Release the left mouse button. A vertical line is drawn underneath the N.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Three: Editing a multi-page flier
Adding to a multi-page flier

Changing the line style

You are now going to change the style of the line you have just drawn:

1.	Make sure the line you have just drawn is still selected.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Border. The Frame Properties dialog box appears with the Border Styles tab selected.

3.	From the Start drop-down list box, select the first arrow style.

4.	In the Width box, type 0.05.

5.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar.

6.	Click on the Next Page button on the right of the page indicator. Page 2 is displayed.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Three: Editing a multi-page flier
Adding to a multi-page flier

Importing text

1.	Select the long empty frame on the right-hand side of the page.

2.	Insert the MasterClips Publisher CD into your CD-ROM drive.

3.	From the File menu, select Import Text. The Import Text dialog box appears.

4.	In the Look In drop-down list box, select the drive which you installed MasterPublisher onto. This would normally be C.

5.	From the Files of type drop-down list box, select Plain Text (.txt).

6.	Double-click on the PROGRAM FILES folder, the IMSI folder, the MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER folder, then the DOCUMENTS folder and finally the TUTORIALS folder.

7.	Select Garden1.txt.

8.	Click on Open. The text is imported into the frame.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial Three: Editing a multi-page flier
Adding to a multi-page flier

Formatting text

1.	From the View menu, select Fit Selection. The page is now zoomed in on the selected frame.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the text. The mouse pointer changes to an I-beam.

3.	Click the right mouse button. The text shortcut menu appears.

4.	From the text shortcut menu, select Select all text. All the text in the frame is now selected.

5.	From the Font drop-down list box in the Text Tools, select Arial.

6.	From the Point Size drop-down list box in the Text Tools, select 10.

Your garden center flier is now finished. You can use all the skills you have learned from this tutorial to go on and create other useful documents.


Tutorial four


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Welcome to the MasterPublisher Tutorials! This is the fourth of eight tutorials we have put online to make them easier to work through. To move on to the next page, just click on the Next (>>) button.

While making your calendar, you will learn how to:

Create a table

Edit a paragraph style

Import a picture.

Working with tables is a useful part of MasterPublisher as many documents can use tables.

 Where this icon appears, click on it to display a popup hint.

If you click on a tool name, a popup will appear containing its picture.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Setting up your page

1.	Click on the View Size control above the color bar at the bottom of the desktop. A shortcut menu appears.

2.	From the shortcut menu, select Fit Page. The whole page is now visible in the work area.

3.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

4.	Click on the View tab.

5.	In the View Markers group box, make sure the Frames & Margins check box is checked.

6.	Click on OK.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Drawing frame one

You need to create frames for your page layout. To draw your first frame:

1.	From the extended Toolbox, make sure the Box tool is selected.

2.	Position the frame cursor in the top left-hand corner of the page.

3.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

4.	Drag the frame cursor diagonally down and to the right, until the frame has a width of approximately 4 inches and a height of approximately 2.5 inches.

5.	Release the mouse button. A frame is drawn in the top left-hand corner of the page.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Drawing frame two

You are now going to draw a second frame underneath the one you have just drawn:

1.	Position the frame cursor under the bottom left-hand corner of the frame you have just drawn.

2.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

3.	Drag the frame cursor diagonally down and to the right, until the frame fills the rest of the page.

4.	Release the mouse button. A frame is drawn underneath the first frame, covering the rest of the page.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Sizing and positioning frame one

1.	Select the first frame you drew.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Size, Position & Angle. The Frame Properties dialog box appears with the Size and Position tab selected.

3.	In the Left Position text box type 0.4.

4.	In the Top Position text box, type 0.20.

5.	In the Width text box, type 4.

6.	In the Height text box, type 2.5.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Sizing and positioning frame two

1.	Select the second frame you drew.

2.	In the Left Position text box, type 0.40.

3.	In the Top Position text box, type 2.8.

4.	In the Width text box, type 7.65.

5.	In the Height text box, type 7.5.

6.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Inserting a table

Tables help to display separate pieces of information in an orderly and attractive way.

1.	Make sure the second frame you drew is still selected.

2.	From the extended Toolbox, select the Table tool. The Insert Table dialog box appears.

3.	In the Number of Rows text box, type 6.

4.	In the Number of Columns text box, type 7.

5.	In the preview area, click on Table 11.

6.	Click on OK. The table appears in the selected frame.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Adding a border to the table

1.	From the View menu, select Fit Window. The page is now the width of the window to make it easier to see the table.

2.	From the Table menu, select Select Table. The table is selected.

3.	From the Table menu, select Borders & Background. The Table Cell Properties dialog box appears.

4.	In the Sides list box, select Left.

5.	Hold down Shift on your keyboard.

6.	In the Sides list box, select Bottom. The first four options in the list are now all selected.

7.	Release Shift and the mouse pointer.

8.	In the Width text box, type 0.1. The border width changes accordingly.

9.	From the Color drop-down palette, select Blue.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Adding a border to the table grid

1.	In the Sides list box, select Grid.

2.	In the Width text box, type 0.05.

3.	From the Color drop-down palette, select Dark Blue.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Adding a background to the table

1.	On the Table Cell Properties dialog box, click on the Background tab.

2.	From the Style list box, select the third texture on the bottom row. The texture appears in the table.

3.	In the Attributes group box, check the Custom Color check box.

4.	From the Color drop-down palette, select Red.

5.	Drag the Detail slider all the way towards High.

6.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Typing text into the table

To add text to your calendar:

1.	Position the frame cursor inside the cell in the top left-hand corner of the table. The mouse pointer changes to an I-beam.

2.	Click the left mouse button. The text insertion point appears in the cell.

3.	Type Mon. The text appears in the cell.

4.	Press Tab on your keyboard. The text insertion point moves to the next cell.

5.	Type Tues. and press Tab.

6.	Type Wed., Thurs., Fri., Sat. and Sun. in the other cells in the top row.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

You are now going to add the numbers to the calendar. June 1998 begins on a Monday.

1.	Press Tab. The text insertion point moves to the first cell in the Mon. column.

2.	Starting from this cell type in the numbers 1-30 in sequence, pressing Tab to move to the next cell.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Editing a paragraph style

You are now going to change the font, point size and color of the text in the table:

1.	From the Paragraph Tools, select the Edit Paragraph Style tool. The Edit Paragraph Style ‘normal’ dialog box appears.

2.	From the Font drop-down list box, select Comic Strip MN.

3.	From the Point Size drop-down list box, select 18.

4.	From the Color drop-down palette, select Dark Blue.

5.	Click on OK. The dialog box closes and the text appears as you have specified.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Resizing your table

You are going to resize your table to fit the frame.

1.	From the View menu, select Fit Page. The whole page is now visible in the work area.

2.	From the Table menu, select Select Table.

3.	Position the mouse pointer over the bottom edge of the table. The mouse pointer changes to a double-headed arrow.

4.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

5.	Drag the arrow down until the bottom edge of the table reaches the bottom edge of the frame.

6.	Release the mouse button. The table now fits the frame and the cells have all resized proportionately.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Adding a heading

You need to add a heading for your calendar:

1.	Select the first frame you drew at the top of the page.

2.	From the View menu, select Fit Selection. The selected frame is now magnified to make entering text easier.

3.	Make sure Caps Lock is selected on your keyboard.

4.	Type JUNE.

5.	On your keyboard, press Enter.

6.	Type 1998.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Selecting a font, point size and color

1.	Right-click on the text. The text shortcut menu appears.

2.	Select Select all text. All the text is now selected.

3.	From the Point Size drop-down list box in the Text Tools, select 72.

4.	In the color bar, click on 100% Red. The selected text changes color.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Importing a picture

To add a finishing touch, you are going to import a picture:

1.	From the View menu, select Fit Page. The whole page is now displayed.

2.	Click away from the page to deselect any frames.

3.	Insert the MasterClips Publisher CD into your CD-ROM drive.

4.	In the Toolbox, select the Picture tool. The Import Picture dialog box appears.

5.	In the Name box, type C:\ PROGRAM FILES\IMSI\MASTERCLIPS PUBLISHER \DOCUMENTS where C:\ is the drive you installed MasterPublisher onto.

6.	Double-click on Tutorials. Previews of all the pictures in this folder are shown in the preview area.

7.	Select Balloons.

8.	Click on Open. A frame is created into which the picture is imported.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial four: Making a calendar
Making a calendar

Positioning your picture

1.	Make sure the frame is still selected.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the frame. The mouse pointer changes to a four headed arrow.

3.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

4.	Drag the frame into the top right-hand corner of the page.

5.	Release the mouse button.

6.	Position the mouse pointer over the bottom left-hand frame handle. The mouse pointer changes to a double-headed diagonal arrow.

7.	Press and hold down the left mouse button.

8.	Drag the arrow up and to the right until the frame fits into the top right-hand corner of the page.

9.	Release the mouse button. The balloon picture appears in its new position.

With a small amount of editing, your finished calendar can be used for any month.


Tutorial five


Tutorial five: Designing a newsletter
Designing a newsletter

Welcome to the MasterPublisher Tutorials! This is the fifth of eight tutorials we have put online to make them easier to work through. To move on to the next page, just click on the Next (>>) button.

While adding the finishing touches to your newsletter, you will learn how to:

Edit text

Flow text into frames

Add page numbers

Insert tabs

Print your document as a booklet.

 Where this icon appears, click on it to display a popup hint.

If you click on a tool name, a popup will appear containing its picture.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial five: Designing a newsletter
Designing a newsletter

Setting up the page

1.	In the extended General Tools, click on the Fit Page tool. The whole page is now visible in the work area.

2.	Right-click on the pasteboard. A shortcut menu appears.

3.	In the shortcut menu, make sure the Show Frames and Guides option is checked.

4.	Click on the First Page button, to the left of the page indicator, to make sure that Page 1 is displayed in the work area.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial five: Designing a newsletter
Designing a newsletter

Changing the font size

1.	Select the frame with the main article text.

2.	Right-click on the text. The text shortcut menu appears.

3.	From the shortcut menu, select Select all Text. All the text in the frame is now selected.

4.	From the Point Size drop-down list box in the Text Tools, select 11.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial five: Designing a newsletter
Designing a newsletter

Flowing text into frames

If you import text into a frame that is too small, you can select or draw another frame in which to flow the remainder of the text:

1.	Select the frame with the main article text.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the Text Flow tool at the bottom of the frame. The mouse pointer changes to the text flow cursor.

3.	Click on the Text Flow tool.

4.	Position the text flow cursor over the frame on the right-hand side.

5.	Click the left mouse button. The text flows into the selected frame.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial five: Designing a newsletter
Designing a newsletter

Using tabs

Tabs are very useful for lining up text accurately. You can also apply leaders, that lead your eyes across the page to the tab position.

Positioning a tab

1.	Select the frame at the top and center of the page.

2.	Right-click on the text. The text shortcut menu appears.

3.	Select Select all text. All the text in the frame is now selected.

4.	On the tab bar in the top ruler, position the mouse pointer over the number 2.5.

5.	Click the left mouse button. A tab stop appears.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial five: Designing a newsletter
Designing a newsletter

Editing a tab stop

1.	Right-click on the tab stop. The tab stop shortcut menu appears.

2.	Select properties. The Tab Stop dialog box appears.

3.	In the Leader Character text box, type a period(.).

4.	In the Leader Spacing text box, type 3.

5.	In the Tab Position box, make sure 2.5 is displayed.

6.	From the Type drop-down list box, make sure Left is selected.

7.	Click on OK.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial five: Designing a newsletter
Designing a newsletter

Inserting a tab

1.	Position the mouse pointer at the end of the first line of text.

2.	Click the left mouse button. The text insertion point appears at the end of the text.

3.	On your keyboard, press Tab. A row of dots appears at the end of the line of text.

4.	Type 2.

5.	Repeat steps 1-4 with the other two lines of text, inserting the numbers 4 and 6.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial five: Designing a newsletter
Designing a newsletter

Page numbering

You are now going to add page numbers to the newsletter:

1.	From the Page menu, select Page Numbers. The Page dialog box appears with the Page Numbers tab selected.

2.	Check the Insert Page Number check box.

3.	From the Style group box, select the second style of page numbers: i ii iii.

4.	In the Position drop-down list box make sure Bottom of Page (in Footer) is selected.

5.	In the Alignment drop-down list box, make sure Center is selected.

6.	Click on OK. The page number appears centrally in the footer of each page.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial five: Designing a newsletter
Designing a newsletter

Booklet printing

If you want to turn your finished document into a booklet, you will need to select this function when printing it out. It automatically organizes the pages to print in such an order, that when you fold them into a booklet, the pages are in their original order. The pages automatically resize to fit into half the printed page. There are on-screen prompts to tell you when to turn the paper over.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial five: Designing a newsletter
Designing a newsletter

Printing your document

1.	From the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box appears.

2.	Click on the Paper tab.

3.	From the Paper Mapping list box, select Booklet printing.

4.	In the Paper Sides group box, check the Pause Between Sides check box.

5.	Click on Print. The Printing on Both Sides dialog box appears.

6.	In the Paper Tray group box, check the details match the printer you are using.

7.	In the Output Bin group box, check the details match the printer you are using.

8.	Click on OK. Your newsletter will now be printed in booklet form.

You have made all the necessary changes to the newsletter and can now go on to create a newsletter for yourself.


Tutorial six


Tutorial six: Producing a set of business cards
Producing a set of business cards

Welcome to the MasterPublisher Tutorials! This is the sixth of eight tutorials we have put online to make them easier to work through. To move on to the next page, just click on the Next (>>) button.

While producing your business cards, you will learn how to:

Set up custom stationery

Insert fields

Add textures

Create PowerText

Print a mail merge document.

 Where this icon appears, click on it to display a popup hint.

If you click on a tool name, a popup will appear containing its picture.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial six: Producing a set of business cards
Producing a set of business cards

Setting up the page

1.	Right-click on the pasteboard. A shortcut menu appears.

2.	From the shortcut menu, make sure the Show Frames and Guides option is checked.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial six: Producing a set of business cards
Producing a set of business cards

Setting up custom stationery

You are now going to create custom stationery for your business card:

1.	From the Page menu, select Page Size & Orientation. The Page dialog box appears with the Size & Orientation tab selected.

2.	From the Style and Size drop-down list box, select Business Card.

3.	In the Style and Size group box, click on Add. The Add Custom Stationery dialog box appears.

4.	In the Name box, type a name for your custom stationery, e.g. Fish.

5.	Type the following amounts in the appropriate boxes:

Width:3.55

Height:1.95

Left Indent:0.5

Top Indent:0.6

Horizontal Pitch:3.75

Vertical Pitch:2.15

6.	In the Number Across box, make sure 2 is selected.

7.	In the Number Down box, make sure 5 is selected.

8.	Click on OK. You return to the Size & Orientation tab of the Page dialog box.

9.	Make sure the Resize Frames check box is checked.

10.	In the Size list box, make sure the name of your custom stationery is selected.

11.	Click on OK.

12.	From the View menu, select Fit Page. The whole page is now visible in the work area.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial six: Producing a set of business cards
Producing a set of business cards

Creating a mailing list

1.	From the File menu, select Mail Merge. The Edit Mailing List dialog box appears.

2.	In the first row of the Name column, type Joe Bloggs.

3.	Use the right arrow key to move the text insertion point to the first row of the E-mail column.

4.	In the first row of the E-mail column, type joe@email.com.

5.	In the first row of the Phone column, type 555-123-456.

6.	Enter a second and third row of details in exactly the same way for the following people:

Name: 	John Doe

Jane Smith

E-mail:	john@email.com

jane@email.com

Phone:	555-987-654

555-654-321

7.	When you have entered the details in the columns, click on Close.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial six: Producing a set of business cards
Producing a set of business cards

Inserting a field

To insert the mail merge fields into your document:

1.	Select Frame 1.

2.	Position the mouse pointer over the top left-hand corner of the frame. The mouse pointer changes to an I-beam.

3.	Click the left mouse button. The text insertion point appears in the frame.

4.	From the Text menu, select Insert. The Insert submenu appears.

5.	From the Insert submenu, select Mail Merge Field. The Insert Mail Merge Field dialog box appears.

6.	From the Field to insert list box, select Name.

7.	Click on OK. The currently selected name from the mailing list appears in the frame.

8.	Select Frame 2.

9.	Repeat steps 2-7, this time selecting E-mail from the Insert Mail Merge Field dialog box.

10.	Select Frame 3.

11.	Repeat steps 2-7, this time selecting Phone from the Insert Mail Merge Field dialog box.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial six: Producing a set of business cards
Producing a set of business cards

Adding a background texture

You are going to color your business card using a background texture:

1.	Select the large frame that covers the whole page.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Background. The Frame Properties dialog box appears with the Background tab selected.

3.	From the Style box, select the fifth texture on the bottom row. The texture appears in the selected frame.

4.	In the Attributes group box, check the Custom Color check box.

5.	From the drop-down color palette, select Dark Red. The texture changes color to Dark Red.

6.	Drag the Detail slider all the way to High. The texture is now displayed in greater detail.

7.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial six: Producing a set of business cards
Producing a set of business cards

Creating PowerText

The next step is to create a logo for your business card using PowerText:

1.	Select the frame on the right-hand side of the page.

2.	From the extended Toolbox, select the PowerText tool. The PowerText Gallery appears.

3.	Click on the Home button to make sure the default folder is displayed in the preview area.

4.	From the PowerText Gallery, select Tutorial.

5.	Click on Open. The 3D text layer appears in the PowerText preview window, ready for you to begin work.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial six: Producing a set of business cards
Producing a set of business cards

Entering text

1.	In the Text box, double-click on the existing text. The text is now highlighted.

2.	Make sure Caps Lock is selected on your keyboard.

3.	Type FISH.

4.	Press Enter.

5.	Deselect Caps Lock on your keyboard.

6.	Type music.

7.	Press Enter.

8.	Type studios.

Changing the font

1.	Make sure the Font tab is selected.

2.	From the Font list box, select Ravel.

Click on the Next button (>>).


Tutorial six: Producing a set of business cards
Producing a set of business cards

Choosing the letter spacing

1.	Click on the Spacing tab.

2.	In the Letter Spacing group box, click on the Loose button. The text changes accordingly in the preview window.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial six: Producing a set of business cards
Producing a set of business cards

Changing the text color

1.	Click on the 3D Lighting tab.

2.	In the Text Color group box, select Orange from the Color drop-down palette.

3.	Drag the Brightness slider so that it is roughly 3 quarters of the way towards Bright.

4.	In the Spotlight group box, select Yellow from the Color drop-down palette.

5.	In the Spotlight group box, click on the Top Right button next to the Direction arcball.

6.	Click on OK. The PowerText is placed in the selected frame, and you return to your document.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial six: Producing a set of business cards
Producing a set of business cards

Printing your document

1.	From the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box appears.

2.	In the Mail Merge Selection group box, select All Records.

3.	In the Number text box, type 3.

4.	Click on Print. Your business card will now print 3 copies of each mail merge entry on a Letter sized page.


Tutorial seven


Tutorial seven: Designing a fundraising poster
Designing a fundraising poster

Welcome to the MasterPublisher Tutorials! This is the seventh of eight tutorials we have put online to make them easier to work through. To move on to the next page, just click on the Next (>>) button.

While designing your fundraising poster, you will learn how to:

Create PowerText

Edit a border

Format text.

 Where this icon appears, click on it to display a popup hint.

If you click on a tool name, a popup will appear containing its picture.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial seven: Designing a fundraising poster
Designing a fundraising poster

Setting up your page

1.	From the View menu, select Fit Page. The view size is changed so that you can see the whole page.

2.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

3.	Click on the View tab.

4.	In the View Markers group box, make sure the Frames & Margins check box is checked.

5.	Click on OK.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial seven: Designing a fundraising poster
Designing a fundraising poster

Creating PowerText

1.	Select the empty frame at the top of the page with no border.

2.	From the extended Toolbox, click on the PowerText tool. The PowerText Gallery appears.

3.	Click on the Home button to make sure the default folder is displayed in the preview area.

4.	From the PowerText Gallery, select 2D Text.

5.	Click on Open. The 2D text layer appears in the PowerText preview window, ready for you to begin work.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial seven: Designing a fundraising poster
Designing a fundraising poster

Entering text

1.	In the Text box, select the existing text.

2.	On your keyboard, make sure Caps Lock is selected.

3.	Type FUNDRAISING.

4.	Press Enter.

5.	Type EVENT. The text appears in the preview window and has the current effects applied to it.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial seven: Designing a fundraising poster
Designing a fundraising poster

Selecting a font and text effect

1.	Make sure the Font tab is selected.

2.	From the Font list box, select Glowworm MN.

3.	From the Position tools, select Centered.

4.	Click on the Text Effect tab.

5.	From the Effects scroll box, select the effect shown below:

6.	Drag the Degree of Effect slider all the way to the right.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial seven: Designing a fundraising poster
Designing a fundraising poster

Selecting a color, pattern and line style

1.	Click on the Color tab.

2.	In the Outline group box, select the third unbroken line style from the Style list box.

3.	From the drop-down color palette, select Red.

4.	In the Fill group box, select Cylindrical from the Pattern list box.

5.	From the top drop-down color palette, select Dark Blue.

6.	From the bottom drop-down dolor palette, select Red.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial seven: Designing a fundraising poster
Designing a fundraising poster

Setting the spacing

1.	Click on the Spacing tab.

2.	In the Letter Spacing group box, select Tight.

3.	In the Line Spacing group box, select Loose.

4.	Click on OK. You return to MasterPublisher and the PowerText is placed in the selected frame.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial seven: Designing a fundraising poster
Designing a fundraising poster

Editing a border

You are going to change one of the borders for one more suited to this poster:

1.	Select the frame at the bottom of the page with the ‘heart’ border.

2.	From the Frame menu, select Border. The Frame Properties dialog box appears with the Border Styles tab selected.

3.	Scroll down and select the border below the ‘sun’ border. The border appears around the selected frame and should match the border around the large yellow frame.

4.	Click on the Close button in the top right-hand corner of the title bar.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial seven: Designing a fundraising poster
Designing a fundraising poster

Changing text color

1.	Position the mouse pointer over the text in the bottom frame. The mouse pointer changes to an I-beam.

2.	Click the right mouse button. The text shortcut menu appears.

3.	From the text shortcut menu, select Select all text. All of the text in the frame is highlighted.

4.	In the color bar, click on 100% Dark Blue. The text changes color.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial seven: Designing a fundraising poster
Designing a fundraising poster

Formatting text

1.	Make sure the text is still selected.

2.	In the Paragraph Tools, click on the Centered tool. The text is now centered in the frame.

3.	In the Text Tools, click on the Bold tool.

4.	Click away from the page to deselect any frames.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial seven: Designing a fundraising poster
Designing a fundraising poster

Clearing a background color

An easy way to make sure that two overlapping frames appear the same color is to clear the background color of the frame in front:

1.	Select the frame at the bottom of the page.

2.	Right-click on the Clear Color button (X) at the left of the color bar. A shortcut menu appears.

3.	Select Frame background. This clears the frame of color, so you can see the frame behind.

The fundraising poster is now complete. This tutorial has explained how to create PowerText, format text and edit border styles.


Tutorial eight


Tutorial eight: Editing photos in a poster
Editing photos in a poster

Welcome to the MasterPublisher Tutorials! This is the last of eight tutorials we have put online to make them easier to work through. To move on to the next page, just click on the Next (>>) button.

This tutorial explains how to use PhotoEditor in MasterPublisher. PhotoEditor allows you to make a photo brighter, sharper in focus or even black and white. You can alter the texture of a photo or crop a specific area of it.

 Where this icon appears, click on it to display a popup hint.

If you click on a tool name, a popup will appear containing its picture.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial eight: Editing photos in a poster
Editing photos in a poster

Setting up the page

1.	From the View menu, select Fit Page. The view size is changed so that you can see the whole page.

2.	From the Options menu, select Preferences. The Preferences dialog box appears.

3.	Click on the View tab.

4.	In the View Markers group box, make sure the Frames & Margins check box is checked.

5.	Click on OK.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial eight: Editing photos in a poster
Editing photos in a poster

Editing the first picture

To edit the cloud photo:

1.	Double-click on the frame containing the cloud photo at the top of the page. PhotoEditor opens, with the photo displayed in both the Original and Preview windows.

2.	Click on the Focus and Texture tab.

3.	In the Texture group box, drag the slider all the way towards Grainy.

4.	In the Focus group box, drag the slider all the way towards Soft.

5.	From the File menu select Exit and return to MasterPublisher. PhotoEditor closes and the edited photo now appears in the selected frame.

Click on the Next (>>) button.


Tutorial eight: Editing photos in a poster
Editing photos in a poster

Editing the second picture

To edit the photo of the sunset at the bottom of the page:

1.	Double-click on the frame containing the sunset picture. PhotoEditor opens, with the photo displayed in both the Original and Preview windows.

2.	Click on the Brightness and Contrast tab.

3.	In the Brightness group box, drag the slider all the way towards Light.

4.	Click on the Focus and Texture tab.

5.	In the Focus group box, drag the slider all the way towards Sharp.

6.	From the File menu select Exit and return to MasterPublisher. PhotoEditor closes and the edited photo now appears in the selected frame.

Your holiday poster is now completed. You can now change the look of any document containing photos.


To extend the Toolbox, click on the down arrow in the bottom right-hand corner of the Toolbox.


When you are drawing a frame, an outline of the frame appears as a guideline to help you.


If you can’t see the changes being made to the frame, you can move the dialog box to one side by dragging its title bar.


When you move the mouse pointer over a color, its name appears in the information line.


When you move the mouse pointer over a color, its name appears in the information line. If you can’t see the color you need, use the left and right arrows at each end of the color bar to scroll along the selection.


To extend the General Tools, click on the right arrow at the right-hand side of the toolbar.


Don’t worry about the exact size or position, you will change that next.


Any changes you make when inside this dialog box, take effect immediately.


This frame is locked and so the frame cursor appears similar to a No Entry sign and the frame handles have a cross through them.


Use the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard to move the slider by increments of 1%.


If the first page is already displayed in the work area, the First Page button is disabled.


When you hold down Ctrl, you can only rotate a frame by multiples of 45 degrees.


The exact measurements of the frame are shown at the right-hand end of the information line.


For information on saving and printing, refer to the online Help.


Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the dialog box to view the columns.


Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the preview box to view the range of backgrounds available.


To see exactly how this document will be printed out, click on Print Preview.


Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the box to view the range of effects.


The changes you have made are shown in the preview window.


The note will appear here.


When you draw or resize a frame with Snap to Guides & Grid turned on, the horizontal and vertical edges of the frames are drawn to the column guides and grid ensuring that accurate and consistent frames are created.


When the frame handles around the frame are visible, the frame is selected.


The photo in the Preview window shows the effect of these changes.


If you make a mistake, click on the Undo button; all the changes you have made on the current tab are undone.

The photo in the Preview window shows the effect of these changes.


Column guides are represented by gray dotted rectangles, with an equal amount of space between each column guide. They appear on every page, but are not printed.


  Box tool.


  Ellipse tool.


  Line tool.


  Table tool.


  Picture tool.


  PowerText tool.


  Copy tool.


  Paste tool.


  Fit Page tool.


  Edit Paragraph Style tool.


  Centered tool.


  Bold tool.


  Underline tool.


  Insert date tool.


The pasteboard is the area around the document page.


  Font tab.


  3D Spacing tab.


  3D Lighting tab.


  Text Effect tab.


  Color tab.


  2D Spacing tab.


Main dialog box


Click on this to display the 3D Text tab and 3D text controls.


Click on this to display the Text tab and text controls.


Click on this to display the Background tab and background controls.


Click on this to insert a layer from the PowerText Gallery.


Click on this to delete the current layer.


Displays your PowerText effect and any changes you make to it.


Type your text in here.


Click on this to save your PowerText effect to the Gallery.


Click on this to move the selected layer forward one level.


Click on this to move the selected layer back one level.


Font tab


Click on this to display the Font tab, with which you can change the font, position, style and baseline of your text. With this tab you can also skew your text.


Displays the list of fonts available in their respective font styles. Use the scroll bar to view the range of fonts.


Type directly into the Size box, or use the up and down arrows at the side to select a point size for your font.


Click on this to align your text to the left.


Click on this to justify your text.


Click on this to align your text to the right.


Click on this to center your text.


Click on this to stretch your text to fit the frame.


Click on this to rotate the baseline of your text.


Click on this to skew the baseline of your text.


Click on this to render your text upright on its baseline.


Skew your text by doing one of the following:

Typing directly into the Skew box

Using the up and down arrows on the side of the box

Dragging the radius of the Skew circle.


Click on this to toggle your text between small caps and lower case.


Click on this to change your text to italics.


Click on this to make your text bold.


Spacing tab


Click on this to display the Spacing tab, with which you can change the line and letter spacing of your text.


Click on this to select loose letter spacing.


Click on this to select normal letter spacing.


Click on this to select tight letter spacing.


Click on this to select overlapping letter spacing.


Type directly into the percentage box, or use the up and down arrows on the side of the box to further adjust the letter spacing.


Click on this to select double line spacing.


Click on this to select loose line spacing.


Click on this to select normal line spacing.


Click on this to select tight line spacing.


Type directly into the percentage box, or use the up and down arrows to further adjust the line spacing.


Click on the radio button to select an overlapping style, where the letter on the left overlaps the letter on the right.


Click on the radio button to select an overlapping style, where the letter on the right overlaps the letter on the left.


Color tab


Click on this to display the Color tab with which you can change the color of your 2D text or background. With this tab you can also change the outline and fill style of your 2D text or background.


Use this list box to select the outline of your 2D text or background. Use the scroll bar to view the range of outlines available.


Click on the arrow to display the drop-down color palette, from which you can change the outline color of your 2D text or background.


Use this list box to select the fill style of your 2D text or background. Use the scroll bar to view the range of fill styles available.


Click on the arrow to display the drop-down color palette, from which you can change the color of your 2D text or background fill style.


Displays a pictorial representation of the currently selected graduated fill style. If you have selected Logarithmic or Linear, you can drag the arrow to change the direction of the color blend.


Click on the arrow to display the drop-down color palette, from which to change the ‘from’ color of your 2D text or background fill style.


Click on the arrow to display the drop-down color palette, from which you can change the ‘to’ color of your 2D text or background fill style.


Text effect tab


Click on this to display the Text Effect tab, with which you can change your text effect and its degree of distortion.


Displays the text effects available. Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the box to view the range of effects.


Displays a pictorial representation of the minimum degree of distortion on your text effect.


Displays a pictorial representation of the maximum degree of distortion on your text effect.


Drag the slider to change the degree of distortion on your text effect.


Shadow tab


Click on this to display the Shadow tab, with which you can add a shadow to your 2D text or background. With this tab you can also change the position, style, and color of the shadow.


Click on this to have no shadow for your 2D text or background.


Click on this to select a Drop Shadow for your 2D text or background.


Click on this to select a Skew Shadow for your 2D text or background.


Change the direction of the shadow by doing one of the following:

Typing directly into the Direction box

Using the up and down arrows on the side of the box

Dragging the radius on the Direction circle.


Drag the slider to change the position of the 2D text or background shadow.


Click on the arrow to display the Outline drop-down list box, from which you can select an outline for your 2D text or background shadow. Use the scroll bar to view the range of outlines.


Click on the arrow to display the drop-down color palette, from which you can change the outline color of your 2D text or background shadow.


Click on the arrow to display the Fill drop-down list box, from which you can select a fill style for your 2D text or background shadow. Use the scroll bar to view the range of fill styles.


Click on the arrow to display the drop-down color palette, from which you can change the color of your 2D text or background shadow fill style.


Displays a pictorial representation of the currently selected graduated fill style. If you have selected Logarithmic or Linear, you can drag the arrow to change the direction of the color blend.


Click on the arrow to display the drop-down color palette, from which you can change the ‘from’ color of your 2D text or background shadow fill style.


Click on the arrow to display the drop-down color palette, from which you can change the ‘to’ color of your 2D text or background shadow fill style.


Rotate tab


Click on this to display the Rotate tab, with which you can rotate your 2D text or background.


Click on this to rotate your 2D text or background 45 degrees to the left.


Click on this to rotate your 2D text or background 45 degrees to the right.


Click on this to rotate your 2D text or background 90 degrees to the left.


Click on this to rotate your 2D text or background 90 degrees to the right.


Click on this to flip your 2D text or background horizontally across a vertical axis.


Click on this to flip your 2D text or background vertically across a horizontal axis.


Change the angle of rotation by doing one of the following:

Typing directly into the box

Using the up and down arrows on the side of the box

Dragging the radius on the Rotate circle.


Background tab


Click on this to select a square background.


Click on this to select a diamond background.


Click on this to select a circle background.


Click on this to select a star background.


Click on this to select a background shape to match your text effect.


Select the number of points for your star background by typing directly into the No. Of Points box or by using the up and down arrows on the side of the box.


A pictorial representation of the minimum inner radius of your star.


A pictorial representation of the maximum inner radius of your star.


Drag the slider to change the inner radius of your star. The lower the radius, the thinner your star will be.


Check this check box to toggle the Text Inside option on and off. This option is only enabled when a star or diamond background shape is selected.


Check this check box to toggle the Points Inside option on and off. This option is only enabled when a star background shape is selected.


3D text tab: effects


Click on this to display the 3D Effects tab, with which you can choose either a solid or hollow effect for your 3D text and how far back the text extrudes.


Displays the 3D effects.


A pictorial representation of the minimum thickness of the 3D effect.


A pictorial representation of the maximum thickness of the 3D effect.


Drag the slider to change the thickness of the 3D effect.


Lighting tab


Click on this to display the Lighting tab, with which you can change the color of your 3D text and the color and brightness of the light shining on it.


Drag the slider to alter the brightness of the text color.


Click on the arrow to display the drop-down color palette, from which you can change the color of your 3D text.


Drag the slider to alter the brightness of the spotlight color.


Click on the arrow to display the drop-down color palette, from which you can change the color of the spotlight on your 3D text.


Drag this arcball to change the angle of the spotlight on your 3D text.


Click on this to direct the spotlight straight on to your text.


Click on this to direct the spotlight from the top left-hand corner.


Click on this to direct the spotlight from the top right-hand corner.


Orientation tab


Click on this to display the Orientation tab, with which you can alter the orientation and view of your 3D text.


Drag the arcball to control the orientation of the 3D text.


Click on this to move the arcball and 3D text back to the default position.


A pictorial representation of the lowest perspective on your 3D text.


A pictorial representation of the highest perspective on your 3D text.


Drag the slider to determine the perspective on your 3D text.


Gallery


Displays the layers available.


Click on this to open or insert a selected layer.


Click on this to cancel the command and close the PowerText Gallery.


Type your path in the text box, or click on the arrow to display a drop down list box from which you can select a folder.


Click on this to display the contents of the folder one level above the currently selected folder in its path.


Drag this to display all the drives available. You can select folders and files in the same way as you would in Windows Explorer.


Click on this to display the default folder in the preview area.


Click on this to change the way your files and folders are displayed in the browser. Click on the arrow to display the menu listing the views available. You can also right-click in the preview area to display a menu listing further options.

Select Folder tree from the menu to display a tree view of the drives and folders available in a window on the left-hand side of the preview window. The drives and folders are displayed in the same way as in Windows Explorer.